Home

English version - NL5 Circuit Simulator

1. Description Hide or show traces on the graph The parameter stateN specifies show hide status of the trace number N traces are listed in the same order as in the Transient Data or AC Data window stateN Q0 hide trace otherwise show trace Examples traces Oy body Bill dos 493 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual tracename transient Usage tracename tracename from tracename from to tracename from to step Description Request transient trace data as a comma separated string from start of the data interval to end of the data interval step step tracename returns 101 points of entire tracename interval tracename from returns only one trace value at t from tracename from to returns 101 points in specified interval tracename from to step returns data points in specified interval with specified step Trace tracename should be specified in the Transient Data however it does not need to be displayed on the graph or in the table Number of points cannot exceed Max number of points value defined in the Preferences dialog box Transient page This command can be called from HTTP link only Examples V R1 VRLI Diz VIRI 07 10037 VARII Oy FOr Ost 494 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual tracename AC Usage tracename tracename from tracename from to tracename from to points tracename from to points scale Description Reque
2. LN dIN dt Where Mij Kij sqrt Li Lj is mutual inductance Mij Mji When calculating DC operating point initial conditions ICN are independently applied to corresponding inductors LN similar to how it is done for the component L inductor If only one winding is defined a component behaves exactly as a linear inductor L Please be aware that coupling coefficients Kij should be properly specified within allowable range 1 1 in order to represent a physically realizable system See NL5 website http nl5 sidelinesoft com and other public resources for more details If all coupling coefficients are equal to 1 or 1 using Winding components W with one magnetizing inductor will give better performance and more stable solution L Custom coupled inductors L L_CustomCoupledInductors_SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 PinN Name of subcircuit label connected to pin N Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 341 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Amplifier Linear I OpAmp gt Comparator f rin y Function E PWL aE SubCir P Vel O Amplifier O O_Amplifier_Linear nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Linear K V V Gain Hz Unit gain frequency IC V Initial condition output voltage Line
3. Cancel Apply Text Set properties of the text in the table other than phase in AC data table A e Font size Set font size of the text 4 e Font Select font of the text 4 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Phase Set properties of the phase text in AC data table A e Font size Set font size of the text abc A e Font Select font of text e Alignment Select alignment of the text Significant digits Set number of significant digits for data table and Markers Tool e Time Frequency e Data e Colors Double click on the item in the list to change the color Text Phase text Pics 61 2802 Phase background SSS 150 48 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Legend Set properties of the Legend window Preferences Preferences Application Document schematic Drawings Legend Annotation A e Legend font size Set font size of a legend window e Max width If unselected the width of the Legend window will be automatically adjusted to fit names of the traces If selected the width of the legend window will be automatically adjusted but only up to specified width NNN height of legend window font 49 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Annotation Set properties of annotations in Transient and AC windows Preferences Annotation von Preferences Application Double click to change the col
4. To change the view of the component use the following buttons and shortcuts Tz e Next view Select next view of a component with multiple views e e keys Select next previous image of a component by changing view mirror and or flip component whichever is applicable These commands can also be applied to a new component while placing component using keyboard before pressing Enter 79 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Label Label is similar to component except that there can be many labels with the same name in the schematic All labels with the same name are electrically connected Labels in the subcircuit are local to the subcircuit and are not connected with the main schematic Labels can be used To connect different points of the schematic without wire To connect parts of the schematic located on different sheets As a simulation probe V trace As a voltage source The following diagram and example show the process of placing label Keyboard Selection Bar Click on label Press Enter gt OR les Enter new label name or select existing label from drop down list Label Cancel Schematic Window Select model Components Window xi Tw X AEX ZOA Name Value Labell Edit parameters Double click on label To place label press Enter on the wire or empty space or click on Label image ac in the Selection Bar Label dialo
5. lin IC lout I1C if VIC and IIC are specified Vin Vout VIC lin IC lout 11C The model allocates all the required memory immediately at transient start The amount of memory is proportional to line delay and inverse proportional to calculation step If the memory required exceeds a limit specified in preferences Transient page the warning message Is displayed If real line characteristics are given in line capacitance and inductance per length the following equations can be used to derive t0 and z0 parameters tO sqrt L C D ZO sart L C where C line capacitance per length F m L line inductance per length H m D line length m 432 User s Manual BJ NL5 circuit simulator X Views Sample Hold SH I SubCir Pa Vin P Vel Models Traces Views are used to specify type and polarity of control Peep A X Sample Hold Model SH X X_SampleHold_SH nl5 Parameter Units Description IC V Initial condition output voltage Sample hold track hold Depending on view the model is functioning as a sample hold or as a track hold In sample hold mode input voltage is sampled at rising or falling edge of a logical clock signal In track hold mode output voltage tracks input voltage while clock signal is above the logical threshold and holds it while clock signal is below the logical threshold clock signal
6. If IC is blank static characteristic is used l 8 lb Equivalent schematic Static characteristic AC response 39 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T NPN transistor T T_NPN_Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Vbe V Forward voltage drop of base emitter diode IC Initial condition of base emitter diode Off On BJT transistor switch Current controlled switch with a base emitter diode Switch is closed if diode current is non zero When calculating DC operating point the diode is set to the state specified in IC C Equivalent schematic 392 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T NPN transistor T T_NPN_Transistor nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Transistor B A A Gain beta Hz Unit gain frequency Vbe V Forward voltage drop of base emitter diode Vsat V Collector emitter saturation voltage drop IC A Initial condition collector current ICbe Initial condition of base emitter diode Off On ICbc Initial condition of base collector diode Off On BJT transistor Simplified Ebers Moll BUT transistor model with saturation It consists of two diodes base emitter and base collector and current source controlled by current through L 1 8 If collector emitter voltage is higher than Vsat base collector diode is open transistor is not saturated and behaves as Linear model current controlled current source with specified bandwidth B is open loop gain beta
7. J NL5 circuit simulator export transient Usage export export Export eEXpOrt export filename filename filename filename Description ECO Trom LO LOM LOs Export transient traces into csv file filename from start of the data interval to end of the data interval step timestep SUSO name of the file to export traces User s Manual If filename is omitted name of the file to export is the same as script file name with csv extension If file path is not specified export in the script file directory Extension csv can be omitted Number of points cannot exceed Max number of points value defined in the Preferences dialog box Transient page If step is omitted 101 points will be exported Only traces currently shown on the graph will be exported Examples EXPOEL EXPOrt EC Traces export re traces export re Traces 0 0 100 LOU Oks L 485 M4 NL5 circuit simulator expo Usage export export Export eEXpOrt export export rt AC filename filename filename filename filename Description TEON Tromm TEOG from Export AC traces into csv file filename from start frequency to end frequency number of points DOLNES scale Log of Lan EO CO POLES CO POLINES SCale name of the file to export traces logarithmic or linear frequency scale User s Manual If filename is omi
8. Te A Y scale i Traces Storage Tune Offset fe Histogram f Line e Show vertical gridlines e Show names Close o Y values Select variables to be displayed on Y axis Active is currently selected cursor left or right Other values are similar to what 1s displayed in the transient Data table o X Select histogram mode what is shown on X axis Traces Show cross section of all traces currently displayed on the graph Storage Show cross section of the storage for all traces currently displayed on the graph 196 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o Type Select histogram type for Storage mode Histogram Line o Y scale By default histogram Y scale is the same as transient screen vertical scale Uncheck Use transient scale checkbox to enter Y scale Multiplier and Offset Show vertical gridlines Check to show vertical gridlines dividing histogram data Show names Check to show trace or storage names on the X axis Use transient scale e Vertical Zoom in e Vertical Zoom out e 2 e Fit the screen vertical e Right click on the window to access relevant commands e Double click on the window to open Settings dialog box e Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in Transient Window Traces mode or traces cross section
9. 308 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function Model Table F Function Model SubCir F F_Function_ Table nl5 Parameter Units Description Table Comma separated string Vin Vout pairs IC V Initial condition output voltage Look up table Function output is defined by Table parameter in the csv comma separated values format as follows X1 Y1 X2 Y2 XN YN where Xi Yi pair defines input value X and output value Y Output value between specified points is linearly interpolated Output value below X1 is linearly extrapolated using X1 X2 interval data output value above XN is linearly extrapolated using X N 1 XN interval data Values X1 XN should be given in an ascending order See Working with Table model chapter for more details When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop F F Function SubCir nl5 Parameter Units Description File File name of subcircuit schematic Pint Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 309 BJ NL5 circuit simulator F Function 2 Ex Function Mul Div Sum Sub
10. common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance Switch is in active state after Delay time The following switching diagram shows state of common to dotted pin path for Active On Common to another pin always has an opposite state n Ott Delay t 375 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT switch V S_ SPDT_Switch_List nl5 Model Parameter Units Description List List Comma separated string Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay SPDT single pole double throw list switch Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance Switching sequence is defined in the List parameter in the csv comma separated values format as follows t0 s0 t1 s1 tn sn s0 sn defines switch state positive number corresponds to On state zero or negative number Off state If t lt t0 switch is in sO state At tO switch is set to sO state At t1 switch is set to s1 state and so on At t gt tn switch remains in sn state if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise states sequence defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time
11. gt Tab selection Upper pane of the window contains graph of the signal Lower pane contains 2 tabs for entering data and configuration 113 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T o Move cursor over splitter area then press left mouse button and drag to resize panes Right click on the graphs area to see context menu with relevant commands Click OK to accept changes and close dialog box or Cancel to cancel changes Click Toolbar buttons to perform the following operations ta o Open data from the file in csv format Fl o Save data into the file in csv format o Clear all data wo Refresh graphs This operation also sorts out data points to be in ascending order and place each time value pair on separate line List tab Provides List parameter data in the text form for editing Simply enter time value pairs in arbitrary format Click Refresh button to sort it out and display on the graph Settings tab Use this tab to configure the graph e Show gridlines e Show numbers 114 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Working with Table model Table model describes look up table of the Function component Table parameter of the model defines input output pairs in the following format X1 Y1 X2 ls AN y YN where Xi Yi pair defines input value x and output value Y Output value between specified points is linearly interpolated Output
12. is not defined blank inductor is temporarily replaced by short circuit DC operating point calculated and then the current through short circuit is assigned to the inductor as its initial current 337 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual L Views Current controlled inductor PWL 2 7 I in V p E P Vel i i a A A L Current controlled inductor L L_CCL_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string L l n IC A Initial condition current Leave blank if IC not defined Piece wise linear current controlled inductor At any moment inductor is a linear inductor lts inductance L is a function of control current V L lin dl dt owl string defines inductance as a function of control current lin See Working with PWL model chapter for details When calculating DC operating point if IC is defined inductor is replaced with current source equal to IC If IC is not defined blank inductor is temporarily replaced by short circuit DC operating point calculated and then the current through short circuit is assigned to the inductor as its initial current 338 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual L Coupled inductors n D ETY 3 2 DY 12 wi i 2 v2 ETA pa E po 1 2 gt L Coupled inductors L L_CoupledInductors_L nl5 Model Parameter Units Description L L1 H L1 inductance L2 H L2 inductance K Coupling coefficient 1 1 IC1 A L1 initial condition curr
13. mouse wheel rotation and Ctrl and Shift keys held Select action from o None o Zoom o Hor scroll o Vert scroll e Invert Zoom invert Zoom In Out operation 42 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Components Set properties of components and variables window and default parameters of a new component Preferences Components von Preferences Application Document Components and variables window Schematic e Drawings A E Font size 4 Font Show units with Grey color 2 Mer component Z Legend fi e A Ohm Annotation fi e 9 EF E E 7 lo Vd Diode Y Cancel Apply Components and variables window e Font size Set font size of components and variables window e Font Select font of components and variables window e Show units with color Select color to display units of the parameter in the components window o None do not show units o Grey show with grey color o Black show with black color New component Set default value of a new component R Ohm resistor C F capacitor L H inductor Vd Diode V diode forward voltage 43 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Symbols Select symbols of some component types Preferences Preferences Application Document Schematic Drawings e Voltage source Symbol of voltage source voltage controlled and current controlled voltage so
14. tn In where all t and can be numerical values or expressions If t lt t0 signal is 10 If t0 lt t lt t1 signal value is linearly interpolated between 10 and 11 etc If t gt tn then signal value is In if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise signal defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example pwl DO LO O If Cycle Yes Delay 0 the following current will be generated See Working with PWL source chapter for more details I Current source I _ CS Function nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Arbitrary function F t defines current as a function of the following variables t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F t is blank current is zero Example F t sin t 1 cos t 01 F t V R1 I R1 Please note that V I and P variables are taken at previous calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop 324 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I I Current source I I CS File nl5 Model Parameter Units Description File File File name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Current source defined in the text file File parameter is a file name with full path to the file If the f
15. Low signal frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency B and f1 can be set to infinity inf base emitter diode with gain alpha If collector voltage drops below Vsat base collector diode is closed and transistor is saturated collector emitter voltage is equal to Vsat When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined collector current is set to specified output current IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used Base emitter diode is set to the state specified in ICbe Base collector diode is set to the state specified in ICbc H lb Equivalent schematic Non saturated static Low signal AC response characteristic 393 BJ NL5 circuit simulator T NPN transistor Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pin1 Pin2 Pin3 Cmd IC User s Manual T T NPN_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 394 BJ NL5 circuit simulator T PNP transistor Y T PNP transistor Model Parameter Units Linear 28 NA Hz IC A User s Manual Linear y Switch Transistor b SubCir
16. Please note that input voltage x and variables V I and P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter s p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output voltage IC 345 BJ NL5 circuit simulator O Amplifier Model PWL O Amplifier Model SubCir Parameter pwl Units User s Manual O O_Amplifier_ PWL nI5 Description Comma separated string K Vin Piece wise linear amplifier Amplifier gain K is defined by pwl string as a function of input voltage Vin See Working with PWL model chapter for details Parameter File Pin1 Pin2 Cmd IC Units O O_Amplifier_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected
17. S S_CCS_Switch nl5 Description Current threshold Hysteresis Active state Off On Initial condition Off On Current controlled switch Switch is set to active or non active state using following rules lin gt Threshold Hysteresis 2 active lin lt Threshold Hysteresis 2 non active Otherwise previous state When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state defined in IC The following is switching diagram for Active On Hysteresis Threshold 371 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S Current controlled switch Model Pulse Parameter Units Width S Threshold A Active User s Manual S S_CCS Pulse nl5 Description Pulse width Current threshold Active state Off On One shot pulse generator When increasing input current lin crosses Threshold value switch is set to active state for Width time interval If increasing lin crosses Threshold value while switch is in active state the pulse is restarted S Current controlled switch Model Steps Parameter Units Threshold A Hysteresis A Roff Ohm Ron Ohm Slope Ramp S Steps IC S S_CCS_Steps nl5 Description Current threshold Hysteresis Off state resistance On state resistance Type of resistance change Linear Cos Log Resistance ramp time Number of resistance steps in the ramp Initial condition Off On Switch with resistance ramping When increasing input current l
18. The values shown in the table as well as other table options can be selected on Table page of Transient Data window x a gt e Mel Gay SS Hey A Traces Table Storage Screen y Check to show in the table e Show table Show table in separate window a Show times on the necia left right delta min maz pp mean rms acims freq period Check all Uncheck all Check all Uncheck all Apply Close e Show table Select to show table e Show table in separate window If selected the table will be displayed as a separate window 3 67505 6 46035 2 7853 viva fo Juicio 2 79145 13 90708 1 11563 pe m e Cursors 2 67505 2 7853 vio fo 10 10 Oven 2 79195 1 11563 e Show time on the header If selected cursors position will be shown in the header line in the left right and delta columns e Show time in the table If selected cursors positions will be shown in separate row e Table values Select values to display in the table left trace value at left cursor right trace value at right cursor delta right minus left min trace minimum between cursors OOOO 180 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual max trace maximum between cursors pp trace peak to peak value between cursors mean trace averaged value between cursors rms trace RMS root mean square value between cursors acrms trace AC RMS value between curso
19. Transient Control a A lala gt le Transient Settings ieee o et algorithm Transient Data Transient Tools ae Y diagram FFT Histogram Eye diagram Markers Transient Window Simulation algorithm is configured by Transient Settings dialog box and controlled by Transient Control commands Main Menu and Toolbar The results of Schematic simulation are stored into Simulation data and simultaneously displayed as a graph in the Transient Window Transient Data window is used to configure what simulation data are to be stored and how the data are displayed In addition the data can be used by Transient Tools which offer a variety of transient data analysis and data presentation 147 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Simulation Simulation algorithm NLS is a piece wise linear PWL simulator All the components in the NLS are either linear or piece wise linear consisting of a number of linear segments For instance a diode is either open or closed so that its PWL representation consists of just two segments As long as all of the components are staying within their current linear segment the circuit is described by the same system of linear differential equations The system is modified only at the moments when at least one component changes its linear segment When this happens the current linear range simulation ends and another one starts Typical NLS simulation consists of DC operating
20. Y t x i kx 1l H 000300 ps OuUtput y ri OR Cancel abc o Select font of the text EE e Help F1 Click to open Help To see Help topic on specific statement operator or function place cursor on the word in the code and click the button or press Fl ah xX wv ws for this is code Loop operator Example for i O i lt 10 i fori i O iif i f a a a ee O Place cursor on for operator Click Help button Help on for operator is displayed or press F1 123 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Working with DLL model In DLL model of the Code component the component function code can be written in standard C language compiled by C compiler and placed into DLL Dynamic Linked Library DLL functions will be called by NL5 during transient simulation DLL code will be executed much faster than C code in C model of the Code component However changing the code requires recompiling the code and rebuilding the DLL Execution principle of DLL code execution is shown on the following diagram double data 0 I Te DS T mainit data DL data zx data 0 a Il maint double t do i 0 A voltage on the input pin of the component in is measured by a voltmeter and is assigned to the corresponding element of the array data Of double type The pointer to the array is passed as a parameter to the DLL function main The function 1s executed a new val
21. amp F E H El El He E ES a ca ES a aa ES Document Toolbars provides fast access to commands related to active Document a a A window There are 3 types of Document toolbar ese OS iF e Schematic toolbar A ip ES e Transient toolbar El El e AC toolbar KE A Only one toolbar corresponding to active Document Window is visible at a time a T of SiS e pr gt t Ee at 32 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Other Windows Other Windows are not part of the Multi Document Interface however they remain open all the time and do not need to be closed to switch to another window These windows always show information related to current active document Switching between documents automatically updates information in these windows Those windows include Components Window Schematic Components or F3 Variables Window Schematic Variables or F4 Transient and AC Data Transient Data AC Data Tools Tools Script Tools Sweep etc Dialog boxes Unlike Windows Dialog boxes must be closed to return to the Main Window Typically Dialog boxes have OK and Cancel buttons and some have Close button Examples of the Dialog box are e Preferences Edit Preferences e Schematic Tools Schematic Tools e Transient Settings Transient Settings e and more Help NLS help file n15 chm should be located in the same directory as n15 exe The file contains quick reference information such as description of operator
22. 101 Add new trac Trace Wi jo Scale 0 Mid oS hit s h gt width Check all Uncheck all Apply Close t Move cursor over splitter area h then press left mouse button and drag to resize panes Trace list shows all currently available traces Checkbox indicates the following trace property depending on selected page e Trace and Screen page trace is shown on the graph e Table page trace is shown in the table e Storage page storage is allowed for trace 157 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual One or more traces can be selected in the list using mouse Ctrl and Shift keys Click Check all to check all al traces Uncheck all to uncheck all traces Most of toolbar commands apply to selected traces only Please note selected trace is highlighted in the list and trace selection state 1s not related to trace checkbox state On the screenshot above both traces are checked and only V V1 is selected Double click on the trace to change the color of the trace This chapter describes toolbar commands and Traces page only Other pages are described in the Transient Window chapter Graph Data table and Storage Toolbar Toolbar button commands apply to all or selected traces Some of those commands are also accessible through context menus in the Transient Window la e Open file Load traces from nlt data file e Import traces from
23. Copy image of AC window to clipboard EMP Save as BMP Save image of AC window to file in BMP format Je o Save as JPG Save image of AC window to file in JPG format Storage commands e Move Run to storage e Remove selected storage A e Clear storage alb e Rename selected storage e Store last Run Move current Run into storage Last when new simulation starts Selected only e Selected and dimmed Storage display mode e All Annotation commands e Annotate selected trace gt e Annotate all traces e Edit annotation 248 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual x e Delete annotation e Delete all Text commands e Insert text on the graph e Edit text e Delete text Data table commands e Hide trace name do not show trace in the Data table e Separate window Show Data table in the AC Window or as a separate window Legend commands e Hide trace name do not show trace on the graph e Remove selected trace e Rename selected trace e Duplicate selected trace Copy selected trace to clipboard e Paste traces from clipboard E i a of ol e Find component V I Z Gamma and VSWR traces only Click to show the component on the schematic Keyboard keys and shortcuts The following keyboard keys and shortcuts can also be used e Tab Toggle phase display mode e Left Right Scroll graph e Up Down Select trace e Shift PgUp Zoom in e Shift PgDn Zoom out Mouse
24. Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High Logical component with one input and delay Output type inverted or non inverted depends on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button The output is delayed by Delay time Input pulses shorter than Delay will not pass through and will not affect output When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC 444 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Views Y Y Logic 2 Delay r Models Traces Vv P b z Views are used to specify logical function and JP 17 inverted or non inverted output Logic 2 Model Logic Logic 2 Model Delay Y Y_Logic 2_Logic nl5 Parameter Units Description IC Initial condition Low High Logical component with two inputs Logic function AND OR XOR and output type inverted or non inverted depend on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point
25. In mode 1 forward current flows through the diode and forward voltage drop is Vd At the same time the current equal to forward current is charging capacitor C In mode 2 reverse current is applied to the diode and capacitor C is being discharged by the current equal to reverse current As long as charge Q on the capacitor is positive the diode Is a short circuit with zero voltage drop Finally when charge drops to zero the diode switches to mode 3 with zero current and negative voltage drop open circuit V I and Q waveforms are shown on the graph When calculating DC operating point the diode is set to the state specified in IC and internal charge Q is set to specified ICQ value 296 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual D Diode Model Soft D D_Diode_Soft nl5 Parameter Units Description Vd V Forward voltage drop S Recombination time constant ts S Soft recovery time constant IC Initial condition Off On ICQ C A s Initial condition charge Soft recovery charge storage diode Simplified equivalent schematic of the model is the following r y T C F T C F T C R Q 1 Forward current 2 Reverse current 3 Soft recovery V Vd 1 gt 0 Q gt 0 V Vd 1 lt 0 Q gt 0 V lt Vd 1 lt 0 Q gt 0 C 1 R t C 1 R t C 1 R ts The diode has internal capacitor C 1 and resistor R Time constant RC is equal either recombination time constant t or soft recovery time
26. Markers E Hew trace 1 LL New trace 2 New trace 3 ES News trace 4 MN He trace 5 __ New trace E MN New trace 7 MN He trace 8 Font size Set font size of axes numbers Font Select font of axes numbers Default trace width Set width of a new trace Default phase width Set width of a new phase trace Markers width Set markers width Gridlines interval pixels Vertical gridlines Set approximate interval between gridlines in pixels Horizontal gridlines Set approximate interval between gridlines in pixels Numbers alignment Select position of vertical scale numbers 46 Graphs a A fo gt abe Double click to change the color peices te Fortsize 4 Font Schematic EM ll Drawings fi Default trace width E Gn 5 Dimmed storage trace MN SR circles Lancel Apply User s Manual J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Colors Double click on the item in the list to change the color Background Grid Text Cursor Selection Dimmed storage traces Table Set properties of the transient and AC data table x von Preferences S Appirauan Double click to change the color Document i Schematic MN Te MN Phase text __ Phase background lt Drawings A fi hd Font size A E E Font size Right sr Alignment Significant digits T able and Markers le Time Frequency le Data
27. Move current simulation data into storage Add Storage dialog box will Add Storage X Hame Run 1 Cancel show up 177 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Enter new storage name or leave suggested default name and click OK A new tab with storage name will be created in the Data selection area of Transient Window e Remove selected storage Last Run data can be removed as well Clear storage Delete all storage data e Rename selected run Rename dialog box will show up x Mame Aun 1 XI Cancel Enter new storage name and click OK Names Run and Last are reserved and not allowed Move selected up Move selected down e e Store last Run Select this option to compare new simulation with previous one When new simulation starts current simulation data will be moved into storage under the name Last If run with the name Last already exists 1t will be overwritten Thus previous simulation data will always be in the storage under the name Last Display storage e Selected only Only selected data is shown on the graph e Selected and dimmed Selected data is displayed with normal trace colors other data is displayed with dimmed color specified at Graphs page of Preferences e All All data is displayed with normal trace colors Example Selected only Selected and dimmed All When Storage page is selected checkboxes in the trace list specify traces with storage allowe
28. Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 429 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X Transmission line Line Lossy Vin lin t Iout Vout Models Traces 430 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X Transmission line X X_Line_Line nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Line tO S Delay ZO Ohm Characteristic impedance VIC V Initial condition voltage IIC A Initial condition current Lossless transmission line The voltage and current in the line are represented as a superposition of forward and reflected waves with V I ratio in each wave equal to line characteristic impedance z0 V and I values of each wave are calculated based on boundary input and output conditions The line functionality can also be described by the following equations Vin t z0 lin t lout t t0 Vout t zO lout t lin t tO where t is current time Input and output are galvanically isolated no current is flowing between input and output and any voltage difference between input and output may exist When calculating DC operating point initial forward and reflected voltage and current are calculated based on the following conditions if VIC and IIC are blank Vin Vout lin lou
29. a Move Run to storage Remove 4 Preferences Clear storage Selected only le Selected and dimmed All y Store last Run 168 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Graph area contains traces with annotations cursors and text e Legend window contains list of traces shown on the graph Click on the gray header bar of the legend window and drag to move legend window e Data table contains cursors screen information and calculated traces data e Data selection area contains last simulation and storage data tabs Click on a tab to select Run or storage data e Simulation progress shows current simulation time and status running paused e Memory used indicator shows amount of memory used for simulation and traces e Shift Ctrl indicators are highlighted when Shift and or Ctrl key are depressed e Status bar shows hint related to current position of mouse pointer and Shift Ctrl state e Move mouse pointer over splitter area lb then press left mouse button and drag to resize Storage selection area e Move mouse pointer over splitter area S then press left mouse button and drag to resize data table e Right click on the graph legend Data table or Data selection area to see context menu with relevant commands e Common properties of Transient Window such as colors fonts and some options can be customized on Graphs Table Annotation and Text pages of Prefer
30. and can be changed in really wide range le 6 le 15 Simulation data Traces During simulation NLS is storing data into memory The data to be stored is selected by user as traces in the Transient Data window Several types of transient traces are available V voltage I current P power Variable and Function When simulation starts all traces are automatically cleared and then start storing new simulation data A new data 1s displayed in the Run tab of Transient Window The last data can be moved into storage with special tab in the Transient Window assigned to it Storage data is not automatically cleared and can be used for comparing results of different simulation runs If special option Store last Run is selected then when new simulation starts current simulation data Run will be moved into storage under the name Last If run with the name Last already exists it will be overwritten Thus previous simulation data will always be in the storage under the name Last and can easily be compared with the current simulation data Traces can be copied to clipboard saved into nlt data file or exported into text file in csv comma separated values format In turn the data can be pasted from clipboard loaded from nlt data file or imported from text or binary file as a new trace Such a trace 1s always displayed in the Transient Window regardless what data tab is selected It is not cleared when new run starts
31. applying disturbances to the circuit as needed and analyzing circuit response on those disturbances Read more about principle of operation in the Using Z transform Method for AC Analysis document on the NL5 website The following parameters for Z transform method should be set up in the AC Settings dialog box AC source AC source for Z transform method can be voltage source current source or label To simplify calculations and avoid any confusion please set the AC source as a constant voltage or current source model V or T with value 0 Such a source would not affect normal transient analysis its only purpose is specify an input node for AC response analysis where input disturbance will be applied 217 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Method Select Z transform Sampling period should be set to switching period of the circuit To calculate AC response of the non switching circuit which is possible although does not make much sense set sampling period to the value 100 1000 times smaller than the smallest time constant of the circuit Then adjust this value based on required accuracy of the results Data collection The preferable and most accurate option is Sampling except if 1t does not provide reliable results for some types of circuits and signals The difference between data collection options is described in details in the Using Z transform Method for AC Analysis document
32. blank capacitor is temporarily removed open circuit DC operating point calculated and then the voltage found across the capacitor is assigned to the capacitor as its initial voltage 291 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual C Capacitor Model Function C Capacitor Model SubCir C C_Capacitor_Function nl5 Parameter Units Description Z S Ohm Impedance as a function of s parameter Impedance function in s domain For transient constant impedance Z 0 is used For linearized AC analysis complex impedance Z s is used The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example Z s 1 0 3p s 1 5p 3 pF capacitor in series with 1 5 pH inductor Z s 1 0 10n s 1k 10 nF capacitor in parallel with 1 kOhm resistor C C_Capacitor_SubCir nl5 Parameter Units Description File File name of subcircuit schematic Pint Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 292 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual C Views C Voltage controlled PWL Capacitor P L a A V in _ vV II O O E
33. e Single transient mode Transient Single Transient pauses when reaches the end of the screen Click Continue transient button or press Space to continue lb e Scope transient mode Transient Scope When transient reaches the end of the screen the Start value of the screen is incremented by Screen amount and transient calculation continues e Continuous transient mode Transient Continuous Transient is running continuously without pausing and modifying screen Start value Use this mode to view the graph while transient calculating is running e Transient Log Transient Log Log information shown in the dialog box may be useful for troubleshooting The last log is saved into schematic file When submitting schematic file to Customer Service for help please save schematic after simulation in order to have last log included into the file Click Copy to clipboard button to save log text into clipboard amp e Sweep Transient Sweep performs series of transient runs while changing component parameter or variable in specified range and storing transient data in the storage Sweep is performed using script commands and is configured on Sweep page of Tools window See Tools Sweep chapter for details e Save IC Transient Save IC saves current states of all components into their IC Initial Conditions if IC parameter exists for a component This function can be used to store components states when periodic steady
34. int64 1 6 1164 int64 1 1 2 2J 1i64 480 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual double Prototype double double bool double double int double double int64 double double double double double complex Description Returns argument value converted to double type double bool x returns 0 0 if x false and returns 1 0 if x true double complex x returns real part of a complex number x double works exactly the same as type casting operator double Examples double true 1 0 double 1 1 0 doublet IEAA Lol complex Prototype complex complex bool complex complex int complex complex int64 complex complex double complex complex complex Description Returns argument value converted to complex type complex bool x returns 0 0 if x false and returns 1 0 if x true complex x works exactly the same as type casting operator complex x Examples complex true 1 0 03 complex 2 2 0 03 481 M4 NL5 circuit simulator 4 Script commands In alphabetical order ac Usage aes acC acC acC acC from TCO Tro TO Tron GO Description to DONES Ponts scale Set AC analysis parameters and perform AC analysis from start frequency to stop frequency number of points POLDES scale log or lin logarithmic or linear frequency scale User s Manual If called from the script command will not return until AC analysis i
35. o On text move text or pointer o Otherwise move cursor e Double click o On annotation edit annotation o On text edit text o Otherwise show cursors move both cursors e Click and drag Select and zoom e Double click Center screen Scrolling mode e Click and drag Scroll graph e Double click Center screen 186 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Transient Tools Transient Tools offer different ways of presenting simulation results To open Tool go to Transient Tools and then select the line with required Tool The following Tools are currently available e DC sweep e XY diagram e Amplitude histogram Histogram e FFT e Eye diagram e Markers e Power E n E 0 E 1 E E y e Line snapshot 187 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual DC sweep DC sweep tool performs calculation of DC operating point while changing specified component parameter or variable in specified range and plots transient traces as a function of that parameter The name of the parameter swept 1s shown in the header line DC sweep example DC sweep v1 I I T e Settings Opens Settings dialog box y Sweep mo y Mame pa From n fio Pairits Scale ae h2 Right M Use transient scale fo Y multiplier Booo Y offset 188 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Ear eE o Sweep Name Name of the parameter to be changed E
36. or e Press hot key F3 or e Double click on the component on the schematic Components window always shows components of active document schematic Typical view of Components window is shown below Selected component el Name Model Parameters nliz Components o E Toolbar gt ay TP VIDA de Mames value w Pulse C1 le 3 Components list gt Rise 0 Fall z 10 Delay z e Toolbar provides fast access to often used component related commands e Components list shows all components and allows selecting component for editing e Selected component area shows name model and parameters of a selected component and provides selecting the model and editing parameters e Move mouse pointer over splitter areas el then press left mouse button and drag to resize panes and columns 127 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Toolbar Click toolbar buttons to perform the following operations Gb o E 2 2H 2 Dg cH oe Rename a component Click to rename selected component Rename dialog box will show up Renameri gt Enter new name Fil Cancel Enter new component name and click OK If such a name already exists an error message This name is used by another component will be displayed A new name may consist of any characters and symbols however it is recommended to use letters and numbers only and have the name started with a letter In this cas
37. pin_name input voltage on the input pin pin_ name t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x max x1 x2 x3 F x ini in2 V R1 If clock pin does not exist the model operates in continuous mode the function is calculated and applied to the output on every calculation step Please note that input voltages and variables V I P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop If clock pin exists the model operates in synchronized mode the function is calculated and applied to the output only on rising edge of logical clock signal As a result synchronized mode provides faster simulation than continuous mode AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 27 f sor p Laplace parameter p f 2zf z Z transtorm parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to b
38. value is linearly interpolated between VO and V1 etc If t gt tn then signal value is Vn if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise signal defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example pwl DO LO O If Cycle Yes Delay 0 the following voltage will be generated Label Label Function nI5 Parameter Units Description F t V Function Arbitrary function F t defines voltage as a function of the following variables t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F t is blank voltage is zero Example F t sin t 1 cos t 01 F t V R1 I R1 Please note that V I and P variables are taken at previous calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop 287 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Label Model File Label Model Trace Label Label_File nl5 Parameter Units Description File File name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Voltage source defined in the text file File parameter is a file name with full path to the file If the file is located in the same directory as schematic file the path can be omitted Signal is defined in the csv comma separated values format as fo
39. 0 1 0 45 0 atanz L 0 1 0 139 0 475 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual random rand Prototype double random double Description random x returns random number with uniform distribution in the range 0 x rand can be used instead of random Examples rand 3 0 1 2937463 gauss Prototype double gauss double m double d Description gauss m d returns normally distributed random number with mean value m and standard deviation d Examples gauss 0 2 0018213 476 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual round Prototype double round double double round double x double y Description round x rounds x to the nearest integer round x y rounds x to the nearest multiple of y Returns x if y lt 0 Examples round 1 5 2 0 Pounce L sL 0 round 321415501 Se Sul 417 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual floor Prototype double floor double Description Rounds down finds the largest integer not greater than the argument and returns it as a double Examples floor 1 6 1 0 floor 1 6 2 0 cell Prototype double ceil double Description Rounds up finds the smallest integer not less than the argument and returns it as a double Examples ceil 1 6 2 0 ceil 1 6 1 0 478 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual bool Prototype bool bool bool bool bool int bool bool int64 bool bool double
40. BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Summing amplifier O O_SumAmp_OpAmp nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Op Amp K V V Gain f1 Hz Unit gain frequency Vhi V Max output voltage Vlo V Min output voltage IC V Initial condition output voltage Linear amplifier with output limiter K is open loop gain Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency K and f1 can be set to infinity inf Output voltage is limiting between Vlo and Vhi When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined amplifier output is set to specified output voltage IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used Al M 1 Equivalent schematic K Whi Y K Vinil in2 Vini in2 f1 lo Static characteristic AC response 353 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Summing amplifier O O_SumAmp_Function nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Function F x V Output as function of the input F s AC transfer function in s domain IC V Initial condition output voltage Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines output voltage as a function of the following variables x voltage Vin1 Vin2 t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank
41. Description Parallel connection of real or complex impedances Number of arguments is not limited Examples Der Ul soy 0 Oi par L0 72407360044 00 par parL lt 0 2 par 30044 ay is des 472 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual SIN Prototype double sin double Description Calculates sine Argument angle is in degrees Examples sin 90 0 1 0 COS Prototype double cos double Description Calculates cosine Argument angle is in degrees Examples cos 90 0 0 0 tan tg Prototype double tan double Description Calculates tangent Argument angle is in degrees tg can be used instead of tan Examples tan 45 0 1 0 473 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual asin Prototype double asin double Description Calculates arcsine Returns angle in degrees in the range 90 90 Examples asin 1 0 90 0 acos Prototype double acos double Description Calculates arccosine Returns angle in degrees in the range 0 180 Examples acos 0 5 60 0 atan Prototype double atan double Description Calculates arctangent Returns angle in degrees in the range 90 90 Examples atan 1 0 45 0 474 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual atan2 Prototype double atan2 double x double y Description Calculates arctangent of x y Returns angle in degrees in the range 180 180 Examples atan2 1
42. E 3 E E P Vel HE Ae tL Voltage controlled capacitor C C_VCC_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string C Vin IC V Initial condition voltage Leave blank if IC not defined Piece wise linear voltage controlled capacitor At any moment capacitor is a linear capacitor Its capacitance C is a function of control voltage C Vin dV dt owl string defines capacitance as a function of control voltage Vin See Working with PWL model chapter for details When calculating DC operating point if IC is defined capacitor is replaced with voltage source equal to IC If IC is not defined blank capacitor is temporarily removed open circuit DC operating point calculated and then the voltage found across the capacitor is assigned to the capacitor as its initial voltage 293 BJ NL5 circuit simulator C Views Current controlled Capacitor a Ee C Current controlled capacitor Model PWL Parameter Units pwl IC V User s Manual PWL 1 2 I in 7 AY p E 2 P Vel C C_CCC_PWL nI5 Description Comma separated string C lin Initial condition voltage Leave blank if IC not defined Piece wise linear current controlled capacitor At any moment capacitor is a linear capacitor lts capacitance C is a function of control current C lin dV dt owl string defines capacitance as a function of control cu
43. Functions NLS offers many standard and NL3 specific functions The functions can be used in the C code script Code component traces of Function type and in Function model of some components For the convenience of users there may be several names used for the same function for example 1og10 and 1g so that the user can use the name he she is more comfortable with The following functions are available Sim Sqrt mag abs par sum COS sqr phase random rand mean Cal CO Sg re gauss max asin pow im Limity Lim min acos pwr sign islow bool atan exp round ishigh int atan2 Tithe Log ELOGE db int64 LS LOG 10 ceil float Lpy Log double complex See full functions list description and examples in the Attachment 3 62 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Expressions Expression may consist of Numbers Predefined constants Names of components parameters and variables Local script or C code variables Operators Functions Parentheses with unlimited nesting level For example DED 2 lt lt 3 sin 2 PI f ij NE ae ae sehematie variable Maz Rd oe 1 R1 R2 C1 Expression can be used instead of number in most entry fields in the dialog boxes and for some component parameters When Enter key is pressed or OK or Apply button if exists is clicked the expression 1s immediately evaluated and replaced with the numerical value 63 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual C language Simplified C langua
44. Manual R Resistor R PWL V 1 mane PWL E E Function SubCir Pavl R Resistor R R_Resistor_R nl5 Model Parameter Units Description R R Ohm Resistance Linear resistor V R l R Resistor R R_Resistor_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string R V Piece wise linear resistor pwl string defines resistance as a function of voltage across the resitor R V See Working with PWL model chapter for details R Resistor R R_Resistor_PWL 1 nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string R I Piece wise linear resistor pwl string defines resistance as a function of current through the resistor R l See Working with PWL model chapter for details 358 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual R Resistor Model Function R Resistor Model SubCir R R_Resistor_Function nl5 Parameter Units Description Z S Ohm Impedance as a function of s parameter Impedance function in s domain For transient constant impedance Z 0 is used For linearized AC analysis complex impedance Z s is used The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example Z s 10 3n s 10 Ohm resistor in series with 3 nH inductor Z s 10 1 1 0 3p s 10 Ohm resistor in pa
45. Manual X X_Block 4_SubCir nl5 BJ NL5 circuit simulator X Views 1 2 3 X Block 6 Model SubCir Block 6 4 1 6 5 2 5 6 3 4 Parameter Units File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Pind Pin6 Cmd IC Models SubCir Traces Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 5 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 6 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 439 User s Manual X X_Block 6_SubCir nl5 BJ NL5 circuit simulator X CWS Vie X Block 8 Model SubCir Block 8 11 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 Parameter Units File Pin1 Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Pins Pin6 Pin Pin8 Cmd IC Models SubCir Traces Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 5 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 6 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 7 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 8 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit I
46. Max Min GT LT Pwr Mag Phase Table SubCir 310 P Vel User s Manual BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function 2 F F_Function 2 Function nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Function F x y V Output as function of the inputs F s AC transfer function in s domain os tD 7 IC V Initial condition output voltage Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x y defines output voltage as a function of the following variables X input voltage Vx y input voltage Vy t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x y is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x y sqrt x x y y F x y x y sin t F x y P r1 P r2 Please note that input voltages x y and variables V I P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter s p f 2zf Z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s
47. N min x returns smaller value of all array elements Examples MENA LeO eZ ay oO S LO e AA min false true true false double xI 140 Za Os Se 0 440 Y min x 3 05 467 M4 NL5 circuit simulator max Prototype double max double double max double int64 max int64 int64 max int64 int max int int max int bool max bool bool max bool Description max x returns larger value of arguments Number of arguments is not limited If x is an array x N max x returns larger value of all array elements Examples Mae On Pa SO S max 1 2 3 3 max false true true true double xl lA ARAU A Sep ESO he max x 4 0 exp Prototype complex exp complex double exp double Description exp x calculates the exponential e to the x Examples exo 320 2020855 Sx PEO 25g OF Ly 468 User s Manual BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual pow Prototype complex pow complex x double y double pow double x double y Description pow x y Calculates x x tothe power of y If double argument x is negative math error may occur math error eo EZ pwr Prototype double pwr double x double y Description Signed power function pwr x y returns e x if x gt 0 e x if x lt 0 Examples PELO 02 O 100 0 pwr 10 0 2 0 100 0 469 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manua
48. Schematic tools toolbar button 3 Select Tools page in the selection list Renumber Renumber components on the schematic Select Order and Names option see example of renumbering in the Example window click Execute button to proceed Numerical name is the name that starts with letter and the rest of the name is a number Otherwise the name is considered as text Default automatic component name 1s numerical For example R123 C2 numerical V12V Rout text Initial Conditions Set Initial Conditions IC of selected component types to specified value Select component types and IC values click Execute button to proceed Click Check all and Uncheck all buttons to check uncheck all components Clean Up Clean up schematic Select options click Execute button to proceed Click Check all and Uncheck all buttons to check uncheck all options Formulas Replace all formulas with values Select option click Execute button to proceed Parameters Set selected parameters of all components to specified value Select parameters enter new parameter value or select from drop down list click Execute button to proceed e Set diodes Set Vd parameter of all diodes and zeners and or Vbe parameter of all transistors e Set period Set Period parameter of all Sin and Pulse voltage and current sources and Pulse switches Width Rise Fall and Delay values will be adjusted proportional to period 141 AE NL5 circuit simul
49. Select menu command Schematic Variables or e Press hot key F4 Variables window opens automatically while opening schematic from a file if schematic has defined variables Variables window always shows active schematic variables Typical view of Variables window is shown below Name Value nli Yariables Toolbar de XX abl X e Toolbar provides access to variable related commands e Variables are shown in the Name Value columns e Move mouse pointer over splitter area Clb then press left mouse button and drag to resize columns Toolbar Click toolbar buttons to perform the following operations Pp e Adda variable Click to add a new variable Add variable dialog box will show up Add variable i x Enter variable name Cancel Enter variable name and click OK If a new name already exists an error message This name is used by another component will be displayed 133 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Remove a variable Click to remove selected variable gt e Delete all variables Click to delete all variables e Rename a variable Click to rename selected variable Rename dialog box will show up Rename impedance Ed Enter new name impedance Cancel Enter new variable name and click OK If such a name already exists an error message This name is used by another component will be displayed A new name may consist of any characters an
50. Subcircuits chapter for details 417 M4 NL5 circuit simulator y V Current controlled voltage source Linear Function PWL CCO Pulse PWM SubCir Models Current controlled voltage source N A a J A IVIVUUCE Linear K V A Gain Parameter Units Description User s Manual t TAR AC P Vel V V_CCVS_Linear nl5 Linear current controlled voltage source V K lin 418 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Current controlled voltage source V V_CCVS_Function nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Function F x V Output as function of the input F s AC transfer function in s domain IC V Initial condition output voltage Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines output voltage as a function of the following variables X input current lin t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x x x F x x sin t F x P r1 P r2 Please note that input current x and variables V I and P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that Support complex numbers can be used in this function The following
51. This method may not work right 1f the signal has local maximums Double click Click Maximums button 209 is NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e If period of fundamental is known Right click on the transient graph and select Cursors command In the Cursors window enter period value in the Interval window and select Lock interval checkbox Now interval between cursors will always be equal to the period of fundamental xj k Show 444 874274E520 3 li 1 444874274658 Rig i Imerral a Leek poslior Mowe Run bo storage AE Close az Trust Fara Right click select Cursors Enter Interval select Lock interval If calculation step 1s big enough some higher harmonics may not satisfy Nyquist criteria harmonic frequency exceeds half of discretization frequency Such harmonics will be marked with an asterisk symbol in the harmonics list ED thd Power x Power Factor THO Trace vin Harmonics fan THD 18 768659 161 3316263 28 0197972 3 10 540856e 3 3 83486 526 35 414 65522e 6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b82 53502e b 4774271 9e b 583 8961 4e 6 455 07674e 6 10 569 5051 be 6 11 9355 67 929e 6 210 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Line snapshot Line snapshot shows voltage and current profile inside the transmission line It also shows forward and reflected waves of voltage and
52. Variables C4 LIC Tools Sheets POURS Format Schematic is shown and can be edited in the Schematic window Any document must have Schematic window closing Schematic window will automatically close the entire document Components and variables are shown and can be edited in the Components Window and Variables Window Several Dialog boxes such as Tools Sheets Groups Format are used to perform other operations on the schematic and Schematic Window Schematic data is used for Transient and AC analysis 71 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Schematic window Typical view of schematic window and its main components are shown below nli Schematic Schematic area Right click inp Ctrl ei Geles Right click o El La J Sht Chl Chick to scroll schematic ste Etr AAA o AY ET Delete Del EN Select all Ctri A Sheet selection elo Shift Ctrl Status bar e Add sheet indicators Mabe alb Rename sheet Disable Format Copy sheet Bea Add trace d pelete sheet zoom d Attributes Tab P on Image d A Preferences e Schematic is shown in the Schematic area e Sheet selection area contains sheet tabs Click on the tab to select sheet e Right click on the Sheet selection are
53. Window Comments Comments Comments Comments Comments Comments e Maximize Comments Comments Comments je Larger o e Smaller Black and white Select to preview and print color window in black and white format Title Comments Header and Footer Wo LS a D Larger font Smaller font Select font Select color Align left Center Align right 56 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Data format Data format used in NL5 mostly complies with common engineering and scientific practice It makes it easy to learn and use by any person familiar with other popular tools Case insensitivity All the text data in the NLS such as component names variables functions commands etc are case insensitive unless otherwise stated Lower case and upper case letters are considered the same For example Rin RIN ELA sin 45 SIN 45 Numbers Number format in NL5 is very flexible and complies with many commonly used styles and standards Boolean b001 number can be entered as false Or true case insensitive bool 1 true bool retvalue FALSE When converted to other types true is considered as 1 false as 0 When other types are converted to bool non zero value is considered as true zero value as false Integer int int64 number can be entered in decimal binary octal and hexadecimal formats For binary format use 0b or 0B prefix then use numbers 0 and 1 0b111111111 0B10101010 0b10 F
54. Window and its components are shown below i 10 x Main Menu Bile Edt Schematic Iramsient T Toos Widow Heip Main Toolbar gt 0 amp amp e Eras ars Selection Bar d YA W be HE gt Gy oe mm gt 13 gt f gt qub a D T dl E oe 05 A ee Navigation Bar gt EN rc Schemat Document Windows e Schematic Transient SS AC O e Transient Tools e AC Tools Shasi j re Cams 4 Other Windows HE VRE YY IO oo e Components A A WI 10 e Variables gt nae va 0 Pesod 1 e Transient AC Data ak e e Tools _ Fall u Delay 0 Status Bar gt Document Toolbar e Schematic e Transient e AC 25 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Main Menu Main menu contains standard Windows menus such as File Edit Window Help and NL3 specific Schematic Transient AC Tools File New Ctrl N Create a new document schematic Open Ctrl O Select a file and open NL5 document Save Ctrl S Save active document into its current file schematic only Save As Select file name and save active document schematic only Save As encrypted Select file name and save active document with password schematic only To open encrypted document the same password should be entered Save all Save all currently opened documents Close Close act
55. _ aN V P Vel T T_PNP_Linear nl5 Description Gain beta Unit gain frequency Initial condition collector current Linear BJT transistor Current controlled current source with specified bandwidth B is open loop gain beta Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency B and f1 can be set to infinity inf When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined collector current is set to specified output current IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used l 8 lb Equivalent schematic Static characteristic AC response 395 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T PNP transistor T T_PNP_Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Vbe V Forward voltage drop of base emitter diode IC Initial condition of base emitter diode Off On BJT transistor switch Current controlled switch with a base emitter diode Switch is closed if diode current is non zero When calculating DC operating point the diode is set to the state specified in IC E E Equivalent schematic 396 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T PNP transistor T T_PNP_Transistor nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Transistor B A A Gain beta 1 Hz Unit gain frequency Vbe V Forward voltage drop of base emitter diode Vsat V Collector emitter saturation voltage drop IC A Initial condition collector current ICbe Initial cond
56. amplifier O O_DiffAmp_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string K Vin Piece wise linear amplifier Amplifier gain K is defined by pwl string as a function of input voltage Vin See Working with PWL model chapter for details O Differential amplifier O O_DiffAmp_SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 351 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Summin O g amplifier Linear I _ _ OpAmp Vim 2 Function 3 SubCir L P Vel O Summing amplifier O O_SumAmp_Linear nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Linear K V V Gain Hz Unit gain frequency IC V Initial condition output voltage Linear summing amplifier K is open loop gain Frequency response consists of one pole 11 is unit gain frequency K and f1 can be set to infinity inf When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined amplifier output is set to specified output voltage IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used Week vind in2 ind ina tl Static characteristic AC response 352
57. and can be used as a reference trace for simulation or stimulus signal for voltage and current sources It also can be renamed to arbitrary text Memory Simulation data is stored in the operating memory The memory is allocated as needed by relatively small blocks If available operating memory is not enough for storing continuously increasing amount of simulation data the operating system starts saving data to the disk which may slow down simulation and display significantly To prevent from this the following mechanism is used when amount of memory required for the trace exceeds the maximum value specified on Transient page of Preferences dialog box the block of the memory currently storing the very beginning of the trace will be released and allocated again for the new data Thus the trace will be truncated at the beginning in order to keep the latest data At the first time this happens for one or more traces the warning message will be displayed in the status bar of Transient Window The total amount of memory currently used by the document schematic for simulation algorithm and all traces is always displayed in the Memory used field of Transient Window status bar so that user can take proper action if needed 152 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Please be aware that regardless of the size of operating memory on your computer only 2GB can be used by NLS due to restriction of 32 bit Windows application If simulation data tak
58. beginning of the code See global variables chapter below for details If not explicitly declared all required input output variables and arrays of appropriate size will be created automatically during initialization phase of the analysis at t 0 Code structure A typical code structure is the following Global variables Initialization code Inlet 4 Main code main 119 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual If complex initialization of global variables is not required an initialization code can be omitted Then the code will look like this Global variables Main code main And finally if global variables other than inputs and outputs are not used both initialization and main functions can be omitted All the code is considered as a main code Main code Global variables Global variables are public variables of the code They can be accessed outside the C code from the script for example for data logging from the command line displayed on the transient graph used in the expressions for V I sources etc Also global variables are static they do exist and keep their values during transient simulation Global variables can be used for storing code data that are calculated once and then are used in the main code on each simulation step Global variables can also be used for storing values that are calculated on one simulation step and then are used on the next
59. center screen e Left click on the window and drag to select zoom in area o If mouse pointer is moving only up or down two horizontal lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in vertically o If mouse pointer is moving only left or right two vertical lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in horizontally o If mouse pointer is moving diagonally rectangle will be shown When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen e Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in Transient Window 192 4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Example schematic transient and XY diagram cauer_lc Schematic Ba S t 10 01 01MB Shift Ctrl Click to scroll 193 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Amplitude histogram Amplitude histogram calculates amplitude distribution of the traces within specified amplitude range It 1s calculated for visible traces between cursors only or on the screen 1f cursors are disabled nl Amplitude histogram x T T HH T o Scale 4 Lett 14 Right E de Top jo Bottom o Histogram Enter new value and press Enter to recalculate the histogram From Bottom value of the amplitude range To Top value of the
60. change annotation text and annotation specific properties double click on the annotation or right click on the annotation and select Edit annotation command from context menu Annotate dialog box will show up 239 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual A M Name s alah Frequency Value M Apply to all annotations Enter text here Enter text in the text box The text will be simultaneously shown on the annotation The following options and formatting are available e Name Display trace name in the text e Frequency Display frequency of the annotation in the text e Value Display trace magnitude and phase is phase trace is shown value in the text Alignment Set alignment of multi line text e Align left e Center e Align right Orientation Change orientation of the text e Rotate left 4 e Rotate right e Apply to all annotations Select to apply current settings to all annotations on the graph To move annotation text keeping pointer at the same trace point click on the annotation text and drag To move the pointer click on the end of the pointer and drag The pointer will change frequency yet following trace amplitude Annotation text will move with the pointer To delete annotation right click on the annotation and select Delete annotation command from context menu To delete all annotations right click on the graph select Annotate then select Delete all command from context men
61. connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Pin4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Pin5 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 5 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 425 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Custom W transformer Sle This is a customized component A component can be edited in the Edit Component dialog box See Editing customized component chapter for instructions on editing a component Transformer SubCir This component may have height from 2 to 32 up to 9 windings total on both sides arbitrary length of a winding Examples of Custom transformer component gt z E 1 3 5 S AE 1 i T gt 31 3 4 E 7 3 Es 3 lt 426 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual W Custom transformer W W_CustomTransformer_Transformer nl5 Model Transformer Parameter Units Description n1 turns Number of turns in the first winding nN turns Number of turns in the N winding Ideal transformer with N windings Coupling coefficient 1 W Custom transformer Model SubCir Parameter Units Description File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 PinN Name of subcircuit label connected to pin N Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subci
62. constant ts Q is the charge on the capacitor In mode 1 forward current flows through the diode and forward voltage drop is Vd At the same time the current equal to forward current is charging capacitor C In mode 2 reverse current is applied to the diode and capacitor C is being discharged by the current equal to reverse current Voltage drop on the diode is still Vd At the moment when reverse current is equal or less than charge divided by soft recovery time constant ts a mode 3 is turned on In mode 3 capacitor C is being exponentially discharged by the current through resistor R with time constant ts plus small constant current to ensure full discharge not shown on the picture Reverse diode current is proportional to the charge As soon as charge drops to zero the diode switches to mode 4 not shown with zero current and negative voltage drop open circuit See demo schematic D D_Diode_Soft nl5 for examples of soft recovery waveforms When calculating DC operating point the diode is set to the state specified in IC and internal charge Q is set to specified ICQ value 297 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Units User s Manual D D_Diode_PWL nl5 Description Comma separated string R V Piece wise linear diode pwl string defines resistance as a function of voltage See Working with PWL model chapter for details D Diode Model Parameter PWL Pw D Diode Model Parameter Sub
63. controlled switch Switch is set to active or non active state using following rules Vin gt Threshold Hysteresis 2 active Vin lt Threshold Hysteresis 2 non active Otherwise previous state When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state defined in IC The following is switching diagram for Active On Hysteresis t Threshold On Ott 368 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S Voltage controlled switch S S_VCS Pulse nI5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Width S Pulse width Threshold V Voltage threshold Active Active state Off On One shot pulse generator When increasing input voltage Vin crosses Threshold value switch is set to active state for Width time interval If increasing Vin crosses Threshold value while switch is in active state the pulse is restarted S Voltage controlled switch S S_VCS_Steps nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Steps Threshold V Voltage threshold Hysteresis V Hysteresis Roff Ohm Off state resistance Ron Ohm On state resistance Slope Type of resistance change Linear Cos Log Ramp S Resistance ramp time Steps Number of resistance steps in the ramp IC Initial condition Off On Switch with resistance ramping When increasing input voltage Vin crosses Threshold plus Hysteresis 2 value switch resistance starts ramping from Roff to Ron When decreasing input volta
64. current All signals can be shown during transient simulation being updated either on every simulation step or with predefined update rate When simulation paused or stopped the current last profile 1s shown TE try_line Line snapshot Voltage X1 A e Right click on the window to access relevant commands e Double click on the window to open Settings dialog box try line Line snapshot settings Line e Voltage e Current foes Update interval 3 simulation time e Signal 1 e Forward Scale z esl e Reflected jo W mid Show data points 306 3 scale o mid 211 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o Line Select existing transmission line component from drop down list o Update interval s Select simulation interval to update graphs If interval is zero graphs will be updated on every simulation step o Scale Select voltage and current scales Press Enter to accept changes o Voltage Display voltage graph o Current Display current graph o Signal V I Display voltage and or current signals superposition of forward and reflected waves o Forward Display forward voltage and or current waves separately o Reflected Display reflected voltage and or current waves separately o Show data points Select to mark calculated data points as small squares e Click Close to accept changes and close Settings dialog box 212 BJ NL5 circuit simulator V AC Analy
65. for calculations the better accuracy of AC response can be achieved However this may result in extremely long simulations time especially at low frequencies To set up a desired balance between accuracy and simulation time the Error parameter can be used In fact this is more qualitative description of the expected simulation performance rather than actual simulation error The following values of the Error parameter can be used Error 0 at each AC frequency transient simulation will be performed for 128 periods of the frequency This is the most accurate option however it could be a very long simulation time 0 lt Error lt 100 number of periods at each frequency will be automatically selected between 2 and 128 based on circuit response Expected accuracy is very high for numbers 1 and below good for 10 to 50 and fair for 50 and above Respectively higher accuracy requires longer simulation time Error 100 at each AC frequency transient simulation will be performed only for 2 periods of the frequency This 1s the fastest option however the accuracy could be extremely poor Recommended simulation strategy 1s the following First evaluate schematic at value 100 just to see 1f the method works in general and circuit behavior is somewhat close to expected Then use value 10 to perform circuit analysis with reasonable accuracy and simulation speed If better accuracy 1s needed or simulation result does not look correct
66. for NLS schematic and analysis data Each type has designated extension and icon lon Extension Description o eee Schematic backup peme Transient data binary AC data binary If NLS is started from command line one or more files of those types can be used as parameters For example gt n15 exe rc nl5 download schematic rc nl5 gt n15 exe tran nlt download transient data from tran nlt gt n15 exe rc nl5 pref nlp download schematic rc n15 and preferences from pref nlp File with txt extension being used as a parameter in the command line is considered to be a script Script will be executed immediately For example gt n15 exe Scripe cxe download and run script from script txt 12 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Run NLS To run NL5 double click on n15 exe or on the NLS icon s Splash screen window with version date and license information will show up NL5 Circuit Simulator Version 1 0 Build 1 0401 2009 Copyright 7994 2009 4 Smirnow Trial license expires in 16 days g License ID FC3C 502C 1993 E 239 The window disappears in a few seconds NES can also be started from command line with or without switches and parameters Switches Switch is a text starting with or symbol The following switches can be used in the command line http start HTTP server For example gt nl5 exe http Parameters Parameter is a file name One or more
67. list will show components available for this trace type the model of the component should support selected type Select component and click Add button Xp or double click on the component name to add new trace to the trace list The name of the trace consists of the letter followed by the name of component in parentheses If Z Gamma or VSWR trace is selected click Add button F to add new trace to the trace list Traces show Z Gamma and VSWR relative to AC source 229 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual If Function trace is selected enter function in the edit window and click Add button to add new trace to the trace list The function may consists of arithmetic operators and functions component parameters V and I on the component and the following variables f current AC frequency wW angular AC frequency w 2nf sorp Laplace parameter s p j 2nf z Z transform parameter should be defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box For example V C1 71 Cl VitxX1L VI 1 1 s V RL E z 1 14 2 z4 z z The name of the trace is the function itself so that renaming the trace will change the function V and I traces can also be added from Schematic context menu and by Components Window toolbar buttons The following individual trace parameters can be set e Display Specifies what is displayed on the graph and shown in the Data table Mag Phase Magnitude an
68. main t current time data pointer to the array with input output data Function returns zero 1f no errors occur or user defined non zero integer error code The error code will be displayed in the error message window For example function sum calculates sum of 8 inputs extern e declspes dallexport ne Sum double ty double ox double y 0 for ant 1 07 ISS i yp 4 ys Scale XO Sey return 0 Initialization function is executed once at the beginning of simulation at t 0 Initialization function 1s optional Leave Init parameter of the model blank 1f initialization function 1s not used The function 1s used to assign initial default values to outputs and component variables if defined by setting corresponding elements of the array data and to declare and initialize static DLL variables 125 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual and arrays Static DLL variables can be used for storing algorithm parameters that are calculated once and then are used in the main function Static DLL variables can also be used for storing values calculated on one simulation step in order to use those values on the next simulation step Please note that if several components are using the same DLL only one copy of DLL 1s loaded into memory so that the same static variables will be used for all components If you need several components to use the same DLL with separate static variables you should use several
69. modify component parameters run simulation analyze the data save export simulation results etc Script can be executed from NL5 command line or at Script page of Tools window Script commands can also be executed from command line in the Console page of Tools window and through HTTP link from external applications This allows using NL5 as an add on simulation engine with popular engineering tools such as MATLABO Python and others Script syntax Script is written on C language and is executed by C language interpreter built in NES All C operators Attachment 2 and functions Attachment 3 can be used in the script In addition NL5 specific script commands Attachment 4 can be used to run simulation analyze data and save simulation results Component parameters and schematic variables can be used in expressions and can be modified similar to C variables R1 tau Cl freq lu Y VL pertod freq is schematic variable Trace and cursors data can be used in expressions The data correspond to the values displayed in the Transient or AC Data table In order to use trace data the trace should be added into the Transient or AC data but does not need to be displayed on the graph or in the data table For example x V Gout m x V OUE mins if V C1 3 45 gt threshold break charge I Cl mean delta Script commands Script commands are used to open schematic control simulation process run and con
70. name is enclosed in quotes R out V pulse 12V However 1f the name starts with letter and contains letters and numbers only it can be used without quotes ROuUty ViZ3 BLUSLZV If the component has been renamed its name will be automatically modified in all appearances of the component name in trace names formulas and functions To access component s parameter in the formula function or script expression use component name followed by dot and parameter name Riley MAS LODO aL bey TR OUE ak 59 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual If parameter name is not specified a first parameter of the component will be used Rl R1 R C2 C2 C Exception when parameter is used in Function model it should be explicitly defined To access component which is part of the subcircuit use subcircuit component s name followed by dot and component s name in the subcircuit A nesting level is unlimited components inside subcircuit which in turn is part of subcircuit can be accesses by similar notation Mls ds EGEL VO period where x1 and F1 are subcircuits To access global variable name of the C model of Code component x1 in a script or command line use the following notation X1 name To access component s model name in a seript or command line use component name followed by dot and model Vil model pulse Schematic variable Schematic variable name has the same f
71. nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Trace Trace Trace name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Voltage source defined by a trace Trace parameter is a name of the trace in the Trace list Transient Data Only traces loaded from data file imported from text or binary file duplicated or pasted from clipboard can be used for the voltage source If Cycle parameter is set to Yes the signal is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time 412 BJ NL5 circuit simulator AY Voltage source Model SubCir Parameter File Pin1 Pin2 Cmd IC Units User s Manual V V_VS_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 413 M4 NL5 circuit simulator y V Voltage controlled voltage source Linear Function PWL ls VCO Pulse MEA PWM subCir _ E Lo Lil Voltage controlled voltage source Model Parameter Units Description Linear K V V Gain User s Manual V in l Traces P Vel V V_VCVS _Linear nl5 Linear voltage controlled voltage source V K Vin 414 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Voltage controlled voltage source V V_VCVS_Function nl5 Model Parameter Uni
72. occurs during simulation NL5 responds with error message 278 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual NE5 MATLAB link example The following example shows using NL5 HTTP link with MATLAB NLS has HTTP server running and schematic link example nl5 loaded Transient window shows schematic response on V1 step function for R1 1 link example Transient 279 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual The code listed below has been loaded into MATLAB from the file link example m and executed clear cic close all R logspace 1 1 Header http 127 0 0 1 7 Cmd2 Header tran Cmd3 Header ready Cmd4 Header V out 3200 50 1 for k 1 length R Cmdl Header R1l num2str R k urlread Cmd1 urlread CmdZ2 Response 0 while strcmp Response 0 Response urlread Cmd3 end Graph k str2num urlread Cmd4 end Graph Graph surf Graph shading flat colormap jet colorbar ylim 0O 400 The code changes R1 in the range 0 1 10 with logarithmic step calculates transient reads V out trace data and displays V out at 3 D graph as a function of time and R1 value Example schematic and MATLAB files are located in the Examples MATLAB folder of the NLS complete package download zip file 280 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual VII Attachments SDN ASAD HA eee ade RASA DDD OA 2 fo ri 1 k 10 gt rec tau tra next ext 281 BJ NL5
73. of selected trace Left minimum Move selected cursor to the nearest left minimum of selected trace Maximums Move one cursor to the nearest right maximum and another cursor to the nearest left maximum of selected trace Minimums Move one cursor to the nearest right minimum and another cursor to the nearest left minimum of selected trace Graph commands context menu Pe Open Cursors dialog box Traces Commands apply to all traces displayed on the graph tz o Open Load traces from nlt data file o Import traces from text or csv file E o Save traces into nlt data file y o View Export View traces as a text and save into text or csv file o Copy traces to clipboard a o Paste traces from clipboard Image gt o Copy to clipboard Copy image of transient window to clipboard EMP O Save as BMP Save image of transient window to file in BMP format JE o Save as JPG Save image of transient window to file in JPG format Storage commands d a e Fe Gb o Move Run to storage Remove selected storage Clear storage Rename selected storage Store last Run Move current Run into storage Last when new simulation starts Selected only Selected and dimmed Storage display mode All Annotation commands 184 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Annotate selected trace e Annotate all traces e Edit annotation 4 e Delete annotation e Delete all Text com
74. on the NLS website Z to s conversion Use exponential z e or bilinear z 2 sT 2 sT conversion method to display the results in desirable way T is sampling period 218 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Simulation data Traces During simulation NLS is storing data into memory The data to be stored is selected by user as traces in the AC Data window Several types of transient traces are available V voltage I current Z impedance Gamma VSWR and Function When simulation starts all traces are automatically cleared and then start storing new simulation data A new data is displayed in the Run tab of AC Window The last data can be moved into storage with special tab in the AC Window assigned to it Storage data is not automatically cleared and can be used for comparing results of different simulation runs If special option Store last Run is selected then when new simulation starts current simulation data Run will be moved into storage under the name Last If run with the name Last already exists it will be overwritten Thus previous simulation data will always be in the storage under the name Last and can easily be compared with the current simulation data Traces can be copied to clipboard saved into nlf data file or exported into text file in csv format In turn the data can be pasted from clipboard loaded from nlf data file or imported from text file as a new trace Such a trace i
75. opened any time later See Editing customized component chapter for details The following diagram and example show the process of placing component Select letter Selection Bar LEO 4 AIAAACADAFAIAL AO AR AS ATAY AW OR Press V Enter Select model Schematic Window Components Window in pone nk ef Double click on component T1 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Selection Bar Select tab with required gt a Yv component type V then click on component r r RA symbol to place component Voltage LC ADAF A voltage controlled ATAN controlled voltage source New component soe ae aa ee shows up in selected state so you can immediately rotate mirror flip or select view as needed Keyboard Press key with the letter designated to the component type V If several components types are available for this letter press letter key again until desired type of a component shows up Use arrow keys to move a new component or click and drag new component by mouse To place component press Enter To cancel press Delete or Esc Schematic with a new component which is not set yet and is shown in cursor s color is sometimes called to be in New component mode When component is placed above existing wire a piece of the wire underneath the component is automatically removed so that no editing of t
76. operation The following mouse operation can be used e Right click Open context menu e Mouse wheel Horizontal zoom in zoom out e Ctrl mouse wheel Scroll horizontally 249 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Shift mouse wheel Scroll vertically e Ctrl Shift mouse wheel Vertical zoom in zoom out Cursors mode liz e Click left button If cursors visible move nearest cursor e Click and drag o On annotation move annotation text or pointer o On text move text or pointer o Otherwise move cursor e Double click o On annotation edit annotation o On text edit text o Otherwise show cursors move both cursors e Click and drag Select and zoom e Double click Center screen Scrolling mode e Click and drag Scroll graph e Double click Center screen 250 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual AC Tools AC Tools offer different ways of presenting simulation results To open Tool go to AC Tools then select the line with required Tool The following Tools are currently available e Histogram e Smith chart e Nyquist plot e Nichols plot Hil e Markers Histogram Histogram presents trace values and some characteristics of the traces calculated between cursors or on the screen if cursors are disabled in a graphical format Histogram can also show cross section of traces or storage data Ic_Line_AC AC Histogram l 60 dE T e Settings Opens S
77. press F1 eb gt Xx x ee asin acos atan atan2 E Script Ex Console ES Sweep 5 C column indicates if function supports cc Place cursor on asin function Function ASin x arcsint Click Help button Help on asin function is displayed or press F1 269 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Command line Command line is used to evaluate expressions Expression may contain Numbers including complex numbers Component parameters and schematic variables of active document Arithmetic operators and functions Some script commands Trace data Enter expression in the command line and press Enter to evaluate Results will be displayed in the log area For example BD 4 sin 45 TOPADO TS LIS 1Ee 3 Al TS Sari 2 20370 O 1 414213562317 V R1 mean E ZO To change component parameters or variables of active document enter parameter name followed by equal sign and expression R1 1k R1 1000 C1 V1 model pulse Y ou can also execute script commands from command line all commands except logdata and exit In addition pause command will pause transient simulation Commands are applied to active document For example open rce nilb trans 0 md store cont Previous expressions and commands can be retrieved from drop down list or by pressing Up and Down arrow keys Press Esc to clear command line 270 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Sweep User s Manual Sweep page provides automatic gener
78. rin AY p gt P Vel Models Traces ih yA gt ss R Current controlled resistor R R_CCR_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string R l n Piece wise linear current controlled resistor At any moment resistor is a linear resistor Its resistance R is a function of control current V R lin l pwl string defines resistance as a function of control current lin See Working with PWL model chapter for details 362 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S Switch Switch _ Pulse y N Do Step o I List E File P Vel SubCir S Switch S S_ Switch _ Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Switch Switch state Off On Switch Off open switch infinite resistance On closed switch zero resistance S Switch S S_ Switch Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Period S Period Width S Pulse width Delay S Delay before first pulse starts Active Active switch state Off On Pulse switch Switching starts after Delay time Switch is in active state during Width time The following switching diagram is shown for Active On n Ott Delay t Mich Period 363 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S S Switch Model Step Switch Model List S S_Switch_Step nl5 Parameter Units Description Delay S Delay before active state Active Active switch state Off On Step switch Switch is in active
79. schematic save Cancel Apply edit schematic properties select File Properties command Author Organization Autosave and backup Create backup when saving first time If schematic was loaded from the file edited and then is being saved first time the file it was loaded from will be converted into backup file with extension nl5 This prevents from schematic loss by mistakenly overwriting the file Save automatically when analysis starts If selected NL5 will save schematic automatically every time transient or AC analysis starts Show a reminder when NNN changes are made If selected NL5 will show a reminder after specified number of schematic changes are made 38 User s Manual M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual SS 1 This is a reminder that 5 changes have been made Yes save schematic now Ao continue what you are doing remind later Cancel disable this Feature Go to Preferences to enable disable this Feature Undo e Max number of Undo steps Although Undo Redo buffer can be unlimited its maximum size may be specified as well When new Undo information 1s being added and buffer size exceeds specified size the earliest data will be removed from the buffer e Clear Undo buffer on schematic save If selected Undo buffer will be cleared when schematic is saved into file Otherwise all operations since opening or creating the schematic can be reversed Schematic Set prope
80. simulation step in the main function Global variables should be declared in the beginning of the code outside of init and main functions Variables can also be initialized during declaration However 1f some code is required for initialization it can be done in the init function Input output variables are always global and can be explicitly declared as global variables as well If not explicitly declared all required input output variables and arrays of appropriate size will be created automatically during initialization phase of the analysis at t 0 To access global variables outside the C code use the following notation component name variable name For array elements use the following notation component name array name index For example to display global variable on the transient graph add a trace of function type and enter variable name or any expression containing the variable Cl ol Xcode array 3 AUD cen x1 subcircuit x2 Code component 120 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Initialization code is executed once at the beginning of simulation at t 0 The name of the initialization function should be init Initialization code is used to initialize global variables if some complex code is required for initialization Initialization code is optional and can be omitted Main code calculates output variables using current values of input variables during transient simulation If clock pin does
81. simulator User s Manual Selection Bar Selection Bar consists of tabs one per letter only if components are available for this letter Each tab contains symbols of components of the letter type and 3 common schematic elements ground label and connection point The tab All contains symbols of all components a aw O DP Amo Lop Right click A Larger a Staller A Hide Selection Bar If some components are not visible click on left right arrow images to scroll Move mouse pointer over component symbol to see a hint with short description of a component Click on the symbol to place component on the schematic Right click on the bar to see context menu with relevant commands Select Window Selection Bar menu command to show hide Selection Bar Navigation Bar Navigation Bar displays all opened documents and windows and indicates active document and active window with highlighted icon Active document Active window po Close icon Y Step Bl SubCir4 El Notch AC E Right click Right click Save Os gt LI New Ctrl M lad Save Ctrl 5 gt Open Ctro Close E Tile Horizontally CT Tile Vertically Cascade 2 Hide Navigation Bar Schematic Fz Transient Po fu ac FE E Tile Horizontally MT Tile vertically Cascade 2 Hide Mavigation Bar 30 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual If some tabs
82. starts after Delay time Phase is sine phase in degrees at the moment when signal starts WA WA O O v Delay vd Delay t t Period Period Phase 0 Phase 90 If transient is paused sine period changed then transient is continued the phase of the signal remains continuous providing smooth sine signal of variable frequency Period changed 410 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Voltage source V V_VS_PWL nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Piece wise linear voltage source Signal is defined by pwl parameter in the csv comma separated values format as follows t0 VO t1 V1 tn Vn where all t and V can be numerical values or expressions If t lt t0 signal is VO If t0 lt t lt t1 signal value is linearly interpolated between VO and V1 etc If t gt tn then signal value is Vn if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise signal defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example pwl DO LO O If Cycle Yes Delay 0 the following voltage will be generated See Working with PWL source chapter for more details V Voltage source V V_VS_Function nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Arbitrary function F t defines voltage as a function of the following variables t cur
83. state point is found so that next simulation can be started already at steady state without performing long simulation of settling process again Please note that Save IC command can also modify Delay parameter of periodic sources to provide accurate phases of such sources at t 0 166 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual While transient is running the results are immediately displayed in the Transient Window Current simulation time is shown in the Simulation progress field with green background if transient is currently running or yellow background if it is paused The amount of memory used for simulation and traces is shown in the Memory used field The transient can typically be paused at any time However it cannot be paused while the algorithm performs some critical calculations iterations which cannot be interrupted In this case the simulation will continue until the critical section of the algorithm is completed If it takes longer than the time specified on Transient page of Preferences dialog box a notification window will be displayed Not paused yet 14 seconds e Transient is shill performing iterations and cannot be paused TOU can continue waing or stop simulation at any time Stop transient now As the window says you can ignore this message and continue waiting until iterations are completed and then this window will be automatically closed Or you can stop transient immediately by clicking St
84. than circuit logical threshold otherwise false Logical threshold is defined in the Advanced Settings dialog box Transient Settings Advanced Examples ishigh 1 0 false shido rue 465 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual sum Prototype complex sum complex complex sum complex double sum double double sum double Description sum x returns sum of arguments Number of arguments is not limited If x is an array x N sum x returns sum of all array elements Examples Sumit Le 072 0 0 200 sum 1 0 1 03 2 0 2 03 3 0 3 03 double Zib Mes Zi O e Ol PS sumtx TO 05 mean average Prototype complex mean complex complex mean complex double mean double double mean doubleT Description mean x returns mean average value of arguments Number of arguments is not limited If x is an array x N sum x returns mean average value of all array elements average can be used instead of mean Examples mean Oy 2 0y S40 BO Mea Gs 0FL Ds OZ O here double se a LO 220 S60 Ad de mean x 2 5 466 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual min Prototype double min double double min double int64 min int64 int64 min int64 int min int int min int bool min bool bool min bool Description min x returns smaller value of arguments Number of arguments is not limited If x is an array x
85. the Advanced Settings dialog box x y input signals for Function model V name voltage on the component name V trace should be available for the component I name current on the component name I trace should be available for the component P name power on the component name P trace should be available for the component Function is entered as an expression without equal sign For example sin t 1000 1 cos t 10 ESz2 gt L 2123 1 mag x y sq V rl1 rl 1 1 s R1 C1 LODO 98 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Editing customized component When placing a component of customized type an Edit Component dialog box shows up first In the dialog box you can specify component dimensions number and location of pins signal names Configure parameters and click OK to place a new component To modify existing component select the component then right click on the component and select Edit component command from context menu or click Edit component button on the Components window toolbar nli Components bl HVT P CAL IAS m Edit component Copy Ctrl db Cut Ctrl x Main no code Edit Component dialog box look varies for different component since parameters and features avallable for each component type are different In all dialog boxes e Select new dimensions from Width and Height drop down boxes to change symbol size e Click on rectangle markers to add remove pins e C
86. the signal in the schematic The following histogram shows attenuation on each stage of RC filter at 1 Hz rc Schematic 100 d E 700 JE le 3 253 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual rc AC Histogram 150 de 700 dE Storage mode or storage cross section can be used to display how trace values at specific time depend on schematic parameters The following example shows modeling of previous schematic with resistors changed from 0 125 to 16 with X2 step using AC sweep Each run is saved into storage X axis of histogram is storage data 1 e resistance The lines of different colors show attenuation on each stage of RC filter at f 1 Hz active cursor as a function of resistance Ga rc AC 100 JE 700 JE le 3 Sht Ctrl clickt 254 is NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual rc AC Histogram 150 de 700 dE 125e 3 750e 3 500e One should notice that cross section of Storage histogram at R 1 is the same as upper line of Trace histogram shown in the previous example 255 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Smith Chart This 1s a standard Smith Chart plotting complex reflection coefficient Please note that Smith chart 1s supposed to plot Z impedance and Gamma reflection coefficient traces only although it plots all types of AC traces interpreting them as complex impedance The chart shows traces between cursors only
87. variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advenced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output voltage IC 419 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V V V Current controlled voltage source V V_CCVS_PWL nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string K lin Piece wise linear current controlled voltage source Source gain K is defined by pwl string as a function of input current lin See Working with PWL model chapter for details Current controlled voltage source V Y_CCVS CCO nI5 Model Parameter Units Description CCO V1 V Voltage amplitude Sin or Pulse On voltage Pulse VO V Voltage baseline Sin or Pulse Off voltage Pulse dFdl HzZ A Gain Phase deg Phase Type Signal type Sin Square T riangle Sawtooth Current controlled oscillator Output voltage is a signal with frequency equal to f Hz dFdl lin For Sine signal VO is baseline and V1 is amplitude For Square Triangle and Sawtooth
88. vertically which helps to distinguish similar traces Horizontal gridlines are used to divide traces and vertical scales are not shown When zooming graph by mouse only horizontal zoom will work for separated traces E pc Ter L h E ATAN Normal mode Separated traces 171 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Horizontal Set up horizontal scale and gridlines Start Time at the left edge of the screen Screen Time per screen Show gridlines Select to show gridlines Vertical Set up vertical scale and gridlines ta Multiplier Screen scale multiplier applied to all traces Offset Screen offset applied to all traces Reset Reset vertical multiplier to and offset to 0 Show gridlines Select to show gridlines Show all scales Show scales for all traces in trace colors Legend Legend window contains list of traces shown on the graph To show hide legend click Legend button on the Toolbar or in the context menu or use Show legend checkbox in the Screen page of Transient Data window Click on the trace to select the trace Selected trace will be shown on top of all traces Double click on the trace to select trace and to open Transient Data window Right click to select trace and open context menu The menu will contain some common commands and commands related to selected trace Click on the gray header bar of the legend and drag to move the window Legend font size and window width limit
89. with relevant commands e Click OK to accept changes and close dialog box or Cancel to cancel changes e Click Toolbar buttons to perform the following operations Open PWL data from the file in csv format O O Save PWL data into the file in csv format o Split selected row o Remove selected row Clear all data o Symmetrical PWL parameter o Non symmetrical PWL parameter 4 EPXxX 0 o Refresh graphs 107 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual EH e Table tab Provides pwl parameter data in the table form for editing o Select symmetrical or non symmetrical type of parameter using toolbar buttons Note that first From value is zero for symmetrical parameter and inf for non symmetrical parameter o Select enabled non grey cell of the table to edit the number Enter only To value corresponding From value is updated automatically o Arrow in the first column indicates selected row To select a row click the cell in the PWL data area o To create a new row click Split button to split selected row or enter a number instead of nf in the last row and press Enter Rows will be automatically sorted out o To remove a row select it and click Remove button o To update graphs press Enter or click Refresh button B e Add remove tab Use this tab to add or remove points rows in the specified range Add points in the range fo
90. 0 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Drawings Set default properties of a new drawing Default properties will be applied only to new drawings Existing drawings are not affected by default properties gt l r A los x a Preferences Drawings Document A 2 Fortsie SiE po eee ganno j Line width E Tos Components haz y Drawings grid je Symbols WW Minis Legend Annotation Cancel Apply Font size Set font size of a text Font Select font of a text Line width Set width of a line rectangle and oval Drawings grid Select grid size for drawings relative to schematic grid size Colors Double click on the item in the list to change the color Line Text 41 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Mouse Schematic Set mouse wheel action and properties Preferences Mouse von Preferences a Application Document Mouse wheel action Schematic Zoom pe Drawings Zoom Ctrl Hor crol le Symbols Shift Ver crol a Warming Ctrl 5hift None aa Graphs po Invert Zoom Cancel Apply Mouse wheel action Select action to be performed on mouse wheel rotation along with Ctrl and or Shift key state e no key held just mouse wheel rotation no key held e Ctrl mouse wheel rotation and Ctrl key held e Shift mouse wheel rotation and Shift key held e Ctrl Shift
91. 04 F FUCONE E dias 305 Fe Functions di E 310 FSCO ANCONS OE 318 E A OS O 320 L Voltasecontrollcd current SOU Enee E Guia enews eats veccunbeea eee ees 327 Curent controled curent SOULCE ascii 331 DTC i PAE RECI Oo OA a OO 335 bes Voltage conto Rs 337 k Current controlled INGICIOR crdennesi a O 338 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Lec oup ed nau Or a liceo 339 by Custom COUP IEC Induccion 340 AMPc 342 C Dirc nnal Ap OP ices cecoatauconeandad a a E Ea a E 347 O Summe amp een A E ea 392 O Voltace controlled amputaciones 356 O Current controlled amplia 357 FR RC SIS OM aces sana easton nc aanaar ceed anaes ence ae Gas ees ae ae ee ase etna 358 RoOtentiome eran da ne aT re ea neem ean oe te eer 360 RV OlaseComtrolled resilo ii id da A as 361 R C rent controlled resista dado a nevis 362 E E o o ettne doce tire wrac vem E weoe vem on endate bestaten soaeutee Poses enennee 363 9 Loe COMMON CCS Witt idad id iets euiedetetss 366 S Voltage controlled With A A 368 S Current controlled Witt vielen ade salla ein uedasevaedvnleeeaateea ves ede 371 SADISMO ls 374 SEDE loe contro Hed Wi iaa 379 Si OPD F Vola se controlled ito ad 383 S SPD F current controlled WC cis 387 TeNPN GaS MI OO mn O a 391 ES ENEE da 395 TFN FE ida 399 Ter TE Dorren E iii 403 VVOO OU oia 407 V Voltace comtrolled voltade SOU Craya 414 N Current controlled current soll E y Maitre variances ieee add 418 Wes O cei ces arias wea Sees a ees we
92. 1aput trace z Oy LOA Oe dy AS sU Deep ow Ly Gad Oeo r dada Peo The following options might help importing data if file format is different from required o Skip lines If selected specified number of lines in the beginning of the file will be skipped Otherwise only empty lines and comment lines started with will be skipped automatically o Insert header line If selected the header line time tracel trace2 will be added Otherwise a first line after skipped of the file will be used as a header Click OK to confirm import New traces will be created and shown on the graph 159 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual If data from LTSpice RAW format is imported a list of traces variables available in the file will be displayed in the Select traces to import dialog box Select traces to import E Check all Uncheck all OR Cancel Select traces and Click OK to confirm import New traces will be created and shown on the graph Other formats WFM ISF BIN do not require user s assistance the data will be loaded and converted into NL5 trace immediately after file is selected Please be aware that not all format versions and format specific options are implemented and tested If you receive error or warning message please contact us to provide details about the failure it would help us fixing the problem and adding new features and options If you want more formats to
93. 291004 1 13792e 3 20495 28 9403 1 1591 26 3 208766 28 7802 1 18071e 3 5 212583 28 6201 1 20271e 3 216399 28 46 Significant digits 1 22511e 3 220556 28 2999 be aL 1 24794e 3 224743 281399 1 27118e 3 6 228931 27 9798 E Data 1 29486e 3 233118 27 8197 1 31899e 3 237305 27 65 1 34356e 3 24185 27499 sl Export Selected traces are shown as a text in the table Initially traces are shown in the frequency interval between cursors or 1f cursors are disabled in the full screen Change From To Points and Scale values and press Enter or click Update table button to update table data Number of significant digits for frequency and data columns can be specified Click Export to save the table into the text file as comma separated values Copy selected traces to the clipboard Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be copied in the clipboard 221 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual a CE e X ab e Paste traces from the clipboard Traces from the clipboard will be added to Trace list Duplicate selected traces This operation is equivalent to Copy Paste operations Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be duplicated Remove selected traces Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be removed Delete all traces Select color of selected trace Only one trace should be selected Double click on the trace in the Trac
94. 50 Zoom schematic to specified percentage 94 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Keyboard keys and shortcuts The following keyboard keys and shortcuts can also be used to edit schematic e Space o Selection mode switch to Wire mode o Other modes switch to Selection mode e Home Center cursor on the screen e Tab Toggle attributes display name and value e Enter o New component mode place component o On the component or label switch to Components Window to edit parameters o On wire or empty space place label e Esc o New component mode cancel Block selected mode remove block rectangle While drawing wire line rectangle or oval cancel While drugging selection by mouse cancel All modes other than Selection switch to Selection mode o Unselect all e Right Up Left Down o New component mode move component o Block selected mode move selection o Selection mode change cursor direction move cursor o Wire mode change cursor direction draw wire o Scrolling mode scroll schematic e Shift Right Shift Up Shift Left Shift Down Scroll schematic e dot Place connection O 0 00 0 e Q g Place ground e A Z a z Select new component of letter type e Select next previous image of a component by changing view mirror and flip component whichever 1s applicable 95 At NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Mouse op
95. 9 Top 32 71 36036416 Bottom 530 231236091 Lett 403 1 301 24535e 3 Right 261 x E t t EH EY NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o Show frequency marker Show frequency marker for each trace frequency slider bar and current frequency at the status bar lcr Nichols plot Move slider by mouse mouse wheel or use Arrow Right Arrow Left PgUp PgDn Home or End keys to move the marker Horizontal Zoom in Horizontal Zoom out Fit the screen horizontal Vertical Zoom in Vertical Zoom out Fit the screen vertical Fit the screen Right click on the window to access relevant commands Double click on the window to center screen Left click on the window and drag to select zoom in area o If mouse pointer is moving only up or down two horizontal lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in vertically o If mouse pointer is moving only left or right two vertical lines will be Shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in horizontally 262 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o If mouse pointer is moving diagonally rectangle will be shown When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen e Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in AC Window 263 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Markers Markers tool provides
96. Agreement EULA Agreement is a legal agreement between you you either an individual or a single entity and Sidelinesoft LLC Sidelinesoft for the NL5 Circuit Simulator software the Software the Software Product NL5 License the Software License and accompanying documentation Ownership The Software any accompanying documentation and all intellectual property rights therein are owned by Sidelinesoft The Software is licensed not sold The Software is protected by copyright laws and treaties as well as laws and treaties related to other forms of intellectual property The Licensee s license to download use copy or change the Software Product 1s subject to these rights and to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement Acceptance YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT BY DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT OR BY INSTALLING USING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT YOU MUST AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE YOU WILL BE ALLOWED TO DOWNLOAD THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT YOU MUST NOT INSTALL USE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT License Grant Sidelinesoft grants you a right to download install and use unlimited copies of the Software Product Without a Software License the Software operates as a Demo version with limited number of components in the schematic and possibly some functional and performance limitati
97. BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Z transform method Z transform method can be used for calculating AC response of circuits with periodical processes switching mode converts digital filters etc Principle of operation If switching circuit is in periodical steady state with constant switching period T all the signals in the circuit at time t and t T as well as the value of the signal averaged integrated over period T are identical even if the signals change significantly during the switching period If some disturbance is applied to the circuit external source changed component parameters changed etc those sampled or averaged integrated values will change too reacting on the disturbance a 52 oo Ad Disturbance Disturbance A1 Sampling Averaging integration By detecting those changes and applying Z transform mathematical methods to the data a circuit transform function in z domain H z can be calculated After applying z to s conversion a low signal AC transfer function H s can be obtained It happens that many methods of linear circuit stability analysis based on low signal AC response of the circuit may also be applied to the switching mode circuit simply considering sampled or averaged signals to be smooth continuous signals NL5 calculates low signal AC transfer function for sampled or averaged signals by running transient analysis of the circuit
98. Cir File Pint Pin2 Cmd IC Units D D_Diode_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 298 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual D th D Zener Model Zener D Zener Model PWL D Zener Model SubCir Zener Feiner 2 PWL gy I SubCir E P Vel bD D_Zener_Zener nl5 Parameter Units Description V V Breakdown voltage drop Vd V Forward voltage drop IC Initial condition Minus Off Plus Ideal zener If V lt V or V gt Vd zener is On short circuit Otherwise zener is Off open circuit 0 When calculating DC operating point zener is set to the state specified in IC bD D_Zener_PWL nl5 Parameter Units Description pwl Comma separated string R V Piece wise linear zener pwl string defines resistance as a function of voltage See Working with PWL model chapter for details D D_Zener_SubCir nl5 Parameter Units Description File File name of subcircuit schematic Pint Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 299 BJ NL5 circ
99. D TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OTHER THAN AS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT Sidelinesoft makes no warranty that the Software Product will meet your requirements or operate under your specific conditions of use Sidelinesoft makes no warranty that operation of the Software Product will be secure error free or free from interruption YOU MUST DETERMINE WHETHER THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT SUFFICIENTLY MEETS YOUR REQUIREMENTS FOR SECURITY AND UNINTERRUPTABILITY YOU BEAR SOLE RESPONSIBILITY AND ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY LOSS INCURRED DUE TO FAILURE OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT TO MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL SIDELINESOFT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING LOST REVENUES OR PROFITS OR LOSS OF BUSINESS RESULTING FROM THIS AGREEMENT OR FROM THE PERFORMANCE INSTALLATION USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT WHETHER DUE TO A BREACH OF CONTRACT BREACH OF WARRANTY OR THE NEGLIGENCE OF SIDELINESOFT OR ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF SIDELINESOFT IS ADVISED BEFOREHAND OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES TO THE EXTENT THAT THE APPLICABLE JURISDICTION LIMITS SIDELINESOFT S ABILITY TO DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THIS DISCLAIMER SHALL BE EFFECTIVE TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED Limitation of Remedies and Damages Your remedy for a breach of this Agreement or of any warranty included in this Ag
100. ES sia 95 WIGUSE OPETI OMen 96 Components and MOS ereenn a eases ees 97 FOMU aI a A a A ne renee doce 97 FU CUI OTIS aa o 98 Editine customized COMPONEN dis 99 WV Ol kal SWAT SUD CIT CUI pr iS 103 Work o yin EOI e 105 Workmo y VV ay SOU Cait id 111 Worane with Listmo delirar ici 113 Work mo with Table mode rss did dd in 115 Workins with 210 Table mod de 117 Workne wth C modelada cade 119 Working with DLL Model ssl 124 COMPONENTS VV ING OW sasiicerssconsacistastseistenencdeseraceoseeucaviettadsneadeteusaesasasveseeuca viel tacenesseueusansasaaueseeucavsarinass 127 PI OU A ass a wwe a sa seal ted ecm aa at het O dee ase ura eth sao dee 128 Components US Meare erate Reenter ta ae ear ee as 129 A O hs 129 Editp Prane ic a ea ree Ee NT Te Re 130 Variables VV MIC OW A TO 133 STOO A lec etie a aero chs ies areas valet eee cia teen coed eaten natal een eee tee eich ee ee 133 Edane varrable a addon 134 1er e E E S EEE NE EE EEEE 135 O 137 Check SehematiC lt A 139 Schematic Tools AAA eas shatsaes aaea aaeeea aa aaaea aaiae a aR 141 READ oo 141 Mt rt a aaa eer ne ene pan 141 EE AAA A anise mn elas ees tecloahee eerste a 141 A oid uscnuientea ia wseweeeee et wtanscan inh anne ake easel usenet eae aman 141 Parami lE S asias nia 141 TEAM T dada did icdilalis 142 BPE OCU UGS oases ies ace tecsceceveacas E E E 144 IV Transient Analysis ssiscisssiissscsssisscsicsisscrsossssosscicsosssusosssesonsssdosascssssscasssssa 146 SIMU ON aa 148 SMA Olas
101. ET switch Voltage controlled switch Switch is closed if gate source voltage exceeds threshold Vth When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state specified in IC Equivalent schematic Please note this model of FET transistor does not have a body diode If you need a body diode you should add it as an external component 400 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T N FET Model FET T T _NFET_FET nI5 Parameter Units Description S AN Slope Vth V Threshold Rdson Ohm Rdson resistance IC Initial condition Off R Plus Minus FET transistor The model has 3 modes of operation A Bae ce ee ere eee oe ee eb 1 0 open 2 Vgs gt Vth Vds lt Vgs Vth S Rdson V 1 Rdson resistor 3 Vgs gt Vth Vds gt Vgs Vth S Rdson I Vgs Vth S current source FET works similar for positive and negative drain source voltage current direction changes accordingly Equivalent schematics Vgs gt Vth d d g g E Rdson E 5 5 Vds lt Vgs Vth S Rdson Vds gt Vgs Vth S Rdson Vds gt Vgs Vth S Rdson Vds gt 0 Vds lt 0 When calculating DC operating point transistor is set to an initial state specified by Initial Condition parameter IC as follows Off 1 0 open Plus Vds gt 0 I Vgs Vth S positive current source Minus Vds lt 0 I Vgs Vih S negative current source Please note this m
102. Example Gist 0 0315 450 57 1 80 The following switching diagram shows state of common to dotted pin path for Cycle Yes Delay 0 Common to another pin always has an opposite state 376 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT switch V S_ SPDT_Switch_File nl5 Model Parameter Units Description File File File name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay SPDT single pole double throw file switch Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance Switching sequence is defined in the text file File parameter is a file name with full path to the file If the file is located in the same directory as schematic file the path can be omitted Switching sequence is defined in the csv comma separated values format as follows lt if first line does not start with a number it is ignored gt t0 sO tl SL s0 sn defines switch state positive number corresponds to On state zero or negative number Off state If t lt t0 switch is in sO state At tO switch is set to sO state At t1 switch is set to s1 state and so on At t gt tn switch remains in sn state if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise states sequence defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition
103. From Remove points in the range lle 1 Interval o Add points rows in the From To range with Interval O Remove points rows in the From To range fs e Approximate tab Use this tab to approximate arbitrary function I fx s2squ l 2 Approximate using Approximate From existing pointa In the range M Automatic update To 10 Intervals 108 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual pwl parameter or PWL characteristic can be automatically approximated to fit an arbitrary function To perform approximation O Select PWL parameter or characteristic 1f available from drop down list For example for PWL resistor select R V or I V Enter f x as a function of parameter x For example for I V characteristic enter function x sqrc i x x Press Enter or click Refresh button to update graphs If I V characteristic is selected corresponding function for R V parameter will be automatically calculated if R V parameter is selected corresponding function for I V characteristic will be automatically calculated Calculated functions will be shown on the graph To approximate function using existing points rows in the table create rows in the data table manually or using Add points in the range button on the Add remove tab You will be able to add remove rows or adjust values to obtain better accuracy when approximation is done Click Approximate using existing point
104. Hysteresis Active Active state Off On IC Initial condition Off On Current controlled switch Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance Switch is set to active or non active state using following rules lin gt Threshold Hysteresis 2 active lin lt Threshold Hysteresis 2 non active Otherwise previous state When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state defined in IC The following is switching diagram for common to pin with dot path Active On The following switching diagram shows state of common to dotted pin path for Active On Common to another pin always has an opposite state Hysteresis n Ofi f t Threshold in 387 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT current controlled switch S S_ SPDT_CCS Pulse nI5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Width S Pulse width Threshold A Current threshold Active Active state Off On One shot pulse generator Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance When increasing input current lin cro
105. L5 circuit simulator User s Manual E EE a 0 E g o Status Show selected values in the status bar The values are shown for mouse pointer position o Grid Select from the following grid types Impedance Admittance Abs Phase Impedance Gamma Polar Impedance Admittance Abs Phase Impedance Gamma Polar o Z0 Ohm Characteristic impedance of the chart Please note that for Gamma trace characteristic impedance of the Smith chart should be the same as the impedance defined at the AC Settings Zoom in Zoom out Fit the screen Reset scale Select grid Click to switch to the next available grid Show hide VSWR circles Show frequency marker Right click on the window to access relevant commands Double click on the window to center screen Left click on the window and drag to select zoom in area When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen Please note that function does not work if Click on chart to center VSWR circles option is selected Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in AC Window 258 mL NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Nyquist plot Nyquist plot shows complex AC response in polar coordinates The diagram shows traces between cursors only or on the screen if cursors are disabled Unity gain circle is shown by dotted line X marker shows unity gain point w
106. L5 command those characters will be misinterpreted and result in wrong operation For instance character is typically interpreted as a space This makes it impossible to use exponential form of a number 1 23E 6 will be interpreted as 1 23E 6 and will produce HTTP server error To be used in the NLS command reserved characters should be converted into URL safe format where the character is represented by symbol followed by two digit hexadecimal number ASCII code of the character percent encoding In many cases the only reserved characters to be used in the NL5 commands would be space and To ensure correct operation replace space with its code 20 and character with 228 For instance 1 23E 6 should be sent as 1 23E 2B6 All reserved characters and their codes can be found in public resources in the Internet Running simulation When transient simulation command tran or cont or AC simulation command ac is issued through HTTP link NL5 sends OK response immediately without waiting for simulation to complete This is done in order to avoid time out condition in case of long simulation time The client should wait for simulation end by periodically sending command ready and checking NL3 response Response 0 means that simulation is still running response 1 means that simulation is complete and a new command can be issued If the error
107. NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X X Code Model Code Model DLL X X_ Code C _Ex1 nl5 X X_Code_C_Ex2 nl5 X X_Code_C_Ex3 nl5 Parameter Units Description Code C code IC Initial conditions C code block The model contains code written on simplified C language The code will be interpreted by NL5 during transient simulation Code contains global variables declaration initialization code and main code IC may contain the code assigning initial values to global variables If not empty IC code will be executed after initialization code See Working with C model chapter for details of the model functionality and instructions on creating the code X X_Code_DLL_Ex1 nl5 X X_Code_DLL_Ex2 nl5 X X_Code_DLL_Ex3 nl5 Parameter Units Description DLL DLL file name Init Initialization function name Main Main function name IC Initial conditions DLL block Component s code is written in C compiled and placed in the DLL file DLL functions will be called by NL5 during transient simulation DLL parameter is a DLL file name with full path to the file If the file is located in the same directory as schematic file the path can be omitted File extension dll can be omitted Init is the name of initialization function Initialization function is executed once at the beginning of simulation at t 0 Initialization function is optional Leave Init parameter blank if initializat
108. NLS Circuit Simulator User s Manual Rev 2 04 11 24 2014 S sidelinesoft ORI AL Opes 2014 n 5 sidelinesoft com Vv J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual VERSION This version of User s Manual is current for NL5 version 2 0 build 4 11 24 2014 The latest version of User s Manual can be found at nl5 sidelinesoft com LIMITED LIABILITY NES together will all accompanying materials is provided on a as is basis without warranty of any kind The author makes no warranty either expressed implied or stationary including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any purpose In no event will the author be liable to anyone for direct incidental or consequential damages or losses arising from use or inability to use NLS COPYRIGHTS 2014 A Smirnov The program and User s Manual are copyrighted No portion of this Manual can be translated or reproduced for commercial purpose without the express written permission from the copyright holder On publication of results obtained from use of NL5 citation is appreciated Smith is a registered trademark of Analog Instruments Company New Providence NJ Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Visual C are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation MATLAB is a registered trademark of The MathWorks Inc PYTHON is a registered trademark of the Python Software Foundation Borland C Builder is a registered tra
109. O Amplifier Model Comparator 1 gt O 0_Amplifier_Comparator nl5 Parameter Units Description Hysteresis V Hysteresis Vhi V Max output voltage Vlo V Min output voltage Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High Comparator with hysteresis Comparator output is set to Vhi or Vlo using following rules Vin gt Hysteresis 2 V Vhi Vin lt Hysteresis 2 V Vlo Otherwise V previous state The output is delayed by Delay time Input pulses shorter than Delay will not pass through and will not affect output When calculating DC operating point comparator output is set to Vlo or to Vhi according to selected IC Hysteresis Static characteristic 344 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Amplifier Model Function gt O O_Amplifier_Function nl5 Parameter Units Description F x V Output as function of the input F s AC transfer function in s domain IC V Initial condition output voltage Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines output voltage as a function of the following variables X input voltage Vin t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x x x F x x sin t F x P r1 P r2
110. Or e toed ty ieee ie oia e 148 Simulation eater alee aa eho 152 e A AAA IS A A 154 AVEC MA ia A 156 Transient DA EEIE EEEE RES 157 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O 158 UT AC CS cos A tea A cates 163 Performing sim la tioN sitoctssicsesaresidesenteeastacsecdeutesecacestesidesendecastasdesdeutssecasesdetedevendseasteadeedeueasecaceerecss 166 Transient WId0W ni ii ii 168 A RO NO 170 E A A A e A E 172 CUSO iii iii 173 A OR RR 174 PU MS titer alata tes 177 Ditto ata icdsn 179 Scrolling and ZOOMMING ca 181 PAINS VE IME OMIT V AIA OS to enes 183 Keyboard keys and horca 185 MOUS Operation add tii eee aca 186 Transient TOO a an io cccads 187 DO Gases a a ias 188 POY doe e lone umivaand ei ation snstatan O 191 Amplitude MO Midi 194 A a E O 196 penita locos E 200 Eye arar 205 A E RON 207 PON T a O 208 Line snap 610 naen a A O A ea Ce tere 211 SMAO oiseuses EE E EE EEEN 215 Linearized schematic Med a a a a 215 SWEEP AC SOUTCE MENOU aiii 215 LAINS TOn me POU aeaa AATA 217 SMON Ad o ETE T E 219 AC SeN AA ENE A ENE EEEE ERE 220 Ady anced SENE S edicion seudaedhaebiumaleadiaass 224 ACD SS A 225 PP A RO 226 PP lett cetera at E ect dana TET E E raat stench 229 Pertormino simula OM ye 25533 irvesci cies decas e aaa OOE EEE EEE EAA EEE 231 AC WIIN A E a E EEE A 232 CS AD Masher das AS 234 Lo are a cheese AE hee os E E aula gazes de deme tatu ates tise 236 CUISINE 237 O A Oe PCE E ERY Reel oe 238 A O UO I eT eRe Ce Te eT
111. S are switches Selection Bar has a tab designated for each letter When placing component by keyboard the letter key 1s used to select component type Default name of a component begins with this letter Symbol is an image of a component type how component is displayed on the schematic Selection Bar contains symbols of all available component types Some component types are customized symbol of those components as well as number of pins pins location and names can be edited See Editing customized component chapter for details Model defines functionality of a component For instance voltage source models include Pulse Sin Step File and more Each model has set of parameters specific to the model Model and parameters of the component can be set up in the Components window This chapter provides general information which applies to all components as well as some specific details on several component types models and parameters See Attachment 1 for detailed description of all component types models and parameters Formulas Most of component parameters numbers and all variables can be defined as a formula Formula is an expression that may contain other parameters and variables and is automatically recalculated when any of those parameters change Formula always starts with equal sign Varl 2 R1 2 max R1 R2 R3 To enter formula write expression started with equal sign and press Enter The for
112. Switching sequence is defined in the csv comma separated values format as follows lt if first line does not start with a number it is ignored gt t0 sO onl eee a s0 sn defines switch state positive number corresponds to On state zero or negative number Off state If t lt t0 switch is in sO state At tO switch is set to sO state At t1 switch is set to s1 state and so on At t gt tn switch remains in sn state if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise states sequence defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example 00 U A GQ O OP OF O 7 7 7 7 7 The following switching diagram is shown for Cycle Yes Delay 0 S S_ Switch SubCir nl5 Parameter Units Description File File name of subcircuit schematic Pint Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 365 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Logic controlled S switch Switch Pulse N lt Steps Y yl Oo SubCir Vin I gt P Vel S Logic controlled switch S S_LCS Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Active Active state Off On IC Initial condition Off On Logic controlled switch Switch is set to active or non
113. This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop Function 2 F F_Function 2_Table nl5 Model Parameter Un criptio able X Comma separated string X input values Comma separated string Y input values ES Table Comma separated string Table of Z output values ic V Initial condition output voltage Y 2D look up table Function output is defined by Table parameter in the csv comma separated values format as follows Table parameter of the model defines output of the component Z as a function of X and Y inputs of the component in the following format Z11 212 Z1N Z21 222 Z2N ZM1 ZM2 ZMN where e Zij defines output of the function for input values Xi and Yj e Nis total number of X input values defined by X parameter e Mis total number of Y input values defined by Y parameter Output value between specified X and Y points is linearly interpolated on both coordinates Output value below X71 is linearly extrapolated using X1 X2 interval data output value above XN is linearly extrapolated using X N 1 XN interval data The same rule is applied to Y coordinate See Working with 2D Table model chapter for more details When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop 316 BJ NL5 ci
114. Units Description Switch Switch Switch state Off On SPDT single pole double throw switch Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance S SPDT switch S S_ SPDT_Switch_Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Period S Period Width S Pulse width Delay S Delay before first pulse starts Active Active switch state Off On SPDT single pole double throw pulse switch Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance Switching starts after Delay time Switch is in active state during Width time The following switching diagram shows state of common to dotted pin path for Active On Common to another pin always has an opposite state n Ott Delay t width Period 374 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT switch S S_ SPDT_Switch_Step nl5 Model Step Parameter Units Description Delay S Delay before active state Active S Active switch state Off On SPDT single pole double throw step switch Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state
115. a 1 e resistance The lines of different colors show temperature at certain distance from the end at t 16 active cursor as a function of resistance 198 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual rc Transient One should notice that cross section of Storage histogram at R 1 is the same as upper line of Trace histogram shown in the previous example 199 M NL5 circuit simulator FFT FFT Fast Fourier Transform 1s calculated between cursors only or on the screen 1f cursors are disabled for all traces displayed on the graph FFT graph does not show phase T e Settings Opens Settings dialog box 4 FFT Trace a Paints e Line x16 ero padding Histogram Bars Hanning cos Mindo Paints Calculate phase F Don t show F 0 o FFT Points Number of FFT points 256 1048576 2 2 xl zz E E E Zero padding Adds zeroes to transient samples Can be None to X16 Zero padding is a standard technique to improve spectral resolution Window Windowing is a standard technique to reduce leakage effects and improve spectral resolution 10 windows including rectangle are currently available 200 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Calculate phase Although phase does not make much sense for FFT and is not displayed on the FFT graph it can be calculated and displayed in AC
116. a convenient way to monitor traces amplitudes at specified points Unlike cursors markers always stay at specified position Number of markers is not limited Below you can see 4 markers shown on the AC graph at 0 01Hz 0 1Hz 1Hz and 10Hz with traces magnitude and phase displayed in the Markers table AC Mi x bex BH S amp F Show onthe graph TEL 12557405 al 390734 10 341948 25 769729 72 950192 88 177371 IMIC2 13 566442 37536329 18 589017 57 954758 _ 17 504265 36 371108 153 8045 177 26538 C3 13 652423 74245271 59 997378 139 42377 Phase 21 142727 142 65446 330 74159 356 56136 e Markers table consists of the traces displayed on the graph H Add new marker Marker frequency is a frequency of selected cursor e Remove marker from the table Select click any cell in the table which belongs to the marker s column then click the button On the example above the first marker f 10e 3 will be removed e Delete all markers e Export markers table in the text or csv file Annotate selected trace at markers positions on the AC graph 2 o Xx e Annotate all traces at markers positions on the AC graph e Show on the graph Select to show markers on the AC graph Markers width and color can be changed on the Graphs page of Preferences dialog box 264 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual VI Tools 265 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Tools are used to perform
117. a text or a binary file created by other software tools or measurement instruments The following file format are currently supported TXT text format CSV comma separated values WFM Tektronix waveform format ISF Tektronix internal format BIN Agilent binary format RAW LTSpice data format binary O O O O OQO O File type is recognized by its extension txt csv wfm isf bin raw and is converted to NL3 trace format accordingly If data from text file TXT CSV is imported its contents will be displayed in the Import Traces dialog box 158 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual EE Import Traces Skip tines o ok te GR oc bani Suen Naa Gal OREN alia Cancel In this dialog the beginning of the data will be shown for verification Format of the text file txt csv accepted for import is the following First empty lines and comment lines started with symbol are automatically skipped The first line after skipped can be a header line having any text in the first column for example t s followed by comma space or Tab separated names of the traces If name of the trace consists of symbols other than numbers and letters it should be enclosed in quotes All other lines are considered as trace data The first column of the data consists of time in seconds other columns consist trace data The data can be comma space or Tab separated For example LC Ss
118. a to see context menu with relevant commands e Shift Ctrl indicators are highlighted when Shift and or Ctrl key are depressed e Status bar shows hint related to current position of mouse pointer and Shift Ctrl state e Move mouse pointer over splitter area lb then press left mouse button and drag to resize Sheet selection area e Right click on the schematic to see context menu with relevant commands 72 mag NLS circuit simulator User s Manual Schematic area contains schematic elements drawings grid points and cursor Cursor Schematic grid points Schematic elements Drawings Label Lines Component Rectangle Wire Connection Oval Attributes e Name Text e Value Ground e Schematic elements include wire connection ground label and component Schematic elements represent electrical part of the schematic used for simulation e Drawings include line rectangle oval and text Drawings are used for comments and notes e Grid points are reference points for cursor and schematic elements e Cursor is used to place select schematic elements and can be placed at grid points only Most of editing commands apply both to schematic elements and drawings Unless otherwise stated the word drawings is omitted in the description of those commands All elements are initially placed on the schematic with default properties color width style font etc defined on Schematic page of Pre
119. active state using following rules Vin gt logical threshold active Vin lt logical threshold non active To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state defined in IC S Logic controlled switch S S_LCS Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Width S Pulse width Active Active state Off On One shot pulse generator When increasing input voltage Vin crosses logical threshold switch is set to active state for Width time interval If increasing Vin crosses logical threshold value while switch is in active state the pulse is restarted To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button 366 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S Logic controlled switch S S_LCS_Steps nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Steps Roff Ohm Off state resistance Ron Ohm On state resistance Slope Type of resistance change Linear Cos Log Ramp S Resistance ramp time Steps Number of resistance steps in the ramp IC Initial condition Off On Switch with resistance ramping When increasing input voltage Vin crosses logical threshold switch resistance starts ramping from Roff to Ron When decreasing input voltage Vin crosses logical threshold switch resistance starts ramping from Ron to Roff R
120. aes 488 o no RR 488 A este tera te tet dat aeat a a a tice ieen sine E T 489 A o E cea ateaas use A ETE E E E ETET A EE A T 489 SAVO oea A E A 490 SEN Ea cod 490 SAVOIO E EE E A 491 SIO AA EE E ee ee E E 491 SOD y N E ETE 491 RN 492 a on II A 492 MAC ce ii 493 A case tacna see A E T nenceee ota 494 TE ACCTVAI VS AO 495 A o II a EES 496 5 END USER LICENSE AGREEMEN E iii ds 497 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Quick Start NL5 Circuit Simulator h Version 0 4 Build 8 09 28 2008 Uap Copyright 1994 2008 4 Smimow Program ID 0269 72DC 3ECA E2D5 This copy is licensed to 10 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Install and Run NLS5 Install NLS One of NL5 advantages is that it consists of only one file AE n15 exe NLS does not require special installation simply copy n15 exe into any directory You may have several copies of n15 exe in different directories To move NL5 to another computer just copy n15 exe that s all The following files are not required but if used should be located in the same directory as n15 exe e E n15 chm NLS help file e 1 n15 n11 NLS license file To create NL3 icon in the desktop right click on n15 exe in the Windows Explorer and select Send To Desktop create shortcut command Latest revision of NL5 can be found at nl5 sidelinesoft com 11 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual NE 5 file types There are several file types registered
121. affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop 307 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function Model Int ue gt F Function Model Lim gt F Function Model Integral LES F F _Function_Int nl5 Parameter Units Description resolution V Resolution V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage Rounding function V K round Vin resolution Round to the nearest multiple of resolution If resolution 1 round to the nearest integer When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop F F_Function_Lim nl5 Parameter Units Description Max V Maximum Min V Minimum IC V Initial condition output voltage Limiting function The function is calculated as follows if Vin lt Min V Min if Vin gt Max V Max Otherwise V Vin When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop F F_Function_Integral nl5 Parameter Units Description K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage Integral V K Vin dt When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC
122. al 321 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Current source I I _CS_Step nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Step 11 A Step On current lO A Step Off current Slope Slope type Linear Cos Exp Rise S Step rise length Delay S Delay before step starts Step current source Step starts after Delay time _ Delay Rise t The following slope types are available Rise t Rise t Rise t Linear Cos cosine Exp exponential 322 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Current source I I _CS_Sin nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Sin 1 A Current amplitude 10 A Current baseline Period S Period Phase deg Phase Delay S Delay before sine signal starts Sine current source Sine signal starts after Delay time Phase is sine phase in degrees at the moment when signal starts Delay t Delay t Period Period Phase 0 Phase 90 If transient is paused sine period changed then transient is continued the phase of the signal remains continuous providing smooth sine signal of variable frequency Period changed 323 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Current source II CS PWL nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Piece wise linear current source Signal is defined by pwl parameter in the csv comma separated values format as follows t0 10 t1 11
123. al T T _PNP_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 398 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T N FET Linear I 3 FET E I SIS y ubCir i ves 0 P Vel T N FET T T_NFET_Linear nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Linear S A V Slope Hz Unit gain frequency IC A Initial condition drain current Linear FET transistor Voltage controlled current source with specified bandwidth S is open loop slope Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency S and f1 can be set to infinity inf When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined drain current is set to specified output current IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used SS 5 Vgz Equivalent schematic Static characteristic AC response Please note this model of FET transistor does not have a body diode If you need a body diode you should add it as an external component 399 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T N FET T T_NFET_Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Vth V Threshold IC Initial condition of the switch Off On F
124. al condition output voltage EAS Pe 7 Signed power function V K pwr Vx Vy The function is calculated as follows if Vy 0 if Vee o AS if Vx 0 if Vx 10 MUS lt lt lt ou ll K 0 K if Vy 0 if Vx lt 0 if Vx 0 VS 0 K Vx lt lt lt Ho ol oll 0 K Vx When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop F Function 2 F F_Function 2_Mag nl5 Model Parameter Units Description M ag K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage EN mag LS Magnitude V K sqrt Vx Vy When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop 315 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F F Function 2 F F _Function 2_Phase nl5 Phase ES praso 7 K V V Gain V Initial condition output voltage Phase V K phase Vx Vy V in Volts is equal to phase of a vector Vx jVy in degrees If Vx O and Vy 0 V 0 When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step
125. al is delayed by Delay time To see and set logical levels go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button Example co U FF GQ O Or OF oO 7 7 7 7 7 The following logical output will be generated if Cycle Yes Delay 0 457 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual 2 Operators Operators are listed in descending precedence order 1 most 14 least The table is based on http en cppreference com w cpp language operator_precedence Function call Array Subser1 oeing Postfix increment x x 1 after Postfix decrement x x 1 after Prefix increment x x 1 before Prefix decrement x x 1 before Unary plus Unary minus Logical NOT Bitwise NOT bool Type cast to bool Int Type cast to int int64 Type Cast to int64 float Type cast to float double Type cast to double complex Type cast to complex Multiplication DIVISION Remainder Addttlon Subtraction lt lt Bitwise left shift gt gt Bitwise right shift Relation operator less than Relation operator less than or equal to Relation operator greater than Relation operator greater than or equal to Relation operator equal to Relation operator not equal to 458 p p IN Qh Qh O N W BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Assignment Assignment sum Assignment difference Assignment proquet Assignment quotient Assignment remai
126. all Apply Close If Function trace is selected enter function in the edit window and click Add button to add new trace to the trace list The function may consist of arithmetic operators and functions component parameters global variables of C code components current transient time t and V I and P on the component sin t 1000 l cos ce 10 V in I Al Cl V C1 V C1 72 sq rl 41 Use Function trace to display V I and P on the components inside the subcircuit V X1 V1 P X AZe Ro 164 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual To access global defined in the initialization code variables and arrays of Code component enter variable name or any expression containing the variable in the following format component name variable name For array components use the following format component name array name index For example X1l size Xcode array 3 X1 X2 temp x1 subcircuit x2 Code component The name of the trace 1s the function itself so that renaming the trace will change the function V L and P traces can also be added from Schematic context menu and by Components Window toolbar buttons The following individual trace parameters can be set Scale Trace value for half of the screen Mid Trace value in the middle of the screen Shift s Trace time shift Width Width of the trace line in pixels Fit the Screen Automatically set Scale and Mid values so that th
127. alog box will show up x Mame Aun 1 XE Cancel Enter new storage name and click OK Move selected up e Move selected down e Store last Run Select this option to compare new simulation with previous one When new simulation starts current simulation data will be moved into storage under the name Last If run with the name Last already exists 1t will be overwritten Thus previous simulation data will always be in the storage under the name Last Display storage e Selected only Only selected data is shown on the graph e Selected and dimmed Selected data is displayed with normal trace colors other data 1s displayed with dimmed color specified on Graphs page of Preferences dialog box e All All data is displayed with normal trace colors Example 20 de E ener teeny 0e 3 100e 3 ry 1 Io Selected only Selected and dimmed All When Storage page is selected checkboxes in the trace list specify traces with storage allowed 242 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Data table The Data table shows cursors position trace values and some characteristics of the traces calculated between cursors such as mean max min and more If cursors are disabled the table shows the data at the left and right edges of the screen and values calculated between left and right edges of the screen 100e 3
128. alue while pulse is generated the pulse is restarted 416 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Voltage controlled voltage source II_VCVS_PWM nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWM V1 V Pulse On voltage VO V Pulse Off voltage F Hz Frequency Phase deg Phase Vmax V Input voltage corresponding to 100 duty Voltage controlled Pulse Width Modulator Output voltage is a pulse signal of frequency F shifted by Phase Input voltage Vin is sampled at the beginning of each cycle of the signal and width of the output pulse during this cycle is calculated according to the equation width 1 F Vin Vmax or duty 100 Vin Vmax If the width is equal or less than zero a short On pulse with the width equal to the minimum calculation step at that moment will be generated If the width is equal or greater than period of frequency F a short Off pulse at the end of the period will be generated Due to that the frequency of the output signal is always F V Voltage controlled voltage source V V_VCVS_SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Pin4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with
129. amplitude range Bins Number of bins within amplitude range Enter manually select from the drop down list o Scale Enter new value and press Enter to redraw the histogram 194 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Horizontal Zoom in e Horizontal Zoom out e Fit the screen horizontal e Vertical Zoom in Vertical Zoom out e Fit the screen vertical e lel 1 2 e Fit the screen e Right click on the window to access relevant commands e Double click on the window to center screen e Left click on the window and drag to select zoom in area o If mouse pointer is moving only up or down two horizontal lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in vertically o If mouse pointer is moving only left or right two vertical lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in horizontally o If mouse pointer is moving diagonally rectangle will be shown When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen e Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in Transient Window 195 Histogram Histogram presents trace values and some characteristics of the traces calculated between cursors or on the screen if cursors are disabled in a graphical format Histogram can also show cross section of traces or storage data kc_Line_AC Histogram x t
130. anchored to left top corner of the graph window To move the text click on the text and drag If pointer is locked only text will move To move the pointer only click on the end of the pointer and drag To edit the text double click on the text or right click on the text and select Edit text command 23 from context menu The same Text dialog box will show up To delete the text right click on the text and select Delete text command X from context menu Annotation Annotation is a text with a pointer which always points to the same data point of a trace even when graph is zoomed or scrolled Annotation belongs to a trace so if trace is deleted all trace annotations are deleted as well Annotation is also deleted if trace data is cleared For instance 1f annotation is added to simulation Run trace and a new simulation is started the annotation will disappear since the trace data is cleared at simulation start To add annotation set active cursor to the time point where annotation is needed right click on the graph select Annotate then select Selected trace or All traces command The same buttons are available in the AC toolbar Annotation s will be added only if trace exists at cursor s frequency If cursors are disabled annotation will be added approximately at 1 3 of a screen Annotation font colors number of significant digits and some other properties can be specified at the Annotation page of Properties To
131. and automate complex analysis by means of script Most of the Tools are located in the Tools window Use the following Main Menu commands Tools menu or Toolbar buttons to open Tools E o Script Open save edit and run script e Console Show script execution log Also has a command line which works as calculator and allows executing some script commands EY e Sweep Perform multiple transient and or AC analysis runs while sweeping component parameter Uys 0 Optimization Perform transient and or AC analysis while manually iterating selected parameters BD e HTTP Link Configure and start NLS HTTP server to provide link with external applications 266 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Script Script page allows opening editing saving and running of script Script 1s a program written on C language In addition to standard operators and mathematical functions it may use NL3 specific script commands see Attachment 4 which allows changing schematic parameters running simulation analyzing data and saving simulation results Script commands can also be executed from NL5 command line from command line on the Console page of Tools window and through HTTP link from external applications This allows using NL3 as an add on simulation engine with popular engineering tools such as MATLAB Python and others Click Script Toolbar button or select Tools Script command in the Main Menu to open Script page
132. ant digits 649 9629 19 2504 15 9397 15 3312 651 224e 3 14 3479 12009 11 395 J6 y Frequency 673 4698 3 11 232 8 48632 7 94591 E Data 605 714e 3 6 62187 5 54447 5 0633 6 36808 3 0558 262 710 204e 3 4 38319 920 098e 3 509 044 722 44963 261145 953 245e 3 1 34403 734 694e 3 1 01505 261439 2 99067 746 93963 432 983 4 10148 4 46731 159 184e 3 1 75256 A Adel 5 80045 l C CETNC 7 ma Esport Close 202 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Text table shows amplitude of all FFT traces Select Display mode to show o Screen Show points in the frequency range visible on the screen only o All points Show all calculated FFT points o Step Hz Show points with specified frequency step This mode can be used to see only harmonics of specified frequency Specify Significant digits for Frequency and Data columns of the table Click Export to export the table into text or csv file Show in AC window If selected FFT traces will be shown in the AC window as well as in the FFT window The name of the traces will be FFT of trace name If option 1s unselected FFT traces will be deleted in AC window If FFT window is closed with option selected the traces will not be deleted Working with AC traces in AC window allows convenient zooming and scrolling using of cursors and Data table and it also shows phase FFT traces can be duplicated in AC window to be used as a refere
133. ar amplifier K is open loop gain Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency K and f1 can be set to infinity inf When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined amplifier output is set to specified output voltage IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used vin R y K a 1 K a RE 21 11 Equivalent schematic v K Yok in f1 Static characteristic AC response 342 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Amplifier Model OpAmp O O_Amplifier_OpAmp nl5 Parameter Units Description K V V Gain f1 Hz Unit gain frequency Vhi V Max output voltage Vlo V Min output voltage IC V Initial condition output voltage Linear amplifier with output limiter K is open loop gain Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency K and f1 can be set to infinity inf Output voltage is limiting between Vlo and Vhi When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined amplifier output is set to specified output voltage IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used Please note if both K and f1 are set to infinity the model may experience convergence problem Use Comparator model instead Static characteristic AC response 343 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual
134. are not visible click on left right arrow images to scroll Move mouse pointer over icons to see a hint Click on the tab to activate the document Click on the window icon to activate the window Click on the Close icon to close the document Right click on the document tab or empty space of the Navigation Bar to see context menu with relevant commands e Select Window Navigation Bar menu command to show hide Navigation Bar 31 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Document Windows NLS document may have several windows opened at the same time e Schematic Transient Transient Tools AC AC Tools Schematic Transient and AC Windows are part of standard Multi Document Interface and basically behave similar to other Windows applications Document Windows e Can be minimized and maximized e Can be arranged within Main Window Window Tile Window Cascade e Are listed under Window menu e Have a related Document Toolbar displayed at the right side of the Main Window e Closing Schematic window will automatically close the entire document e Use Navigation Bar or Window menu to navigate between these windows de B N and arrange them on the screen WoO EE oh i E Y Transient Tools and AC Tools Windows are not part of the Multi Document o Interface and behave different Tools Windows e Are always on top of other windows o AE e Are listed under Transient Tools and AC Tools menus a mE 2o ES E
135. atic context menu and by Components Window Set AC source button Frequency Select the method of how frequency simulation points are specified When simulation starts AC window frequency range is automatically set to the range between minimum and maximum specified frequencies Frequency Interval fi B 3 Fram Hz fe 3 To Hz FOO Points Log Scale Use current screen e Interval Specify frequency interval number of simulation points and scale o From Hz Start frequency o To Hz End frequency o Points Number of simulation points o Scale Frequency scale Log Logarithmic Lin Linear 220 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o Use current screen Click to use current AC screen left frequency right frequency and scale as a new simulation interval From To and Scale parameters will be set according to what is currently displayed on the AC graph e List Specify custom frequencies This method can be used to Frequency List specify more frequency points in the range where AC response is changing fast in order to optimize simulation time especially for Sweep AC Source simulation method Enter frequencies one number per line Frequencies can be entered in any order Click Sort and refresh button sf to verify and sort entered numbers Click Edit frequency list button to edit frequency list in the Frequency List dialog box xi TS Interval po From Hz j
136. atic file filename Extension nl5 can be omitted If file path is not specified search in the script file directory Examples open c Project files nl15 rc n15 open rc pause Usage pause Description Pause transient Command can be called from console command line and HTTP link only ready Usage ready Description Check if transient or AC analysis is completed Returns 0 if analysis is still running returns 1 if completed 488 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual return Usage return return filename Description Stop executing the script If filename is specified download and start executing script from the file filename Examples rec curn COtura Oo Croa rununtil Usage neq He mage cola Ls PUnUntLl expr Description Set up run until transient mode If parameter expr is omitted turn off run until mode and clear run until expression Otherwise turn on run until mode and use parameter expr as run until expression Examples Lunn cununtil Vel ly 02 489 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual save Usage save save filename Description Save schematic into a file filename Extension nl5 can be omitted If file path is not specified save in the script file directory If parameter filename is omitted save into the same file Examples Save Save rcnew savedata Usage Savedata savedata fi
137. ation of and running of script code which changes component parameter in specified range performs transient and or AC analysis and stores traces into storage Click Sweep Toolbar button amp or select Tools Sweep command in the Main Menu to open Sweep nli Tools page of Tools window a MM gt XK xv a Es Script El Console E Sweep A A Name PO From fo ta TS Sheps EY z Optimization e Transient are e Clear storage Toolbar buttons perform the following operations e Run sweep Se e Stop sweep execution X e Clear List type sweep text EE e Help F1 Click to open Help topic on Sweep page There are two types of sweep Loop and List Set up the following parameters for both sweep types e Name Name of the parameter to be changed Enter parameter name manually or select from drop down list The list shows all numerical parameters of the component which is currently selected in the schematic or in the Components Window For example rc Components DA CAE 14 MI Pulse a Select component V1 271 Script Console Sweep Optimization Name WA WO 4 Penod From To I Chane Select parameter V1 Period M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Transient Select to run transient AC Select to run AC analysis Clear storage Select to clear storage when sweep starts If nor cleared sweep runs will be added to existing storage S
138. ator User s Manual Transform Frequency Transform frequency response of the schematic by changing R C and L values Enter f1 and f2 values or place cursors at fl and f2 frequencies on the AC graph active cursor at f2 Select one of the following options then click Execute button to proceed e R const C and L will change as follows c c f1 f2 L L f1 2 e C const R and L will change as follows R R 1 2 L L 1 2 e L const R and C will change as follows R R 2 f1 C C 1 2 Example notch frequency of the filter moved from 317 kHz to 100 kHz keeping C const Calculate AC response Set cursors at notch frequency and 100 kHz active cursor open Schematic Tools dialog box Transform page select C const click Execute Calculate new AC response Notch frequency has moved to 100 kHz 142 mag NLS circuit simulator User s Manual a L Impedance Transform schematic impedance from rl to r2 by changing R C and L values Enter rl and r2 values then click Execute button to proceed R C and L values will change as follows R R rF2 Y41 C C ril r2 heer 2 7 EL Example change characteristic impedance of the filter from 1 to 50 Ohm Calculate AC response and input impedance Open Schematic Tools dialog box Transform page enter ri 1 Ohm and r2 50 Ohm click Execute Calculate new AC response and input impedance AC response is th
139. ator User s Manual sart Prototype complex sqrt complex double sqrt double Description Square root If argument is double negative argument will cause error Examples sqrt 4 0 2 4 0 sqrt 4 0 math error SGE sqr Prototype double sqr double Description Signed square root sqr x returns Jx if x gt 0 e x if x lt 0 Examples sqr 4 2 sqr i t 2 463 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual sq Prototype complex sq complex double sq double Description sq x calculates x x square of the argument Examples sq 2 4 So CAG 0427 lim limit Prototype double 1im double x double min double max Description Limiting function lim x min max returns e x if min lt x lt max e min if x lt min e max if x gt max limit can be used instead of lim Examples Lim O14 2 S70 lim 2 1 2 1 LiClO leo 2 464 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Islow Prototype bool islow double Description Compares argument with logical threshold islow x returns true if x is less than circuit logical threshold otherwise false Logical threshold is defined in the Advanced Settings dialog box Transient Settings Advanced Examples islow 1 0 true islow 55 false ishigh Prototype bool ishigh double Description Compares argument with logical threshold ishigh x returns true if x is greater
140. available Steps 6 Rotf Rott rot _ _ Ron p Ron a lg Ron a Ramp t Ramp t Ramp t Linear Cos Log When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state specified in IC 389 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S SPDT current controlled switch Model SubCir Parameter File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC Units Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 390 User s Manual BJ NL5 circuit simulator T NPN transistor y y T NPN transistor Model Parameter Units Linear 28 NA Hz IC A User s Manual Linear y Switch Transistor by SubCir _ A V P Vel T T _NPN_Linear nl5 Description Gain beta Unit gain frequency Initial condition collector current Linear BJT transistor Current controlled current source with specified bandwidth B is open loop gain beta Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency B and f1 can be set to infinity inf When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined collector current is set to specified output current IC
141. ay be asked for granting permission to access NLS website If NL5 version revision and build are current a message will be displayed in the Status bar If new update is detected the dialog box with information about update and release notes will be displayed e Most Recently Used files Can be set in the range 0 10 This is a maximum number of most recently used files displayed under File menu e Subcircuit Library path A path to Subcircuit Library directory If subcircuit SubCir model is located in the Subcircuit Library directory a short name without path can be used as subcircuit file name e Beep on errors and messages Produce sound signal when error or message window is displayed This option does not affect sounds generated by system messages such as file not found file already exists etc 37 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Document Set default properties of a new schematic and autosave backup options Properties This is default information to be set in the properties of a new schematic To view and Preferences g Document Properties 2 Components Organization Unknown po Symbols n WW AMIS Aubosave and backup e Create backup when saving first time 5 Table gt Legend Save automatically when analysis starts e Annotation Show a reminder when 20 changes are made a inda y Unlimited Max number of Unda steps e Clear Undo buffer on
142. be implemented in the NLS feel free to contact us as well 160 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Save selected traces into nlt data file Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be saved into the file View Export selected traces Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be viewed and exported into text or csv file View Export dialog box will show up a Yiew Export Traces imeta input Jace 2 o f Significant digits e 86 gt Time Selected traces are shown as a text in the table Initially traces are shown in the time interval between cursors or 1f cursors are disabled in the full screen Change From and To values and press Enter or click Update table button to change interval Traces are shown with fixed time step specified in the Step value Initial step is automatically set so that number of points is close to the value specified by Approximate number of points parameter on Transient page of Preferences dialog box but not exceeds Max number of points defined on the same page Number of significant digits for time and data columns can be specified Click Export to save the table into the text file as comma separated values Copy selected traces to the clipboard Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be copied in the clipboard Paste traces from the clipboard Traces from the clipboard will be added to the Trace list Duplicate selec
143. bool bool complex Description Returns false if argument is equal to zero returns true if argument is non zero bool x works exactly the same as type casting operator bool x Examples bool 0 false bool 1 5 true bool 1 0427 07 true Int Prototype int int bool int int int int int int64 int int double int int complex Description Returns argument value converted to int type int bool x returns O if x false and returns 1 if x true int double x converts double to int by truncating discarding the fractional part int complex x converts double real part of a complex number to int by truncating discarding the fractional part int x works exactly the same as type casting operator int x Examples int true 1 int 1 6 1 tatsi b i iret cee 23 ca 479 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual int64 Prototype int64 int64 bool int64 int64 int int64 int64 int64 int64 int64 double int64 int64 complex Description Returns argument value converted to int64 type int64 bool x returns 0i64 if x false and returns 1164 if x true int64 double x converts double to int64 by truncating discarding the fractional part int64 complex x converts double real part of a complex number to int64 by truncating discarding the fractional part int64 x works exactly the same as type casting operator int64 x Examples int64 true 1164 int64 1 6 1164
144. bove logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step 446 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Logic 3 Model Delay Y Y_Logic 3_Delay nl5 Parameter Units Description Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High Logical component with three inputs and delay Logic function AND OR XOR and output type inverted or non inverted depend on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button The output is delayed by Delay time Input pulses shorter than Delay will not pass through and will not affect output When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC 447 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Custom logic Logic Delay y O O Views are used to specify logical function and inverted or non inverted output This is a customized component A component can be edited in the Edit Component dialog box See Editing customized component chapter for instructions on
145. calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop 312 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function 2 F F _Function 2_Sub nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Sub K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage ES er gt Y Subtraction V K Vx Vy When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop F Function 2 F F_Function 2_Max nI5 Model Parameter Units Description Max K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage pax mak gt P Maximum V K max Vx Vy if Vx gt Vy V K Vx if Vx lt Vy V K Vy When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop F Function 2 F F_Function 2_Min nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Min K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage Eas a Minimum V K min Vx Vy if Vx gt Vy V K Vy if Vx lt Vy V K Vx When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calc
146. can be inverted To see and set logical threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button A waveforms example for different modes When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC 433 BJ NL5 circuit simulator X Sample Hold Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pin Pin2 Pin3 Cmd IC User s Manual Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 434 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X Directional ea Vr coupler lence I _ go 5 3 Vi P Vel X Directional coupler X X_DirCoupler_Coupler nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Coupler ZO Ohm Characteristic impedance CF dB Coupling factor Directional coupler is a short circuit no insertion loss with two output ports forward Vf and reflected Vr Output ports are voltage sources with zero output impedance and coupling factor CF The output voltages are calculated as follows Vi K V 4I z0 2 Vr K V 120 2 where K 10 All voltages are referenced to ground 435 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X Bok swor gt E X Block 2 X X_Block 2_SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Descrip
147. can be selected on the Legend page of Preferences dialog box 172 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Cursors Cursors are used mostly for selecting time interval on the graph for Data table calculations Selected active cursor 1s shown with solid colored square on the top To show hide enable disable cursors click Show hide cursors Toolbar button 4F Select Cursors mode to move cursors on the graph e Double click on the graph to set both cursors to the same point This will also enable cursors if they were disabled e Click on the graph to move nearest cursor to this point e Click and drag to select and move cursor To place cursors to specific positions and for other options right click on the graph and select Cursors command Hp from context menu Cursors dialog box will show up cursors e Show fi O0e 3 Left 500e 3 Right 4006 3 Interwal Lock position Lock interval Close e Show Select checkbox to show enable cursors e Left Right Interval Enter new cursors position or interval press Enter to apply or Esc to cancel If interval changed an active cursor will move e Lock position Lock cursors at current position so that cursors cannot be moved e Lock interval Keep current interval between cursors If one cursor is being moved another one will automatically follow it to maintain specified interval The following toolbar buttons can be used to move cursors A e Right
148. can be used to display spatial distribution of the signal in the schematic The following example shows modeling of heat conduction through the rod using electrical analogy RC chain models 1 dimensional rod with temperature source V1 applied to one end Traces show temperature at certain distance from the end When temperature changes as a step temperature front propagates through the rod Histogram shows temperature distribution along the rod at t 1 left cursor and t 16 right cursor Ic_line Schematic l Ioj x 3 Shift Chl Chick to start sele 197 1 uy NLS circuit simulator User s Manua rc Transient 1 T I I I l I mal l I I I l I I I l p I I m I l I I I E 1 q y gt A E A AR a A EA E ee e A MR a e a e y a a T R A ce 7 ai e Tb E 710 le 14 116 E Ej L L L L d L L 0 4 MB Shitt Cil Click to paa m m e ee ee ee ee m A n a Cory AL ey W 5 MOC Storage mode or storage cross section can be used to display how trace values at specific time depend on schematic parameters The following example shows modeling of previous schematic with resistance reciprocal of heat conductance changing from 0 125 to 16 with X2 step using transient sweep Each run is saved into storage X axis of histogram is storage dat
149. ce skin effect shunt conductance and dielectric losses Constant series resistance is defined by r parameter Skin losses are modeled by a number of RL chains providing series impedance increase as a square root of frequency The number of chains is automatically optimized based on calculation step value however the maximum impedance increase due to skin effect is limited to 40 dB 100 times fr parameter defines a frequency where effective series impedance is approximately 3 dB higher than r Skin losses are calculated only if r gt O and fr is not infinite Constant shunt conductance is defined by G parameter Dielectric losses are modeled by a shunt capacitance providing shunt admittance increase proportional to frequency fG parameter defines a frequency where effective shunt admittance is approximately 3 dB higher than G Dielectric losses are calculated only if G gt O and fG is not infinite Input and output are galvanically isolated no current is flowing between input and output and any voltage difference between input and output may exist When calculating DC operating point initial forward and reflected voltage and current are calculated based on the following conditions if VIC and IIC are blank Vin Vout lin lout if VIC is specified and IIC is blank Vin Vout VIC if VIC is blank and IIC is specified
150. check all e Show table Select to show table F Check to show in the table Check all Uncheck all Apply Close e Show table in separate window If selected the table will be displayed as a separate window e Show frequency on the header If selected cursors position will be shown in the header line in the left right and delta columns e Show frequency in the table If selected cursors positions will be shown in a separate row 29 013552 of 2 FE 25 013582 of 2 FE e Table values Select values to display in the table OOOO left trace value at left cursor right trace value at right cursor delta right minus left min trace minimum between cursors 244 12 b62de 3 221 024e3 26 361e 3 b92625e 5 2 5032154 2 63461 41 44036 39 162 152 3 505363 24420219 45 55964 39 162152 6 5 2 PEE 201 02de 3 EGEIZb25e 3 25032154 2 4963461 41 44036 39 162152 3 505363 4 420219 22 0204 66 361e 3 4555964 39 162152 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o max trace maximum between cursors pp trace peak to peak value between cursors o slope magnitude slope between cursors in dB decade If cursors are located at the same frequency slope is calculated as magnitude derivative at this frequency Otherwise slope is calculated as Mag right Mag left f right f left O When Table page is selected c
151. circuit 0 ed y When calculating DC operating point all diodes are Off 301 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Logic controlled D g thyristor D Logic controlled thyristor Model Thyristor Parameter Units Vd V Ihold A IC Models User s Manual Thyristor SubCir a V I gt E V in gt P Vel D D_LCT_Thyristor nl5 Description Forward voltage drop Holding current Initial condition Off On Ideal thyristor Thyristor has two states Off state non conducting open circuit On state conducting ideal diode with Vd forward voltage drop If control voltage Vin is greater than logical threshold thyristor is in On state ideal diode When control voltage drops below logical threshold thyristor stays in On state as long as current exceeds holding current Ihold and voltage V is not negative To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point thyristor is set to the state specified in IC D Logic controlled thyristor Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC D D_LCT_ SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command
152. circuit simulator User s Manual 1 Component Types Models and Parameters Component types are described in the following format T fj oe ee Se ee ee eee I Letter ype Model 1 Picture of NN tore ee Model 2 i V I P traces i Symbol i A i e a et See ee i View 11 View 2 A A oe Description of views optional optional Model and parameters are presented as follows Letter Type Example file name Model Par 1 Unit 1 Par 1 description name Par 2 Unit 2 Par 2 description Model specific View optional Detailed description of the model and parameters Model example files are located in the Examples Components folder of the NL3 complete package download zip file 282 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Label Model Label Label Model V e Step Label Label I V Label Pulse Sin PWL Function File Trace SubCir Traces Models P Vel Label Label Label nl5 Parameter Units Description VIC V Initial condition initial voltage Ohm Initial resistance Label This model can be used As a voltage trace probe point For connecting schematic points without wires including points at different sheets To apply initial voltage during DC operating point calculation When calculating DC operating point if initial voltage VIC is not blank the temporary voltage source VIC is connected to the label through initial resistor R When DC operating point is
153. ck on selection and select Disable command from context menu To enable select Enable command 89 ug NLS circuit simulator User s Manual Mirror Flip Rotate To change orientation of a schematic element use Rotate Mirror and Flip commands 4 e Rotate right Ctrl R Rotate right clockwise e Rotate left Ctrl L Rotate left counterclockwise rin e Mirror Ctrl M Mirror flip around vertical axis e Flip Ctrl E Flip flip around horizontal axis Select element ae aS Rotate right Rotate left Mirror Flip Those commands can be applied to selected block as well Select block Mirror Flip 90 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual To rotate block select the block then place cursor to the center of rotation inside the block Select block Rotate left Format All elements are initially placed on the schematic with default properties color width style font etc After that properties of any element can be customized by formatting To format selected elements right click on the selection and select Format command from context menu or select Edit Format command from Main menu Format dialog box will show up Selection Attributes Show selection in nomal colors Schematic 2 Component Attributes Cancel 91 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Only properties applicable to selected elements will be enabled For instance 1f only wir
154. copies of the DLL files with different names Main function calculates output variables using current values of A yi input variables If clock pin does not exist the function is executed on ae y every calculation step If clock pin exists the function is executed only a8 on rising edge of logical clock signal Initial conditions IC Initial conditions IC parameter is a text string that may contain the code assigning initial values to outputs and component variables For example min 1 23 max 4 56 counter 100 where min and max are outputs and counter 1s component variable IC string will be automatically modified by the following commands e Transient Save IC fills in the string with current variable values e Schematic Tools Initial Condition page check box Clear C code IC clears this string up If not empty IC code will be executed right after initialization function and before the first call of main function first simulation step at t 0 Creating DLL The code can be compiled and then the DLL created using standard C C development tools Currently it was tested with Borland C Builder and Microsoft Visual C Example Borland C Builder 6 projects are located in the Examples Components x folder of the NL5 complete package download zip file 126 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Components Window To open hide Components window e Select menu command Schematic Components
155. creen Click to use current transient screen settings as a new simulation interval Start and Screen parameters will be set according to what is currently displayed on the transient graph Data sampling step Specify data sampling saving step equal or different than calculation step This option does not affect calculation it only reduces amount of stored data e Same as calculation save all data All the calculated data are saved into memory e Less than or equal to If selected a maximum data sampling step should be entered as well When possible the data are saved with specified data sampling step In addition all the critical data points such as extremes max and min sharp edges switching points are saved e Equal to If selected a data sampling step should be entered as well Data will be saved with a constant step 154 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Options e Run until If selected and expression is entered in the window the expression will be evaluated at each step of transient simulation and simulation will be paused immediately as soon as result of the expression 1s positive value Then simulation can be continued Expression may use variable t current simulation time voltage current and power at any component in the form V name name and P name where name is the name of the component V I or P traces should be allowed for the component The expression will not be evaluated while t l
156. d 178 2 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Data table The Data table shows cursors position trace values and some characteristics of the traces calculated between cursors such as mean max min rms values and more If cursors are disabled the table shows the data at the left and right edges of the screen and values calculated between left and right edges of the screen Cursors 3 05609 6 92456 3 86 EJ vivay fio T zao eee vci 2 a059 3 65522 1 40 4 66321 4 66 Cursors enabled active cursor is highlighted Cursors disabled screen size 20 e To show hide Data table click Table toolbar button or right click on the graph and select Table command from context menu e Click on the trace row to select the trace Selected trace will be shown on top of all traces e Double click on the table to open Transient Data window e Right click to open context menu The menu will contain some common commands and commands related to selected trace e Colors fonts and number of significant digits used in the table can be customized on Table page of Preferences dialog box The table can be displayed on the bottom of the Transient Window or as a separate window right click on the table and select Separate window command Ha E Ki TASAS Las IDE A rebel ie Ber rih abu El Table in the Transient Window Table in separate window 179 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual
157. d on Graphs page of Preferences dialog box as Gridlines interval in pixels If scale is logarithmic gridlines are automatically adjusted to provide best view Scales gridlines and some other options of the graph can be changed on Screen page of AC Data window 234 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual x cor i Med ey SO MA Traces Screen Table Storage i Check to display on the graph M Show legend Show data points e Show numbers Horizontal e Log scale fi Lett Hz fi e b Aight Hz Vertical e Log scale w dE fan Top 20 Bottom Phaze Separate 180 Top 180 Bottom Check all Uncheck all Apply Close e Show legend Select to show Legend window Also use Legend button E on the Toolbar or context menu command e Show data points Select to mark calculated data points of all traces as small squares e Show numbers Select to show scale numbers Horizontal Set up horizontal scale and gridlines e Log scale Select for logarithmic frequency scale e Left Frequency at the left edge of the screen e Right Frequency at the right edge of the screen Vertical Set up vertical scale and gridlines Log scale Select for logarithmic magnitude scale dB Select to show vertical scale in decibels Top Magnitude at the top of the screen Bottom Magnitude at the bottom of the screen Phase Select phase display mode e Of
158. d phase Mag Magnitude only absolute value Phase Phase only Re Real part Can be used to display R of Z trace Im Imaginary part Can be used to display X of Z trace O O OU O O e Phase width Width of the phase trace line in pixels e Width Width of the trace line in pixels Select one or more traces in the Trace list change parameters and press Enter or click Apply button If selected traces have different values for some parameter the corresponding field will be left blank Leave the field blank to keep individual values unchanged or enter a new value to apply it to all selected traces To display both Re and Im of the trace add this trace into trace list twice then select Re for one trace and Im for another trace 230 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Performing simulation Use Menu commands Toolbar buttons or hotkeys to perform AC simulation e Start AC AC Start or F9 When AC simulation starts the AC Window opens up and the frequency range and scale log lin of the screen 1s set to the values specified in the AC Settings dialog box While simulation is running results are immediately displayed in the AC Window and a progress bar 1s shown in the status bar of the window E Stop AC While AC simulation is running this is the only button available e AC Log AC I Log Log information shown in the dialog box may be useful for troubleshooting The last log is saved into schematic file W
159. d properties These settings apply to Transient wndow AC window and most of Transient and AC tools x Mouse z Preferences Application Document Mouse wheel action Schematic E as Hor zoom 3 Mouse Ctrl Hor crol pue Components a Symbols Shift Ver crol ds Warnings Chrl S hift Ver 200 Graphs Invert Zoom Cancel Apply Mouse wheel action Select action to be performed on mouse wheel rotation along with Ctrl and or Shift key state e no key held just mouse wheel rotation no key held e Ctrl mouse wheel rotation and Ctrl key held e Shift mouse wheel rotation and Shift key held e Ctrl Shift mouse wheel rotation and Ctrl and Shift keys held Select action from o None Zoom both horizontal and vertical Hor zoom Vert zoom Hor scroll Vert scroll O Oo O 0 e Invert Zoom invert Zoom In Out operation 52 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Transient User s Manual Set transient simulation and memory options x Transient von Preferences Application Document achematic Drawings Suppress flickering if graph updates in less than ms If this option is selected the graph is not being erased when transient reaches the end of the screen Transient calculation continues in the background and graph is being updated when a new data for the whole screen is available J Suppress flickering if graph
160. d symbols however it is recommended to use letters and numbers only and have the name started with a letter In this case if the name is used in formula or function there is no need to enclose it in quotes The name is case insensitive If the variable has been renamed its name will be automatically modified in all appearances of the variable in trace names formulas and functions e Add variable trace Click to add transient trace of selected variable Editing variable e Enter numerical value 10k e Enter expression and press Enter The expression will be evaluated and replaced with numerical value Enter 41 2 impedance gt power E e Enter formula and press Enter The formula will be evaluated and its current numerical value will be displayed Click button to view edit formula power 1 2 Ampedarncel Enter power Click ic 134 ie NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Sheets Schematic may contain several sheets Electrical connection between schematic sheets can be done through labels and functions In the following example Clock sheet consists of pulse generator and Main sheet consists of main schematic Labels clock and gate provide electrical connection between sheets Shift Cil Click t Existing sheets are shown at Sheet selection area of Schemat
161. delayed by one calculation step 453 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Schmitt trigger Y Y_SchmittTrigger_Delay nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Del ay Hysteresis V Hysteresis Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High Schmitt trigger with delay Output type inverted or non inverted depends on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button Output is set to Low or High level following rules inverted output Vin gt Threshold Hysteresis 2 V Low Vin lt Threshold Hysteresis 2 V High Otherwise V previous state Trigger outputs are delayed by Delay time Output pulses with duration shorter than Delay will not show up When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC 454 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Logic generator V a Pulse o af Step J an List j File T Y Logic generator Y Y_LogicGenerator_V nl5 Model Parameter Units Description V Out Logical output Low High Logical output Generates constant Low or High logical output To see and set logical levels go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button Y Logic generator Y Y_LogicGenerator_Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Period S Period Width S Pulse wi
162. demark of Borland Corporation Built with Indy www indyproject com BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Table of Contents EOI Sido os 1 Installand Run NES A ias 11 MSN ad 11 NESST PES alta aaa os 12 A e E O A A E 13 Create and Simulate Your First Schematic oooooooocoocconoconocconocnnoccnnccnnoccnoccnnoccnoccnncccnoccnncccnoccnnoconos 14 NN AAPP A sie eascadaveousseatedt E AETA EE ETETE 14 Editicomponent parameter nar dado iodo arena 15 Transient seting ia sats A aueadets 16 UE Te HENS o Cl ACA AA o sees se sees eres tesla ates esate see clea A A 17 FRU EAN ii NA Es 18 O O 19 GA A 20 AN 21 NES CICCIO iaa nie 22 Sin le PECAR ret gn tii canal 22 Portable LIEN eonen NEE A E 22 Network LICIS erona O OA 22 Personal COTS Coa a T E AE 22 Graphical User Interia Cenina eaaa e eE e oe A EEEE aa iaai 25 Matt WAON eea ci tthe A E A E E E A 23 MAMI SOU A A AAA AA 26 Mam OOD ean a tt noia 29 AUS DA A mR 29 SCICCHOM Bai AIN A 30 TNA AU LO DE ion 30 Document W 1G OW Sui A a 32 OUNCE WING OWS nica iaa 33 Dialos DOK CS ens a a em nines 33 A tom aed E E e en eae 33 HORSE Sar rc decease eee eA 34 CLOT CIN acia 35 PPT ORO E Sicilia 36 A A ER NT Pe ne ne ee 37 Dosis E EOE 38 na A e E RE O 39 DEAN ita 41 Na a A II A etaase teats 42 COMPOncI Sacred edad dae 43 O 44 Wa RR 45 A ON 46 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual WADE OO 4 EST is 49 AMO A 50 BLU OTE AEA EEE RRA E 51 MOI Graphs kerna reali ts fon a tina
163. dth Delay S Delay before first pulse starts Active Active output state Low High Logical pulses Pulses start at Delay time Output level is Active during Width time To see and set logical levels go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button The following pulses will be generated if Active On High Loy Delay t wicth Period 455 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Y Logic generator Y Y_LogicGenerator_Step nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Step Delay S Delay before active state Active Active output state Low High Logical step Output level is non Active before Delay time turns to Active level after Delay time To see and set logical levels go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button Logic generator Y Y _LogicGenerator_List nl5 Model Parameter Units Description List List Comma separated string Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Logic list Logical output sequence is defined in the List parameter in the csv comma separated values format as follows t0 s0 t1 s1 tin sn where all t and s can be numerical values or expressions sO sn defines output logical level positive number corresponds to High zero or negative number Low If t lt t0 output level is s0 At tO output level is sO At t1 output level is s1 and so on At t gt tn output remains at sn leve
164. e if the name is used in formula or function there is no need to enclose it in quotes The name is case insensitive If the component has been renamed its name will be automatically modified in all appearances of the component name in trace names formulas and functions Set a group Click to set a group for selected component Group dialog box will show up CT xl Enter new group name or select existing group from drop down list Groun Cancel Enter group name or select existing group from drop down list and click OK Click Groups button to open Groups dialog box for advanced groups management To remove existing group ungroup component open Group dialog box erase group name and click OK See Groups chapter for details Add transient voltage trace Click to add transient voltage trace for selected component Add transient current trace Click to add transient current trace for selected component Add transient power trace Click to add transient power trace for selected component Add AC voltage trace Click to add AC voltage trace for selected component Add AC current trace Click to add AC current trace for selected component Set AC source Click to set selected component as an AC source for AC analysis Find component Click to show selected component on the schematic The component will be selected highlighted and centered on the screen 128 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual y gt e Open s
165. e 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output voltage IC If clock pin exists F s is ignored and transfer function of the model is zero 319 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Current source Pulse Step M I Sin PWL Function File Trace SubCir P Vel Models Traces I Current source I I CS_I nl5 Model Parameter Units Description A Current Constant current source Current T 320 BJ NL5 circuit simulator I Current source Model Parameter 11 lO Period Width Slope Rise Fall Delay Pulse Units A A S S n User s Manual I I_ CS Pulse nl5 Description Pulse On current Pulse Off current Period Pulse width Slope type Linear Cos Exp Pulse rise length Pulse fall length Delay before first pulse starts Pulse current source Pulses start after Delay time Rise time is included into Width Fall time is not included into Width Almost every parameter can be set to zero and infinity inf otherwise the error message will be displayed Delay Rise Mich maa a m Fall t Slope type applies both to pulse rise and fall The following slope types are available gt gt r Rise t Rise t Rise t Linear Cos cosine Exp exponenti
166. e consists of symbols other than numbers and letters 1t should be enclosed in quotes The data and names can be comma space or Tab separated For example HzZ Vv Cl phese Vv RL Lp yh yD NS 10 8 40 4 AS When file is loaded its contents will be displayed in the Import Traces dialog box for lolx verification e Data in dB 226 BJ NL5 circuit simulator nay User s Manual Check Data in dB checkbox if magnitude of the traces is in dB o Skip lines If selected specified number of lines in the beginning of the file will be skipped Otherwise only empty lines and comment lines started with will be skipped automatically o Insert header line If selected the header line time tracel trace2 will be added Otherwise a first line after skipped of the file will be used as a header Click OK to confirm import New traces will be created and shown on the graph Save selected traces into nlf data file Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be saved into the file View Export selected traces Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be viewed and exported into text or csv file View Export dialog box will show up x 179941 2006013 P Interval 1 93419 299011 ez oe 1 86897 29 741 hom 1 056938 3 1 90375 29 5808 1 07662e 3 1 93853 29 4207 500 Paints 1 09668e 3 1 97331 29 2606 og o 11171123 5 201134
167. e list performs the same operation Rename trace Only one trace should be selected Only Z Gamma VSWR traces and traces loaded from data file imported from text file or pasted from clipboard can be renamed Renaming the trace of Function type changes the function Rename dialog box will show up Renametracez ed Enter new name Cancel Enter new trace name and click OK Move selected traces up This operation changes the order of traces in the list on the graph and in the data table Move selected traces down This operation changes the order of traces in the list on the graph and in the data table Find component If selected trace is V I Z Gamma or VSWR click to show the component on the schematic The component will be selected highlighted and centered on the screen 228 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Traces User s Manual Traces page of AC Data window is used to add traces and set up individual trace scales and width B nli AC Data BE X i e e F Check to display on the graph 3 hd 2 Traces Screen Table Storage Add new trac Trace A Wag Phase bl Display fi Phage width fi width Check all Uncheck all Apply Close Add new trace Select trace type in the left list Z impedance Gamma reflection coefficient VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Function arbitrary function If V or I trace is selected the right
168. e of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 355 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Voltage controlled O i PWL I amplifier qx E f Vin j a y 3 Ve gt E P Vel 3 a L tL O Voltage controlled amplifier O O_VCA_PWL nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string K Vc Piece wise linear voltage controlled amplifier At any moment the amplifier is a linear amplifier Its gain K is a function of control voltage V K Vo Vin owl string defines gain K as a function of control voltage Vc See Working with PWL model chapter for details 356 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Current controlled PWL l amplifier Vin 3 f V E E Ic P Vel E gt O Current controlled amplifier O O_ CCA _PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string K Ic Piece wise linear current controlled amplifier At any moment the amplifier is a linear amplifier lts gain K is a function of control current V K lc Vin pwl string defines gain K as a function of control current Ic See Working with PWL model chapter for more details 357 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s
169. e on the schematic Image o Copy to clipboard Copy schematic image to the clipboard BhP O Save as BMP Save schematic image in a file in BMP format JE o Save as JPG Save schematic image in a file in JPG format Transient ORFS ma 43 O Settings Open Transient Settings dialog box Data Show Transient Data window Start F6 Start transient Pause Space Pause transient Continue F7 Space Continue transient Stop Stop transient Log Show transient log Sweep Run series of transients transient while changing component parameter or variable Save IC Save current states of all components into their initial conditions IC Tools o DC sweep o XY diagram o Amplitude histogram o Histogram o FFT EH o Eye diagram Hl o Markers P o Power o Line snapshot 27 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual AC Bi L 4 Tools ir amp E 0 Settings Open AC Settings dialog box Data Show AC Data window Start F9 Start AC analysis Log Show AC log Sweep Run series of AC analysis while changing component parameter or variable Tools o Histogram o Smith chart o Nyquist plot o Nichols plot Hil o Markers Script Open save edit and run script Console Execute commands in the command line Sweep Perform transient and or AC sweep Optimization Perform transient and or AC optimization manually iterating schematic parameters HTTP link Confi
170. e same input impedance has changed as requested 143 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Properties Select File Properties command Properties dialog box will show up rro O S Summary Statistics Parts list Save Title Notte FAevisiory ho o Project Unknown Author JUnkmown Organization A Created 394152006 12245 AM Modified 10322008 11 44 47 PM Location C 4Projects nl5 re nl5 Comments Summary page shows general document and file information Fields Author and Organization of a new schematic are set to the values specified on the Document page of Preferences dialog box Most of the fields can be edited Statistics page shows schematic statistics information Parts list page shows components list in short or detailed format Click Copy to clipboard button to copy parts list to the clipboard 144 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Save page consists of document saving options rc Properties e Save with transient data Select this option to save schematic with all existing transient data traces e Save with AC data Select this option to save schematic with all existing AC data traces e Save with script Select this option to save schematic with current script 145 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual IV Transient Analysis 146 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual The following simplified diagram explains transient simulation process
171. e same trace point click on the annotation text and drag To move the pointer click on the end of the pointer and drag The pointer will change time yet following trace amplitude Annotation text will move with the pointer To delete annotation right click on the annotation and select Delete annotation command from context menu To delete all annotations right click on the graph select Annotate then select Delete all command e 176 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Storage The results of the last simulation run are always shown in the Run tab of the Transient Window Last run data can be moved into storage under the name Last so that 1t can be compared with other simulation runs Each storage data has a tab on the Data selection area assigned to 1t Storage data can be selected by clicking on the tab Storage data belongs to the trace so that 1f trace 1s deleted storage data for this trace will be deleted as well To access storage related commands right click on the graph or Data selection area then select command from context menu List of available storage data storage related commands and storage display selection can be found on Storage page of Transient Data window xi S e Hp Se X mess Traces Screen Table Storage E Check to allow storage Jw Store last Run Display storage C Selected only C Selected and dimmed Check all Uncheck all Apply Close e Move Run to storage
172. e trace fits current screen Select one or more traces in the Trace list change parameters and press Enter or click Apply button If selected traces have different values for some parameter the corresponding field will be left blank Leave the field blank to keep individual values unchanged or enter a new value to apply it to all selected traces 165 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Performing simulation Use Menu commands Toolbar buttons or hotkeys to perform transient simulation gt e Start transient Transient Start or F6 When transient starts the Transient Window opens up and the time range of the screen is set to the values specified in the Transient Settings dialog box Start is left edge of the screen Screen is size of the screen Although simulation always starts at t 0 the results will be displayed on the graph only from Start time Depending on Save data before Start checkbox state the simulation data prior to Start can be ignored or saved into the memory to be available for display later e Pause transient Transient Pause or Space e Continue transient Transient Continue or F7 or Space X e Stop transient Transient Stop When transient stopped the memory allocated by some components is being released so the transient cannot be continued and should be started again from the beginning However all the data traces obtained during transient are still available for display EH
173. e used for example for debugging purposes they can be displayed on the graph as a trace without using output pins of the component Component variables can be changed by NLS from the script or command line when simulation is paused Also values of component variables are saved as initial conditions in the IC parameter of the component 124 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Create component variables by adding their names into the Var tab in the Edit Component dialog box see Editing customized component X Code chapter The size of the data array should be lt number of inputs gt lt number of outputs gt lt number of variables gt When calling DLL functions corresponding elements of the array following output values are filled in with current values of component variables DLL can modify component variables by assigning new values to corresponding elements of the array For example if variable counter 1s a component variable in the previous example it can be modified by NES using following natation component name counter 0 DLL in turn can modify value Of counter as data 5 counter Variable counter can be displayed on the graph as a trace of Function type using the following notation Component name Counter DLL functions DLL functions should be declared as follows extern C declspec dllexp ort Int NAME double ty double data where NAME function name for instance
174. editing a component This component may have arbitrary size up to 32 width X 32 height up to 32 inputs on the left side One output on the right side Y Custom logic Y Y_CustomLogic_Logic nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Logic IC Initial condition Low High Custom logical component Logic function AND OR XOR and output type inverted or non inverted depend on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step 448 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Custom logic Y Y_CustomLogic_Delay nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Del ay Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High Custom logical component with delay Logic function AND OR XOR and output type inverted or non inverted depend on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button The out
175. eft value at the left edge of the screen or left cursor V R1 right value at the right edge of the screen or right cursor V R1 delta V R1 right V R1 left V R1 min minimum V R1 max maximum V R1 pp peak to peak max min V R1 mean mean V R1 rms RMS V R1 acrms RMS of the signal with subtracted mean value AC magnitude Aa retis2 value at f 1 2 V R1 left value at the left edge of the screen or left cursor V R1 right value at the right edge of the screen or right cursor V R1 delta V R1 right V R1 1left V R1 min Minimum V R1 max maximum V R1 pp peak to peak max min V R1 slope slope of the gain dB dec AC phase V R1 phase 1 2 value at f 1 2 V R1 phase left value at the left edge of the screen or left cursor V R1 phase right value at the right edge of the screen or right cursor V R1 phase delta V R1 right V R1 left V R1 phase min minimum V R1 phase max maximum V R1 phase pp peak to peak max min 61 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Operators NES supports the following arithmetic and logical operators is i lt lt gt amp l lt lt gt gt l ES 2 f amp lt lt gt gt and type casting operators bool int int64 float double complex See full operators list with description in the Attachment 2
176. el is used to represent non linear characteristic of the component with piece wise linear approximation and to describe a characteristic of voltage or current controlled components For non linear components model parameter pwl is a step like function describing differential value of the parameter as a function of voltage across the component or current through the component For instance pwl parameter for non linear resistor specifies differential resistance as a function of voltage across the resistor Resulting piece wise linear Volt Ampere characteristic of a resistor 1s calculated automatically Similarly pwl parameter for non linear capacitor specifies differential capacitance as a function of voltage across the capacitor resulting piece wise linear Volt Coulomb characteristic is calculated automatically The following table shows step like parameter and corresponding piece wise linear characteristic for non linear components available in NLS K V V V Voltage controlled voltage source operational amplifiers KO VD Current controlled voltage source K V I V Voltage controlled current source KD ID Current controlled current source For voltage or current controlled components pwl 1s a step like function describing absolute value of the parameter as a function of external control voltage Vin or current Jin For instance pwl parameter for voltage controlled resistor specifies absolute
177. elect Loop or List sweep type on the bottom tab For Loop sweep enter the following parameters From Start parameter s value To End parameter s value Step type o Step Parameter is incremented or decremented by Step value o Step Parameter is changed by specified percentage o Step X Parameter is multiplied by specified value Steps field shows total number of steps to be performed For List sweep enter the following parameters List of parameter values in the text field one value per line 4 a W oe Xv ae Ey E Script fal Console E Sweep Optimization A A Name e Transient y AC a e Clear storage z 212 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Click Run script button to run sweep Analysis results will be saved into storage Only traces with enabled storage will be saved Script page contains text of the script that was executed and Console page contains log of the script execution cH oR x OR Xx Script e Console E Script E Console Bi R 1 SEAN Script started store Ri F Ri R i i Dm tran OK eae store R1 R OK store Risks Re R1 R 3 tran OE CERN store R1 R OK store E1 E Sweep results in the storage Script text Execution log Transient Sweep amp and AC I Sweep amp commands open Sweep page with Transient or AC checkboxes selected respectively 273 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Optimization Optimizat
178. elected cursor to the nearest left frequency with unity gain magnitude 1 of selected trace 237 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Text To add text on the graph right click on the graph and select Insert Text command from the context menu Text dialog box will show up e Outline e Arow 4 Pointer Lock pointer fi le Line width MA i _ Background a Enter text in the text box The text will be simultaneously shown on the graph Enter text The text can be formatted using toolbar buttons and controls Alignment Set alignment of multi line text e Align left e Center e Align right Orientation Change orientation of the text e Rotate left 3 e Rotate right Font Change size of the font or select specific font type and options A Larger font 238 E NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual a e Smaller font 4 e Select font Outline and pointer options Outline gt Outline Draw outline rectangle Pointer Draw pointer line from the text to specified point Arrow Draw pointer line with arrow ase eee een Lock pointer Lock the end of the pointer the end of the Aow pointer will not move even when text is being moved Pointer so e Line width Specify line width of the outline and pointer e Color Double click on the item in the list to change the color If graph is zoomed or scrolled the text stays at the same place
179. ences dialog box Properties specific to the document schematic can also be set up in the Transient Data window Graph area and its components are shown below Cursors Text Gridlines This is text Annotation Traces 169 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Graph Graph navigation can be performed by commands available in the transient context menus transient toolbar buttons shortcuts keyboard keys and mouse Very often the same operation can be performed by different ways For instance zooming graph in out can be done using keyboard keys only mouse only or both It is user s choice to select the most effective and convenient one There are 3 graph operation modes Iz e Cursors Moving cursors lg e Zoom Zooming graph using mouse Moe Scrolling Scrolling the graph The mode can be selected by clicking button on the transient toolbar Also there are quick ways to switch temporary from Cursors mode to Zoom and Scrolling modes Ctrl down e Press and hold Ctrl click and drag mouse to zoom the graph bs 7 n i Release Ctrl to return to Cursors mode Wie Ctrl up Shift down e Press and hold Shift click and drag mouse to scroll the graph x OO Release Shift to return to Cursors mode bas E y Shift up Traces are shown on the graph with their individual scales width and colors defined on Traces page of Transient Data window When graph zooming 1s performed 1t does not change scales of individual trac
180. ent Leave blank if IC1 not defined IC2 A L2 initial condition current Leave blank if IC2 not defined Coupled linear inductors V1 L1 dl1 dt M dl2 dt V2 M dl1 dt L2 dl2 dt Where M K sgrt L1 L2 is mutual inductance When calculating DC operating point initial conditions IC1 and IC2 are independently applied to corresponding inductors L1 and L2 similar to how it is done for the component L inductor 339 4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Custom coupled L inductors L 2 SubCir 13 amp This is a customized component A component can be edited in the Edit Component dialog box See Editing customized component chapter for instructions on editing a component This component may have height from 2 to 32 up to 9 windings total on both sides arbitrary length of a winding Examples of Custom coupled inductors component 340 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual L Custom coupled inductors L L CustomCoupledinductors_L nI5 Model Parameter Units Description L L1 H L1 inductance e H er LN H LN inductance K12 L1 L2 coupling coefficient 1 1 K N 1 N L N 1 LN coupling coefficient 1 1 IC1 A L1 initial condition current Leave blank if IC1 not defined ee A om ICN A LN initial condition current Leave blank if ICN not defined Custom coupled inductors V1 L1 d11 dt M12 d12 dt M1N dIN dt V2 M12 d11 dt L2 d12 dt M2N dIN dt VN M1N dI1 dt M2N dl2 dt
181. er from drop down Printer selection list Click Setup button for printer setup e Select windows to be printed in the Window selection list The list contains Title Comments and windows of active document available for printing opened Schematic Transient Transient Tools AC AC tools O O O Select checkboxes of windows to be printed Please note if Schematic Transient or AC window is maximized then only that window is available for printing In this situation warning message will be displayed below selection list e Select window name in the list and format window in the Formatting area e Edit windows layout in the Preview area Click on the window image to select window Click on the window image and drag to move window on the sheet e Press Print button to print or Cancel button to close dialog box 55 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Format and layout In the typical print layout Title is displayed on the top of the sheet and Title Comments on the bottom However they can be moved anywhere on the sheet One or more Windows can be displayed anywhere on the sheet window size 1s adjustable in the Window format section Each window may have individual Header and Footer Header is one line Window header text and it is formatted in the Header section Footer may have many q lines and it is formatted in the Footer section The following format buttons are available Window Footer
182. eration The following mouse operation can be used to edit schematic e Click left button o On empty space unselect all place cursor o On selected block place cursor o On element select element o Wire mode place cursor e Ctrl click Same as click but do not unselect add to selection e Right click Same as click plus open context menu e Double click o On the component or label select and switch to Components Window o On the line rectangle or oval format element o On empty space set cursor and center the screen e Click and drag o On empty space select block o On attribute move attribute o On selection move selection o Wire mode draw wire e Ctrl click and drug o On empty space add block to selection o On selection copy selection o Wire mode draw diagonal wire e Shift click and drug o On empty space scroll schematic o On selection move selection with rubber bands e Ctrl Shift click and drug o On selection copy selection with rubber bands e Mouse wheel Zoom in zoom out Schematic is zoomed relative to mouse pointer position e Ctrl mouse wheel Scroll horizontally e Shift mouse wheel Scroll vertically 96 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Components and models NLS supports over 70 component types Each component type has a designated letter symbol and models Letter identifies functional group of a component For instance all component types with letter
183. es Instead 1t changes screen Multiplier and Offset parameters which are applied to all traces Scale of selected trace 1s shown on the graph If trace selection changes scale numbers and gridlines position may change too Gridlines spacing 1s selected automatically so that last significant digit step is 1 2 or 5 and distance between gridlines is approximately equal to the value specified on Graphs page of Preferences dialog box as Gridlines interval in pixels Scales gridlines and some other options of the graph can be changed on Screen page of Transient Data window 170 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual x Suda Sav X Hess Ig Check to display on the grapt Traces Screen Table Storage e Show legend Show data paints e Show numbers Separate traces Horizontal fo Start 20 Screen e Show gridlines Vertical fi Multiplier fo Offset te Heset W Show grdlines Check all Uncheck all Show all scales Apply Close e Show legend Select to show Legend window Also use Legend button E on the Toolbar or context menu command e Show data points Select to mark calculated data points of all traces as small squares This option may be useful for troubleshooting and calculation step selection e Show numbers Select to show scale numbers e Separate traces Also use Separate traces toolbar button or press Tab in the Transient Window Traces will be separated
184. es a large amount of memory so that it is close to 2GB the program operation may become extremely slow NL5 continuously tracks amount of memory used and automatically starts truncating traces data when needed in order to prevent from slowing operation down If multiple documents are being simulated the total amount of memory used by all documents cannot exceed 2GB If amount of available operating memory allows 1t might be beneficial running several copies of NL5 application and simulate only one document in one instance rather than simulating several documents in one NL5 instance 153 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Transient Settings Click Transient settings toolbar button T or select Transient Settings command Transient Settings dialog box will show up Transient Settings x Interval and step jo Sharks Use current screen fi O Screen fi e 3 Calculabion step s Data sampling step Same as calculation save all data C Less than or equal to 1e3 Equal to Options Run until W Save data before Start Advanced Cancel Interval and step When simulation starts the transient window time range is automatically set to specified interval Start and Screen e Start s Left edge of the transient window e Screen s Transient window size e Calculation step s Maximum calculation step Actual step can be reduced by the algorithm as needed e Use current s
185. es are selected all fields except Schematic Line width and Wire color will be disabled If selected elements have different value of the same property corresponding field will be enabled but left blank Leave 1t blank to keep individual values unchanged otherwise they will be set to the same value e Show selection in normal colors When Format dialog box opens all selected elements have the same selected color Select this checkbox to see all elements in their normal color Schematic e Line width Line width of all selected schematic elements wires components labels and grounds A e Font size Font size of component attributes e Color Double click on the item in the list to change the color e Reset to default Click the button to reset custom properties back to default Drawings e Line width Line width of all selected drawings lines rectangles ovals and texts e Style Line style for line rectangle and oval e Arrows Arrows control for lines gt IT Text alignment Alignment of multi line text i cr m Select font Select font of the text i e Color Double click on the item in the list to change the color e OK Accept changes and close the dialog box e Cancel Ignore last changes and close the dialog box e Apply Accept changes without closing the dialog box Undo and Redo To undo schematic and component parameters changes click Ctrl Z or click Undo button To reverse undo ope
186. esh graphs This operation also sorts out data points to be in ascending order and place each time value pair on separate line List tab Provides pwl parameter data in the text form for editing Simply enter time value pairs in arbitrary format Click Refresh button to sort it out and display on the graph Settings tab Use this tab to configure the graph e Show gridlinez e Show numbers 112 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Working with List model List model describes switching sequence of the Switch component and logical signal of the Logic Generator component List parameter of the model defines time value pairs in the following format Tlepelg tego aie IN eN where Ti Si pair defines state of the signal at specified time e Positive value corresponds to On state of the switch or High state of the logical generator e Zero or negative value corresponds to Off state of the switch or Low state of the logical generator Signal state before T1 is s1 signal state after TN is SN Values T1 TN should be given in ascending order Although the signal is defined on the interval T1 TN it can be repeated continuously or delayed by setting component parameters Delay and Cycle List parameter can be easily edited in the List dialog box Click E button right to the List parameter to open dialog box Toolbar PWL graph gt PWL data
187. esistance is changing during Ramp time interval with number of steps specified by Steps parameter If Steps 0 resistance is changed instantly Slope parameter specifies how resistance is changing during he ramp The following slope types are available Steps 6 Rott Rott _ gt lc Rott Ron Ron q lg Ron P A E e Ramp i Ramp t Ramp t Linear Cos Log To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state specified in IC S Logic controlled switch S S_LCS SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pint Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Pin4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 367 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S Views Voltage controlled switch LA S Voltage controlled switch Model Switch Parameter Units Threshold V Hysteresis V Active IC User s Manual Switch Pulse A N SubCir E E P Vel S S_VCS_Switch nl5 Description Voltage threshold Hysteresis Active state Off On Initial condition Off On Voltage
188. ettings dialog box 251 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual a 2 lc _Line_AC AC Histogram xj Tne 20 Bottom f Histogram Line e Show vertical gridlines Jw Show names Close o Y values Select variables to be displayed on Y axis Active is currently selected cursor left or right Other values are similar to what is displayed in the AC Data Table o X Select histogram mode what is shown on X axis Traces Show cross section of all traces currently displayed on the graph Storage Show cross section of the storage for all traces currently displayed on the graph o Type Select histogram type for Storage mode Histogram Line o Y scale By default histogram Y scale is the same as AC screen vertical scale Uncheck Use AC scale checkbox to enter Y scale Top and Bottom o Show vertical gridlines Check to show vertical gridlines dividing histogram data o Show names Check to show trace or storage names on the X axis Use AC scale Vertical Zoom in Vertical Zoom out Fit the screen vertical Right click on the window to access relevant commands Double click on the window to open Settings dialog box Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in AC Window 232 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Traces mode or traces cross section can be used to display spatial distribution of
189. exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x y is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output voltage IC 311 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function 2 F F_Function 2_Mul nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Mul K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage Eas ED 7 Multiplication V K Vx Vy When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop F Function 2 F F_Function 2_Div nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Div K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage Pe a Division V K Vx Vy lf Vy 0 V 0 When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop F Function 2 F F_Function 2_Sum nI5 Model Parameter Units Description Sum K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage Va Addition V K Vx Vy When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When
190. f Do not show phase e On Show magnitude and phase in the same area of the graph e Separate Show magnitude and phase in separate areas of the graph 235 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o de 20 de Phase Off Phase On Separate Press Tab in the AC Window to toggle Phase display mode e Top Phase at the top of the screen e Bottom Phase at the bottom of the screen Legend Legend window contains list of traces shown on the graph e To show hide legend click Legend button on the Toolbar or context menu or use Show legend checkbox in the Screen page of AC Data window e Click on the trace to select the trace Selected trace will be shown on top of all traces e Double click on the trace to select trace and to open AC Data window e Right click to select trace and open context menu The menu will contain some common commands and commands related to selected trace e Click on the gray header bar of the legend and drag to move the window e Legend font size can be selected on the Legend page of Preferences 236 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Cursors Cursors are used mostly for selecting frequency interval on the graph for data table calculations Selected active cursor 1s shown with solid colored square on the top To show hide enable disable cursors click Show hide cursors Toolbar button 4F Select Cursors mode l to work with cursors on the graph Double clic
191. f the same type will be displayed in the list ab e Rename selected group Rename group dialog will show up Rename Groupl x Enter new name Groupi Cancel Enter new group name and click OK e Remove selected group Components will not be removed 7 e Delete all groups Components will not be removed 138 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Check Schematic Check Schematic command performs schematic check for potential problems and component parameters check for errors To check schematic e Select menu command Schematic Check or e Click Check schematic toolbar button e Check Schematic is automatically performed at Transient and AC analysis start Typical view of Check Schematic window and its main components are shown below VIA Overlapping components if Warnings 9 Ya Not connected Y R1 Overlapping component and wre J D4 Floating pin oe bD Wdeo Right click Ove Period lt 0 A Close window af Check A Preferences e Messages with warning icon notify about potential problems in the schematic and do not prevent from running Transient and AC analysis Click on the message line to see problematic schematic elements they will be selected and centered on the screen The following potential problems of the schematic are currently detected o Floating pins One or more pins of the component are not connected to another component wire or ground o Non c
192. ferences dialog box Properties of any element can be customized by formatting Changing default properties of schematic elements applies to all existing elements on the schematic except elements with custom properties Changing default properties of drawings does not affect existing drawings 73 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Editing schematic Schematic editing and navigation can be performed by commands available in the Main Menu schematic context menus Main Toolbar Schematic toolbar shortcuts keyboard keys and mouse NL5 supports many commands and shortcuts that are commonly used in Windows applications such as Edit Copy Ctrl C Edit Paste Ctrl V and more using of Ctrl key with mouse for select copy operation using window scrollbars etc Other commands are very intuitive so that 1t would not take long to start working with schematic Very often the same operation can be performed by different ways For instance selecting and placing new component on the schematic can be done using keyboard keys only mouse only or both It is user s choice to select the most effective and convenient one A complete commands list is provided There are 6 schematic editing modes ls e Selection Select elements blocks place components e Wire Draw wire place components Me Scrolling Scroll schematic e Line Draw line _ e Rectangle Draw rectangle and square D e Orval Draw oval and circle The edit
193. fields contain current values of specified parameters To update fields click Clean up and update button 274 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Step fields specify how the value will change when Plus or Minus button is clicked If Step is a number the number will be added to current value If Step is a number with character at the end the value will be changed by specified percentage e Plus Minus buttons When clicked the value will be modified by specified step If Run on click option 1s selected specified analysis will be immediately performed as well There are two modes of optimization 1 Changing parameters and then running transient and or AC analysis 2 Changing parameter while transient analysis is running In the first mode user changes one or more parameters then starts transient or AC analysis Parameters can be changed again only when analysis is completed or paused At the top of the window you can see the prompt message and options that can be selected Select Transient or and AC option Run on click Change Value or click 2 button then D Run on click click Run script button to run transient fy Transient Change Value and press Enter or click J Run on click button to run transient e Transient eae e Run on click If selected specified analysis will be started immediately when Plus or Minus button of any parameter is clicked or when Enter key is pressed at the Value field O
194. file name manually or click 2 button and select file name in the dialog box File extension n15 can be omitted Generally a full path to the file can be used For example C Program files NL5 Projects Modulator clock gen nls5 However 1f subcircuit file is located in the same directory as a main schematic file or in the directory defined as Subcircuit Library on the Application page of Preferences dialog box only short file name without path can be used clock gen The short name is displayed on the schematic It is recommended to keep subcircuit files in the same directory as a main schematic file or in the Subcircuit Library since it allows using short names only and makes the project portable Parameters Pin1 PinN are used to assign component pins to the labels 5 defined in the subcircuit If no label name entered for a pin the pin number in y r 1 base k drain parentheses is displayed on the component image When label name is defined it is displayed on the component image Any of PinN parameters can be empty 1 e not assigned to the label 2 SOUFCe Cmd is a command string applied to subcircuit schematic when subcircuit is loaded from the file The 66 99 string consists of commands in name value format separated by semicolon This allows using the same subcircuit file with modified values for different components For example Ril l1
195. file names of different types can be used as parameters For example gt n15 exe rc nl5 download schematic rc n15 gt n15 exe tran nlt download transient data from tran nlt gt n15 exe rc nl5 pref nlp download schematic rc n15 and preferences from pref nlp File with txt extension being used as a parameter in the command line is considered to be a script Script will be executed immediately For example Snl5 sexe Sseript txe download and run script from script txt 13 aa NLS circuit simulator User s Manual Create and Simulate Your First Schematic Enter schematic Entering and editing can be done using keyboard keys mouse or both Here are step by step instructions how to enter simple schematic using keyboard When NLS opens an empty schematic is created A red cursor is located in the middle of the screen and is pointing to the right Press Space to switch to drawing mode Press Arrow Down several times to draw short wire downward Press V key and then press Enter to place a voltage source Press G key to place a ground Now cursor is switched back to selection mode Press Arrow Up several times to move cursor back to the starting point Press Arrow Right to change direction then press Space to switch to drawing mode Press Arrow Right several times to draw a short horizontal wire Press R key and then press Enter to place a resistor Press Arrow Right several times again then press Arrow Down
196. fined by the string Ley kp 2 pO po Non symmetrical function defined in the whole range from minus to plus infinity For non symmetrical function voltages V1 vN in the pwl string can be negative and positive however one of the voltages must be zero Zero voltage is indicator of non symmetrical characteristic The following R V and I V graphs represent parameter and PWL characteristic defined by the string a po Ll o yo pwl parameter can be easily edited in the PWL dialog box Click El button right to the pwl parameter to open dialog box pul eee J gt 106 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Typical view of PWL dialog box and 1ts main components are shown below x Toolbar celle XA PWL characteristic Am PWL parameter o rom 2003 400e 3 600e 3 1 851489352047 a00e 3 8003 2 42683676578 1 outs 30456595745 inf EE EM fi Y OF Lancel Upper pane of the window contains graphs of step like function of pwl parameter and resulting PWL characteristic if available for this type of a component Lower pane contains 4 tabs for entering data and configuration 1 019680446707 1 141 06826231 400e 3 a eiia a PWL data A Selected row ____ Tab selection e Move cursor over splitter area then press left mouse button and drag to resize panes e Right click on the graphs area to see context menu
197. format Jg o Save as JPG Save image of schematic window to a file in jpg format e Cut Ctrl X Cut selection copy to clipboard and delete e Copy Ctrl C Copy selection to clipboard Ge Paste Ctrl V Paste from clipboard 7 e Delete Del Delete selection w e Undo edit Ctrl Z Undo schematic and component parameters change ca e Redo edit Ctrl Y Reverse undo e Select All Ctrl A Select all schematic elements e Select Net Select element and all wires connected to the element either directly or through labels including other sheets e Format Format selected elements A e Preferences Open Preferences dialog box EE e Help F1 Press F1 to get help on schematic To get Help on component select the component and press F1 Toolbar and context menu ls e Selection Switch to Selection mode e Draw wire Switch to Wire mode Me Scrolling Switch to Scrolling mode 93 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Draw line Switch to Line mode Draw rectangle Switch to Rectangle mode Draw oval Switch to Oval mode Insert text Enter and place text on the schematic Insert variables Place list of variables on the schematic Zoom in PgUp Center cursor and zoom in schematic Zoom out PgDn Center cursor and zoom out schematic Schematic to the screen Ctrl Home Fit schematic to the screen Selection to the screen Shift Home Fit selection to the screen Rotate right Ctrl R Rotate
198. found the voltage source is removed Initial voltage VIC is cleared by Transient Save IC command Please note VIC is not a constant voltage source This voltage will be removed after DC operating point calculation and the label will be floating For constant voltage source use V model Label Label V nl5 Parameter Units Description V V Voltage Constant voltage source Voltage V 283 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Label Model Pulse Label Label Pulse nl5 Parameter Units Description V1 V Pulse On voltage VO V Pulse Off voltage Period S Period Width S Pulse width Slope Slope type Linear Cos Exp Rise S Pulse rise length Fall S Pulse fall length Delay S Delay before first pulse starts Pulse voltage source Pulses start after Delay time Rise time is included into Width Fall time is not included into Width Almost every parameter can be set to zero and infinity inf otherwise the error message will be displayed Delay Rise Fall t wWicth Period Slope type applies both to pulse rise and fall The following slope types are available gt gt r Rise t Rise t Rise t Linear Cos cosine Exp exponential 284 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Label Model Step Label Label_ Step nl5 Parameter Units Description V1 V Step On voltage VO V Step Off voltage Slope Slope type Linear Cos Exp R
199. from Roff to Ron resistance of common to another pin path starts ramping from Ron to Roff When decreasing input voltage Vin crosses logical threshold resistance of common to pin with dot path starts ramping from Ron to Roff resistance of common to another pin path starts ramping from Roff to Ron Resistance is changing during Ramp time interval with number of steps specified by Steps parameter If Steps 0 resistance is changed instantly Slope parameter specifies how resistance is changing during he ramp The following slope types are available Steps 6 Rott Rott _ gt lc Rott Ron Ron pS lg Ron y A A a z Ramp t Ramp t Ramp t Linear Cos Log To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state specified in IC 381 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S SPDT logic controlled switch Model SubCir Parameter File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC Units Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Wor
200. g Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 304 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function Function I Pwr TOS pa Lim Integral Table et SubCir 305 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function Model Function T gt F F_Function_Function nl5 Parameter Units Description F x V Output as function of the input F s AC transfer function in s domain IC V Initial condition output voltage Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines output voltage as a function of the following variables X input voltage Vin t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x x x F x x sin t F x P r1 P r2 Please note that input voltage x and variables V I and P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that Support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter s p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Set
201. g box will show up Enter new label name or select existing label from drop down list and click OK A label will immediately show up on the schematic and in the Components Window To set up model and parameters of the label place cursor on the label and press Enter or double click on the label to switch to Components window 80 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Attributes Attributes of the component and label include Name and Value The following attributes display modes are available e No attributes y Name e Name only e e Value only ae 0 ALE Name and Value Press Tab key to toggle attributes display mode or select attributes under Schematic Attributes Main Menu item Attributes can be placed with resolution higher than schematic grid The attributes grid can be set up in the range 1 1 down to 1 32 of schematic grid Attributes grid can be changed on Schematic page of Preferences dialog box To move an attribute select component first the click on the attribute and drag it Click select Click Drag Release Unselect To change attributes orientation select component and or click Rotate attributes button A Or press Ctrl T By default Value is either first parameter of the component s model or model name List of parameters displayed for specific component can be customized in the Format dialog box Right click on the component select Fo
202. g from Ron to Roff resistance of common to another pin path starts ramping from Roff to Ron Resistance is changing during Ramp time interval with number of steps specified by Steps parameter If Steps 0 resistance is changed instantly Slope parameter specifies how resistance is changing during he ramp The following slope types are available Steps 6 Rott Rott r lg Rott Ron p Ron E lg Ron 7 s s ee ee Ramp t Ramp t Ramp t Linear Cos Log When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state specified in IC 385 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S SPDT voltage controlled switch Model SubCir Parameter File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC Units Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 386 User s Manual BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S Views S SPDT current controlled switch Switch Pulse cS Steps g A SubCir 2 gt E A A a A SPDT current controlled switch S S_SPDT _CCS_Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Threshold A Current threshold Hysteresis A
203. ge Vin crosses Threshold minus Hysteresis 2 value switch resistance starts ramping from Ron to Roff Resistance is changing during Ramp time interval with number of steps specified by Steps parameter If Steps 0 resistance is changed instantly Slope parameter specifies how resistance is changing during he ramp The following slope types are available Steps 6 Rott Rott lg Rott Ron Ron z lg Ron z LE o E Ramp t Ramp t Ramp t Linear Cos Log When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state specified in IC 369 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S Voltage controlled switch Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 370 User s Manual S S_VCS_SubCir nl5 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S Views Current controlled switch Het S Current controlled switch Model Switch Parameter Units Threshold A Hysteresis A Active IC User s Manual Switch Pulse N Steps Tin oo VH SubCir le Models Traces P Vel
204. ge interpreter is implemented in the NES It is used in the script and in the C model of Code component Although not all standard C features are supported it 1s quite sufficient for many tasks The following C keywords statements and operators are available bool if else continue int for break int64 while return float do while double switch complex case default The following C language features are currently not implemented in NLS e Structures and unions e Pointers and references o goto statement e Multi dimensional arrays Comments Use to comment text until the end of the line or delimiters and to comment block of the text Delimiters and can be nested FOr a 07 1 OF FAE ES this Es a Comment This block is commented out x 1 2 y LJ LOs So x 1 Data types The following data types are supported bool boolean true false int 32 bit signed integer int64 64 bit signed integer float same as double double 8 byte floating point complex consists of double real and imaginary parts 64 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Variables All variables must be declared before use To declare a new variable use keyword bool int float double or complex with the variable name A variable can be initialized in the declaration double x double Xi VA Ze double x 1 0 inte icaz HOF bool flag complex 0 5 0 5 Arrays Only one di
205. ge is limiting between Vlo and Vhi When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined amplifier output is set to specified output voltage IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used Please note if both K and f1 are set to infinity the model may experience convergence problem Use Comparator model instead Static characteristic AC response 348 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Differential amplifier O O_DiffAmp_Comparator nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Hysteresis V Hysteresis Comparator Vhi V Max output voltage Vlo V Min output voltage Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High Comparator with hysteresis Comparator output is set to Vhi or Vlo using following rules Vin gt Hysteresis 2 V Vhi Vin lt Hysteresis 2 V Vlo Otherwise V previous state The output is delayed by Delay time Input pulses shorter than Delay will not pass through and will not affect output When calculating DC operating point comparator output is set to Vlo or to Vhi according to selected IC Hysteresis Static characteristic 349 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Differential amplifier O O_DiffAmp_Function nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Function F x V Output as function of the input F s AC transfer function in s domain IC V Initial condit
206. gure and start NL5 HTTP server to provide link with external applications Window e Tile Horizontally Tile all currently opened windows horizontally M e Tile Vertically Tile all currently opened windows vertically E e Cascade Cascade all currently opened windows vertically e Schematic F2 Show schematic window e Transient F5 Open Show transient window fu e AC F8 Open Show AC window Navigation Bar Show hide Navigation Bar Selection Bar Show hide Selection Bar Status Bar Show hide Status Bar List of opened windows Shows all currently opened windows 28 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Help ER e Help F1 Open context Help n15 chm tl e About Show information about NLS version and license e Support Show information required for NL5 support license request and Network license configuration e Check for updates Obtain information about latest updates Internet connection required Main Toolbar Main Toolbar provides fast access to often used commands and contains 5 groups of buttons Cee se sel erv ro Ora sak OTs ox Sea8 2 File Edit Schematic Transient Tools Move mouse pointer over the button to see a hint with button description Status Bar Status Bar shows some application related messages such as e Opening documents e Saving documents e Checking for updates Select Window Status Bar menu command to show hide Status Bar 29 M NL5 circuit
207. he wire is required A new component has automatically generated name The name begins with type specific letter followed by unique number Then the component can be renamed in the Components window When component is placed on the schematic its image can be modified flipped mirrored rotated to fit schematic better In addition some component types may have several views Commands that modify image and change views are also applied to a new component while placing component using keyboard before pressing Enter Along with schematic a new component will show up in the Components window In this window you can see all the models available for component type When model is selected parameters of the model are shown and available for editing See Components Window chapter for details To switch to Components Window from schematic place cursor on the component and press Enter or double click on the component In this case if you finish editing parameters by pressing Enter or Esc you will switch back to the schematic 78 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Component View Some component types have several views almost identical images with slight modification Different views may have different pinouts or indicate some functionality difference A few examples of different views e Polarity of control signal and source e Logical function of logical components e Inverted and non inverted inputs outputs
208. heckboxes in the trace list specify traces shown in the table Scrolling and Zooming To scroll graph use any of the following methods e Move mouse pointer to the left or right edge of the graph Mouse pointer will take big arrow shape Click or hold left mouse button to scroll graph e Cursors mode lx hold Shift key then click and drag graph e Scrolling mode MM click and drag graph e Hold Ctrl key and rotate mouse wheel to scroll horizontally e Hold Shift key and rotate mouse wheel to scroll vertically e Press Right and Left keys e Zoom mode ty double click to center this point To zoom graph use any of the following methods e Rotate mouse wheel to zoom horizontally e Hold Ctrl and Shift key and rotate mouse wheel to zoom vertically e Click toolbar buttons or use keyboard shortcuts or right click on the graph select Zoom then select command Horizontal Zoom in Ctrl PgUp Horizontal Zoom out Ctrl PgDn Fit the screen horizontal Ctrl Home Lj Fit cursors to screen t Vertical Zoom in PgUp 1 Vertical Zoom out PgDn f Fit the screen vertical Home E Fit the screen Shift Home o Zoom in Shift PgUp o Zoom out Shift PgDn To zoom selected area e Zoom mode click and drag to select area e Cursors mode z hold Ctrl key then click and drag to select area 245 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Selection area depends on how mouse pointer is mo
209. hen submitting schematic file to Customer Service for help please save schematic after simulation in order to have last log included into the file Click Copy to clipboard button to save log text into clipboard amp e Sweep AC Sweep allows running series of AC runs while changing component parameter or variable in specified range and storing AC data in the storage Sweep is performed using script commands and is configured on Sweep page of Tools window See Tools Sweep chapter for details 231 2 NL5 circuit simulator AC window Typical view of AC window and its main components are shown below FE Data Alle CUFSOFS 5 Table E Legend Phase Tab zoom Right click Right click aia Move Run t A Clear stora Insert text Ti Annotate Traces A Image A Preference Cursors 12 6624e 3 2810243 26836183 User s Manual Sl Data Hide Wicd Remove aD Rename Duplicate Eh LES Data table l B S692625e 5 A 5022154 2 4963461 2 5037154 6 Sb 927h25e 3 24963461 1 854 Right click E g 41 44035 79 162152 41 44056 2 Foe 4 39 162 152 ET eT 279 NI gt Cota gt Pal AES 1 oh FR MIA 2 Coe 24d does 19 12 1AE 4 3 Right click E Click to move cursa Data selection T Simulation Shift Ctrl Status bar progress indicators Data albl Rename aa Move Run to storage Remove 2 Clear storage Selected only y Selected a
210. i 422 NV VV TVG aa a EN dvoneiau acre tenner auadiareoteeeseian nent 423 We Mite 0 ONE eemenre reenr pee ny Sree Stee as Id a ado 424 W Ditlerential TIOS TOTES coun E E 425 W CUStOM CAN ST OL MEA id 426 WENN Co ane meen E E E TS Tec eer re ASR eer en eT 428 A ee verre ee ten ree spe eee EN eT te ere UC DS ae ee et ONO a O NN 429 A AIS mission MD IN ea O O caer en eeucmnbe a neem anced 430 A Sampe Holdena men se aati stigactabes Monee A tual ane omen ienued ai eaideasrenel ine 433 A Direcc iona COU AAA e e aa 435 BIO E eese A E E RR 436 A Sae E E E A E intend ER aAiemh oud ee atimaleedines 437 X BIOK Aoier 438 A BOC k a nen E E E E en EN Se 439 A B 2G diri iii tds 440 ASS USO DDO se ae sac dada Nine acia 441 A wrasse epee sees eae E eta a ate naan nea A dice A AE E ean 442 O nea rosea o PP a A hace eeienn 444 NN 445 Yeh ceca vars tcp eed A A ed exesbeahaue dl 446 YE CULO OC aa jacinta dida 448 O er ners Trane O E nec eet nate rane eran rea ere 450 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual SS O MeO ner Ae See renee ee eee Neen 451 A MRL a Os 453 Y LOSE En 455 IDEA ii E A R E E EE EA 458 FUNCOMS an E E E E E E E TN 460 aps MaA A E I ORE 460 SIOM ae R T E TE A A EAT 461 Bache secs A E ANEI E AEA A E AEE totes chino T E cv A re E AE E ET 462 O 462 nn a 462 O Ae a ae ee REE A E E eT eee eee ee E 463 PP OS E E 463 O E EAT AE PS E Se aS SE Te eee ee a ere Rae S Soe me ee 464 E OOOO 464 Wet 465 A ene E ieee ila I AEA A taut e
211. ic window Right click on the selection area to access relevant commands in the context menu such as Add Rename Copy Paste Delete Also manage sheets in the Sheets dialog box 135 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual To open Sheets dialog box select Schematic Sheets command or right click on the Sheet selection area and select Sheets command from context menu PERS ed 20 ab E Select sheet in the list and click toolbar button to perform the following operations e Add new sheet Add sheet dialog will show up add sheet x Enter sheet name Cancel Enter sheet name and click OK 33 e Copy sheet to clipboard E e Paste sheet from clipboard Remove selected sheet albh e Rename selected sheet Rename dialog will show up Rename Clock x Enter new name E Cancel Enter new sheet name and click OK Move selected sheet up or left in the Sheet Selection area Move selected sheet down or right in the Sheet Selection area 136 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Groups Group is a set of components that always have the same model and parameters When model or parameter of any component in the group changes all other components automatically change as well For example resistors R1 R4 belong to group Group1 Changing R1 value from le 3 to 100 automatically changes all resistors in the group z ES Maa 1 la oe EA A ES Group Group Group Group Grou
212. ic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that Support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter s p j 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output current IC 328 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I I I Voltage controlled current source I I VCCS_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string K Vin Piece wise linear voltage controlled current source Source gain K is defined by pwl string as a function of input voltage Vin See Working with PWL model chapter for details Voltage controlled current source II VCCS_VCO nI5 Model Parameter Units Description VCO 11 A Current amplitude Sin or Pulse On current Pulse lO A Current baseline Sin or Pulse Off current Pulse dFdV Hz V Gain Phase deg Phase Type Signal type Sin Square Triangle Sawtooth Voltage controlled osci
213. icenseServer exe for network license Single PC License Single PC License provides full functionality on single PC only The license is tied to specific PC hardware information PC fingerprint When NL3 starts it compares PC fingerprint information stored in the license file with current PC information and runs successfully only if fingerprints are identical The PC fingerprint can be obtained in the Support dialog box Help Support and then entered pasted into PC fingerprint window on the license ordering form Single PC License is offered free of charge for limited period of time as a Trial License After trial period expired Permanent Single PC License can be purchased Please visit nl5 sidelinesoft com for details Portable License Portable License uses USB device dongle to store license information NL3 operates as full function version on any PC with the dongle connected to the USB port Due to driverless dongle technology no problems using USB ports on different PC models are expected Please note Portable License does not work on Windows 8 Network License Network License is installed on the License Server a computer running a Windows operating system The license consists of the NL5LicenseServer exe Windows application and network license file ni5 n11 NES can work on any computer that has access to the server computer through the network When NLS starts it obtain
214. ile extension nlp and then opened back from the file This feature allows having different profiles for different tasks and switch between them easily Open Preferences dialog box by Main menu command Edit Preferences Many context menus do have Preferences command as well usually the bottom one in the list LLL Attributes Tab P En Image d A Preferences Selecting this command opens Preferences dialog box directly at context related page Preferences button A is also available in some dialog boxes and windows The Preferences dialog box consists of several of pages Select the page by clicking on the page name in the tree view selection window When any of parameters changed Apply button is enabled Then click e OK accept changes and close the dialog box e Cancel cancel changes and close the dialog box e Apply accept changes without closing the dialog box 35 St NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Preferences Save open preferences to from a file and select color scheme x Preterences Preferences Application Document Preferences 7 Schematic ey Save preferences a Drawings La Open preferences KY Reset preferences to default Color Scheme a Color with black background 3 m Color with white background n Black and white Cancel Apply Preferences E Save preferences Save preferences to a file lay e Open prefe
215. ile is located in the same directory as schematic file the path can be omitted Signal is defined in the following format lt if first line does not start with a number it is ignored gt 0 10 tl Ll tn In where all t and can be numerical values or expressions If t lt t0 signal is vO If t0 lt t lt t1 signal value is linearly interpolated between 10 and 11 etc If t gt tn then signal value is In if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise signal defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example 0 0 1 2 4 3 570 8 0 If Cycle Yes Delay 0 the following current will be generated Current source I I CS Trace nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Trace Trace Trace name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Current source defined by a trace Trace parameter is a name of the trace in the Trace list Transient Data Only traces loaded from data file imported from text or binary file duplicated or pasted from clipboard can be used for the current source If Cycle parameter is set to Yes the signal is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time 325 BJ NL5 circuit simulator I Current source Model SubCir Parameter File Pin Pin2 Cmd IC Units User s Manual I I _CS_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit
216. ile name should be txt When script is running no changes can be done on the schematic transient or AC windows Only Stop script button kE is available Script log and error messages are displayed on the Console page Script is applied to the active document When transient simulation command tran or cont 1s issued by the script transient mode is automatically set to Single so that transient will always pause at the end of the screen The next script command will not be executed until transient simulation is paused When AC simulation command ac 1s issued by the script the next script command will not be executed until AC simulation is complete 268 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Console User s Manual Console page displays log of script execution It also has a command line which works as calculator and allows executing some script commands Click Console Toolbar button or select Tools Script command in the Main Menu to open Console page of Tools window nli Tools xj SE gt X xv ae E Script Bt Console Sweep ar Optimization Jopen rc la 1 1 2 2 2 24 543 125 Sqrti 2 0 1 41421356237j Ri 500 R2 R1 2 500 Toolbar buttons perform the following operations X e Clear log abc e Font Select font of the text EE e Help F1 Click to open Help To see Help topic on specific function or command place cursor on the word in the command line or in the log window and click the button or
217. in crosses Threshold plus Hysteresis 2 value switch resistance starts ramping from Roff to Ron When decreasing input current lin crosses Threshold minus Hysteresis 2 value switch resistance starts ramping from Ron to Roff Resistance is changing during Ramp time interval with number of steps specified by Steps parameter If Steps O resistance is changed instantly Slope parameter specifies how resistance is changing during he ramp The following slope types are available Steps 6 Rott Rott e lg Rott Ron Ron Ja lg Ron z Ramp i Ramp t Ramp t Linear Cos Log When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state specified in IC 372 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S Current controlled switch Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pin Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 373 User s Manual S S_CCS_SubCir nl5 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT switch Switch Pulse List E 7 q File SubCir S SPDT switch S S_SPDT_Switch_Switch nl5 Model Parameter
218. in the string with current variable values e Schematic Tools Initial Condition page check box Clear C code IC clears this string up If not empty IC code will be executed right after initialization code init function and before the first transient simulation step at t 0 121 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Editing C code To edit C code click button on the parameter line The following dialog box shows up CE x cr hl X Ya g ri OR Cancel Enter code in the edit area then click OK to accept changes and close dialog box or Cancel to ignore changes and close dialog box Click Toolbar buttons to perform the following operations al ae e Open code from the text file Fe Save code to the text file x Clear code Clear code and set template The following template code will be set for your convenience CA x Sa xD vi f Define global variables here init f Write initialization code here main Write main code here riff OF Cancel 122 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual a e Check code A message box with results of the check will be shown i23 e Show line numbers no editing allowed in this mode Show the code with line numbers All operations and code editing are not allowed in this mode I x TEZ TE for i size 1 i gt 0si 1 ft x i i 1 H X 0 input YD for 1 O07ri lt size it 1
219. ing mode can be selected by clicking the button on the schematic toolbar Also there are some quick ways to switch between most often used modes Space e Press Space to switch between Selection and Wire modes b gt gt h Shift down e Point mouse pointer to empty space press and hold Shift gt AU click and drag mouse to scroll schematic Release Shift i Koon q to return to Selection mode Shift up Space Esc e Press Esc or Space in all modes to switch to Selection mode AAA it 74 vas NLS circuit simulator User s Manual Cursor Cursor is used as a marker to place a new schematic element wire ground connection component or label Cursor is used in two modes Selection and Wire Selection mode Wire mode e Use Left Up Right Down keys to change cursor direction and move cursor e To change cursor direction by mouse click close to the corner pointing to a new direction e Click on the schematic to move cursor to a new point e Press Home to center cursor on the screen e Press Space to switch between Wire and Selection modes e In Selection mode move cursor on the element and click to select the element e In Wire mode move cursor to draw a new wire e When cursor reaches the edge of schematic window the window will scroll automatically Wire The following examples show how to place wire using keyboard and mouse Keyboard Move cursor to the starting point using arrow keys Left Up Right Down Press S
220. int transistor is set to an initial state specified by Initial Condition parameter IC as follows Off 1 0 open T lt II T Q 02 O D 0 op O Plus Vds lt 0 I Vgs Vth S positive current source Minus Vds gt 0 I Vgs Vth S negative current source Please note this model of FET transistor does not have a body diode If you need a body diode you should add it as an external component 405 BJ NL5 circuit simulator T P FET Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pin Pin2 Pin3 Cmd IC User s Manual T T_PFET_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 406 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Voltage source V Pulse Step M I Sin PWL Function File Trace SubCir P Vel Models Traces V Voltage source V V_VS_V nI5 Model Parameter Units Description V V V Voltage Constant voltage source Voltage V 407 BJ NL5 circuit simulator AY Voltage source Model Pulse Parameter V1 VO Period Width Slope Rise Fall Delay Units V V S S n User s Manual V V_VS_Pulse nl5 Description Pulse On
221. ion output voltage Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines output voltage as a function of the following variables X input voltage Vin t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x x x F x x sin t F x P r1 P r2 Please note that input voltage x and variables V I and P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that Support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter s p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output voltage IC 350 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Differential
222. ion function is not used Main is the name of main function If clock pin does not exist the function is executed on every calculation step If clock pin exists the function is executed only on rising edge of logical clock signal IC may contain the code assigning initial values to outputs and component variables If not empty IC code will be executed after initialization function See Working with DLL model chapter for details of the model functionality and instructions on creating code and DLL 443 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Views Y Y Logic 1 Logic Delay T gt Models Traces V 7 Views are used to specify inverted or non inverted output Logic 1 Model Logic Logic 1 Model Delay Y Y_Logic 1_Logic nl5 Parameter Units Description IC Initial condition Low High Logical component with one input Output type inverted or non inverted depends on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step Y Y _Logic 1_Delay nl5 Parameter Units Description
223. ion performs transient and or AC analysis while manually iterating selected parameters Click Optimization Toolbar button or select Tools Optimization command in the Main Menu to open Optimization page of Tools window g a gt a Es Script i Console gt Sweep 3 Optimization Select Transient or and AC option Run on click Transient Mame Toolbar buttons perform the following operations e Run analysis S e Stop analysis execution X e Clear optimization table f e Clean up and update optimization table Removes rows with empty name field moves rows up to fill up gaps fills in Value fields with current component values EE e Help F1 Click to open Help topic on Optimization page You can select up to 16 schematic parameters to iterate Use Y and buttons to add and remove rows with parameter values If all rows do not fit the window warning message will show up in the status bar Resize window to see more rows and controls The following parameters can be specified e Name fields contain names of the parameters to be changed Enter parameter s name and press Enter or select parameter from drop down list The list shows all numerical parameters of the component which is currently selected in the schematic or in the Components Window See example in the Sweep chapter When the name of the parameter is entered or selected its current value will be shown in the Value field e Value
224. ions Outline gt Outline Draw outline rectangle Pointer Draw pointer line from the text to specified point Arrow Draw pointer line with arrow A eg coy Lock pointer Lock the end of the pointer the end of the Aow pointer will not move even when text is being moved Pointer so e Line width Specify line width of the outline and pointer e Color Double click on the item in the list to change the color If graph is zoomed or scrolled the text stays at the same place anchored to left top corner of the graph window To move the text click on the text and drag If pointer is locked only text will move To move the pointer only click on the end of the pointer and drag To edit the text double click on the text or right click on the text and select Edit text command 23 from context menu The same Text dialog box will show up To delete the text right click on the text and select Delete text command X from context menu Annotation Annotation is a text with a pointer which always points to the same data point of a trace even when graph is zoomed or scrolled Annotation belongs to a trace so if trace is deleted all trace annotations are deleted as well Annotation 1s also deleted if trace data is cleared For instance 1f annotation is added to simulation Run trace and a new simulation is started the annotation will disappear since the trace data is cleared at simulation start To add annotation
225. ise S Step rise length Delay S Delay before step starts Step voltage source Step starts after Delay time WA WO Delay Rise t The following slope types are available Rise t Rise t Rise t Linear Cos cosine Exp exponential 285 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Label Model Sin Label Label_ Sin nl5 Parameter Units Description V1 V Voltage amplitude VO V Voltage baseline Period S Period Phase deg Phase Delay S Delay before sine signal starts Sine voltage source Sine signal starts after Delay time Phase is sine phase in degrees at the moment when signal starts WA WA O O v Delay v Delay t t Period Period Phase 0 Phase 90 If transient is paused sine period changed then transient is continued the phase of the signal remains continuous providing smooth sine signal of variable frequency Period changed 286 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Label Model PWL Label Model Function Label Label PWL nl5 Parameter Units Description pwl Comma separated string Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Piece wise linear voltage source Signal is defined by pwl parameter in the csv comma separated values format as follows t0 VO t1 V1 tn Vn where all t and V can be numerical values or expressions If t lt t0 signal is VO If t0 lt t lt t1 signal
226. ison of the harmonic amplitude and phase of the specified signal to the input signal This process repeats for specified frequency range Transient simulation is automatically started and controlled by the method You don t need to define Transient traces all the required traces will be automatically created and removed when AC analysis is complete A number of parameters required for the method can be set up in the AC Settings dialog box Method Select Sweep AC source Transient calculation step is the only transient related parameter to be set up here Set it to the value you would use for a normal transient analysis of the schematic When AC analysis is running transient simulation step may be automatically decreased as needed in order not to exceed 1 16 of the AC source period AC source amplitude voltage or current can be a constant or a function of AC source frequency f Frequency dependent amplitude may be helpful to provide reliable operation of the method at different 215 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual AC source frequency For instance if switching mode circuit has a gain significantly changing with frequency it might be helpful to have AC source amplitude frequency dependent in order to increase signal to noise ratio Error When AC source is given a specific frequency transient simulation is performed for time interval equal to some number of periods of that frequency The more periods of AC source are used
227. ith 180 degrees phase lcr Nyquist plot x l F a HH Ay T e Settings Opens Settings dialog box lcr Nyquist plot settings Show frequency marker Scale fi 31085130736 Scale 58 233737941 Je 3 center 44 58859247738 3 Y center 259 Re As FE o Ar e NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o Show frequency marker Show frequency marker for each trace frequency slider bar and current frequency at the status bar lcr Nyquist plot Move slider by mouse mouse wheel or use Arrow Right Arrow Left PgUp PgDn Home or End keys to move the marker Zoom in Zoom out Fit the screen Show frequency marker Right click on the window to access relevant commands Double click on the window to center screen Left click on the window and drag to select zoom in area When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in AC Window 260 NL5 circuit simulator Nichols plot User s Manual Nichols plot shows logarithm of the magnitude as a function of the phase The diagram shows traces between cursors only or on the screen 1f cursors are disabled lcr Nichols plot odg eee 40 dB 80 dB 540 T e Settings Opens Settings dialog box lcr Nichols plot settings Show frequency marker Scale 231 r 9705265
228. ition of base emitter diode Off On ICbc Initial condition of base collector diode Off On BJT transistor Simplified Ebers Moll BUT transistor model with saturation It consists of two diodes base emitter and base collector and current source controlled by current through L 1 8 If collector emitter voltage is negative and less than Vsat base collector diode is open transistor is not saturated and behaves as Linear model current controlled current source with specified bandwidth B is open loop gain beta Low signal frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency B and f1 can be set to infinity inf base emitter diode with gain alpha If collector voltage is higher than Vsat base collector diode is closed and transistor is saturated collector emitter voltage is equal to Vsat When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined collector current is set to specified output current IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used Base emitter diode is set to the state specified in ICbe Base collector diode is set to the state specified in ICbc I 4A Ilb Equivalent schematic Non saturated static Low signal AC response characteristic 397 BJ NL5 circuit simulator T PNP transistor Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pin Pin2 Pin3 Cmd IC User s Manu
229. its choice of law principles to the contrary Contact Information Any inquiries regarding this Agreement or the Software may be addressed to Sidelinesoft at the Software Product website nl5 sidelinesoft com 498 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual The end 499
230. ive document Properties Open Schematic Properties dialog box Print Setup Open Print Setup dialog box Preview and print Ctrl P Preview and print schematic and graphs Most Recently Used files Shows up to 10 most recently used files Click to open the file Exit Close all documents and exit NLS Cut Ctrl X Cut selection copy to clipboard and delete Copy Ctrl C Schematic copy selection to clipboard Transient and AC copy all traces to clipboard Paste Ctrl P Schematic paste from clipboard Transient and AC paste traces from clipboard Delete Del Delete selection Undo Ctrl Z Undo schematic and component parameters change Redo Ctrl Y Reverse undo Select All Ctrl A Select all schematic elements Select Net Select schematic element and all wires connected to the element either directly or through labels including other sheets Format Format selected elements Preferences Open Preferences dialog box 26 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Schematic wv a o i e Components F3 Show hide Components window Variables F4 Show hide Variables window Check Check schematic show warnings and errors Tools Open Schematic Tools dialog box Sheets Open Sheets dialog box Groups Open Groups dialog box Parts list Open Schematic Properties dialog box Parts list tab Attributes o Name Show component name on the schematic o Value Show component main valu
231. k R2 l2k Cl 5n where R1 R2 and c1 are subcircuit components 103 mL NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual IC is a text string similar to Cmd string but it consists of initial conditions of the subcircuit components For example C1 1C 10 02 1C 0 where C1 and 02 are subcircuit components Unlike Cmd parameter IC string can be automatically modified by some commands Command Transient Save IC fills in the string by current IC s of all components in the subcircuit Command Schematic Tools Initial Condition page check box Set subcircuits to empty no IC will clear this string up Parameters Cmd and IC can be edited in the parameter line To edit parameters in the edit dialog box click E button Subcircuit is always loaded from the file when simulation starts If subcircuit has been modified it should be saved into the file before running simulation An exception is if subcircuit and main schematic are opened in the same instance of NL3 application In this case subcircuit will be taken directly from the NL5 memory so that saving changes into the file is not required An example of using subcircuit Schematic Subcircuit x_B2 Schematic 41 SubCir_2 zj gt SubLir 7 32 Co ll p r H Ctrl Click to start selection 104 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Working with PWL model PWL Piece Wise Linear mod
232. k on the graph to set both cursors to the same point This will also show cursors if they were not shown Click on the graph to move nearest cursor to this point Click and drag to select and move cursor To place cursors to specific positions and for other options right click on the graph and select Cursors command Hp from context menu Cursors dialog box will show up cursors e Show fi O0e 3 Left 500e 3 Right 1008 32 Interval Lock position Lock interval Close Show Select checkbox to show cursors Left Right Interval Enter new cursors position or interval press Enter to apply or Esc to cancel If interval changed an active cursor will move Lock position Lock cursors at current position cursors cannot be moved Lock interval Keep current interval between cursors If one cursor is being moved another one will automatically follow it to maintain specified interval The following toolbar buttons can be used to move cursors He ae Right maximum Move selected cursor to the nearest right maximum of selected trace Left maximum Move selected cursor to the nearest left maximum of selected trace Right minimum Move selected cursor to the nearest right minimum of selected trace Left minimum Move selected cursor to the nearest left minimum of selected trace Right unity gain Move selected cursor to the nearest right frequency with unity gain magnitude 1 of selected trace Left unity gain Move s
233. king with Subcircuits chapter for details 382 User s Manual BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S Views S SPDT voltage controlled switch Switch Pulse ES 2 Steps SubCir 3 e gt E s A t Il SPDT voltage controlled switch S S_SPDT VCS_Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Threshold V Voltage threshold Hysteresis V Hysteresis Active Active state Off On IC Initial condition Off On Voltage controlled switch Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance Switch is set to active or non active state using following rules Vin gt Threshold Hysteresis 2 active Vin lt Threshold Hysteresis 2 non active Otherwise nananana cies previous state When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state defined in IC The following is switching diagram for common to pin with dot path Active On The following switching diagram shows state of common to dotted pin path for Active On Common to another pin always has an opposite state Hysteresis _ _ _ _ _ _F Threshold in 383 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT voltage controlled switch S S SPDT VCS Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description P
234. l log x y Prototype complex log complex x double y double log double x double y Description Calculates logarithm x to base y Examples LOGI Sra 7 TOG Eir PIE UE de Log tea TO 0 10 0 3 math error Los ALOOF y LOO 3 1 LSO 70 Log 157 1030 OFr LE In log Prototype complex 1n complex double 1n double Description Calculates the natural logarithm log with one argument can be used instead of 1n Examples Im 100 4 60517 Tart match error TANS ba OPOTI DES LAOS 470 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Ig log10 Prototype complex lg complex double lg double Description Calculates logarithm to base ten log10 can be used instead of 1g Examples Po LOO 0 2 La 100 0 gt math error Lag TOO O POT E Bal Oe 30 5 Ib log2 Prototype complex l1b complex double 1b double Description Calculates logarithm to base two log2 can be used instead of 1b Examples lotr 7 lb 8 0 math error TDS GSO ROT 34 537365 471 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual db Prototype double db double double db double x double y Description db x calculates value of x in decibel as 20 log abs x db x y Calculates value of the ratio x y in decibel as 20 1o0g abs x y Examples db 100 40 AUS I ZOO vs SAO sO ZOO II ILS par Prototype complex par complex double par double
235. l E MIE 10 395 306 30 066255 vici 403 6526 3 2 411152 60 201624 iE 17 441312 Cursors enabled active cursor is highlighted Cursors disabled screen is used e To show hide Data table click Table toolbar button EZ or right click on the graph and select Table command from context menu e Click on the trace row to select the trace Selected trace will be shown on top of all traces e Double click on the table to open AC Data window e Right click to open context menu The menu will contain some common commands and commands related to selected trace e Colors fonts and number of significant digits used in the table can be customized on Table page of Preferences dialog box Phase and magnitude have separate font and color settings The table can be displayed on the bottom of the AC Window or as a separate window right click on the table and select Separate window command Ge rc AC JO EGH E Ri Se a SES ALAR LAA EN A 1 AO ANGE ded 35 920001 1523141243 634000 et As 13 23791303 gt Runf l il Goubk iu A Table in the AC Window Table in separate window BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual The values shown in the table as well as other table options can be selected on Table page of AC Data window xi ES E Traces Screen Table Storage e Show table Show frequency on the header e Show frequency in the table Check all Un
236. l he eatin et herein 52 OS 53 PET PUK A oo UR a 54 A A 55 Formatiana VA OUT Cia Ai 56 DIT TOTAL AEE R E EE E E A EE E NA EEE E E EEE 57 CASCAMSCUSIO VIS sidad E a TE EEE eE 57 O 57 NO S ea O 59 OPO PP O 62 FUNCION a ena 62 Expro SONS an E AE E E iscai 63 SA NETE E EE E E EE A A EEEE E 64 COE TA rasa 64 DAI id 64 NV ara bles cian oa ican o laan 65 IA rs nccd 65 Statements and Opeta OLS open E teed sana eat hat ant oe tore seed ade da tae eade eeeend eaaheneeseta aes 65 Y 67 E O O O AO 67 SOPE Oo A AILS a A oia 67 SO A E mn R O eT Re 68 Schema tie WIN O Wii 72 Edine schematicsi ni AS A an eon ca tated ane 74 A o ceasloun endotbriah aanciousaiettinsircoce aston seetae tude aionceata cave antetonsamtanutstenanet uae acuctoen 75 A Vi eee a a Se tee Wee te OE a EER See SATE Pee ODE VEE CS TP yOn SEE EE Pn MEI ee EERE O 75 COMEN ate e Sri a nio ee ne 76 ETA e AIA EAS A te ee tes ci noise dtr ae EIE EAA ete eect eee Perec SE E AEE 76 OO TUM INU ns oca Td Component VIS rede acs cpa ta oa eee a eee re eee ee 79 E EA E A E A A EE E A E AAA SO A A dees eee 81 Drawmes Hne rectanele Oval sandia 82 Textand Varia Des tuna nd a e et niendo 83 Serolline and ZOOMING 10 A A A A A a 85 o be A ole A AEA PAAA ee mages PAAA A cee 86 BoCa R a tra 87 NOS aE E O ea rocas 87 Pisae and T Mable sta 89 Mirror FHD RONE nipa a llos 90 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O 91 Und RECO a 92 Schematic CITING command S sis 93 Keyboard keys and SOIC U
237. l if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise the sequence defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time To see and set logical levels go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button Example St Del ele 0 Sl The following logical output will be generated if Cycle Yes Delay 0 See Working with List model chapter for more details 456 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Logic generator Y Y_LogicGenerator_File nl5 Model Parameter Units Description File File File name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Logic file Logical output sequence is defined in the text file File parameter is a file name with full path to the file If the file is located in the same directory as schematic file the path can be omitted Logical output sequence is defined in the following format lt if first line does not start with a number it is ignored gt Eye el where all t and s can be numerical values or expressions sO sn defines output logical level positive number corresponds to High zero or negative number Low If t lt t0 output level is s0 At tO output level is sO At t1 output level is s1 and so on At t gt tn output remains at sn level if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise the sequence defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole sign
238. l levels Do not detect oscillations fo Loy Y Do not reduce calculation step High Y igh fi De 3 step reduction fas 5 Threshold Y Convergence Z parameter Change states one at a time aS fi Ue 1 2 Machine precision Cancel Transient calculation step Some options related to calculation step e Do not detect oscillations Do not display warning messages if numerical oscillations detected e Do not reduce calculation step Always use specified calculation step only e Step reduction Specifies how much step resolution during switching point detection is better than calculation step Convergence Parameters that may affect convergence of DC operating point calculation and switching points calculation e Change states one at a time Specifies switching iteration mode e Machine precision machine epsilon The minimum relative difference between two floating point numbers which can be reliably recognized Logical levels These settings apply to logical components and some models with logical type of input e Low V Low logical level Must be lt High e High V High logical level Must be gt Low e Threshold V Logical threshold the voltage below threshold is considered Low above threshold is considered High Threshold must be between Low and High Z parameter Define custom formula for Laplace space approximation of z transform parameter Z or select formula from drop do
239. label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 326 M4 NL5 circuit simulator I Voltage controlled current source Linear Function PWL la 3 VCO Pulse PWM SubCir Moc Traces 0 lt I Voltage controlled current source Model Parameter Units Description Linear K A V Gain Linear voltage controlled current source K Vin 327 User s Manual wre t V in AY ly P Vel I I_ VCCS_Linear nl5 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Voltage controlled current source I 1 VCCS_Function nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Function F x A Output as function of the input F s AC transfer function in s domain IC A Initial condition output current Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines output current as a function of the following variables X input voltage Vin t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x x x F x x sin t F x P r1 P r2 Please note that input voltage x and variables V I and P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schemat
240. lation of the signal between those points contains at least 4 steps e Delay time of transmission line and delay component contains at least 2 steps The following example shows how the calculation step is reduced during the pulse edges I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Automatic step reduction may also be used to provide better time resolution of switching point detection If time constants of the circuit are large and high calculation step can be used for linear range simulation reducing the step only at switching points may significantly improve simulation performance The Step Reduction parameter specifies how much step resolution during switching point detection is better than specified calculation step For instance Step Reduction 0 1 means that switching points will be detected with time resolution approximately ten times better than calculation step The following graph shows waveforms obtained with calculation step Is and step reduction 1 0 1 and 0 01 Using automatic step reduction does not affect calculation speed much Number of additional calculation steps is approximately equal to log Step Reduction For step reduction 0 01 there will be only 6 additional steps However if constant calculation step is preferred any change of calculation step can be disabled For exam
241. lection mode point mouse pointer to empty space hold Shift key then click and drag schematic Shift key will temporary to Scrolling mode Hold Ctrl key and rotate mouse wheel to scroll horizontally Hold Shift key and rotate mouse wheel to scroll vertically Use Shift Up Shift Down Shift Right Shift Left keyboard shortcuts In Scrolling mode 4 click and drag schematic or press Up Down Right Left keys Press Home to center cursor on the screen Point and double click on the schematic to set cursor and center it on the screen To zoom schematic use any of the following methods Rotate mouse wheel to zoom in and zoom out Click schematic toolbar buttons or use keyboard shortcuts amp o PgUp zoom in o PgDn zoom out HH o Ctrl Home fit all schematic to the screen i o Shift Home fit selection to the screen Right click on schematic window to open context menu select Zoom item then select schematic scale in percent 25 250 85 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Select and Unselect e To select one schematic element point and click on the element e To select a block point on the empty space click and drag selection rectangle Depending on state of Ctrl and Shift keys at the moment of releasing mouse button the following selection can be done o No keys depressed Only components completely located in the selected area only part of the wires located in the selec
242. lename Description Save traces into nlt data file Extension nlt can be omitted If parameter filename is omitted name of the file to save data is the same as script file name with nlt extension If file path is not specified save in the script file directory Only traces currently shown on the graph will be saved Examples Savedata savedata retraces 490 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual saveic Usage savelc Description Save Initial Conditions IC sleep Usage sleep time Description Pause script execution for time ms Examples sleep 1000 stop Usage stop Description Stop transient This command can be used to free memory allocated for transient analysis Transient cannot be continued after this command 491 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual store Usage store store expr Description Move run into storage The parameter expr is evaluated as an expression and the result is used as a storage name If parameter expr is omitted a default storage name RunN is used Examples store Store RISC storetext Usage storetext storetext text Description Move run into storage with parameter text as a storage name If parameter text is omitted a default storage name RunN is used Examples storetext storetext This is a first run 492 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual traces Usage traces stateN
243. lick OK to accept changes and close dialog box or Cancel to ignore changes and close dialog box The following dialog boxes are available for different component types F Custom function x af zl width Maximum width 32 B i O z Uze niin Maximum height 8 n Jou e Number of inputs 0 8 rc e Number of outputs 1 ke e Number of clocks 0 1 e Select Use default names checkbox to use default pin names or unselect Use default names to enter custom pin names on the In and Out tabs 99 KE NL5 circuit simulator L Custom coupled inductors W Custom transformer A Edit L2 User s Manual Maximum width 1 Maximum height 32 Number of windings 1 9 e Click on rectangle markers to select the beginning and the end of the winding X Custom block Subcircuit a e Ej Height 100 Maximum width 32 Maximum height 32 Number of pins 0 128 E NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X Code g 2 y with Maximum width 32 3 Z Hesh Maximum height 256 Number of inputs 0 256 Number of outputs 0 256 Number of clocks 0 1 M Use default names In ou e Select Use default names checkbox to use default pin names or unselect Use default names to enter custom pin names on the In and Out tabs e To access internal variables of DLL model without creating output pins add component variable names on the Var
244. lick on Cl in the components list AC voltage trace will be added to the traces list e Click Close button Here is window view before closing B nli AC Data x ih E a E E A Traces Screen T able Storage Add new trac Trace V C1 Mag Phase hi Display fi Phase width fi width Check all Uncheck all 20 Apply Close Run AC Click Start AC Toolbar button or Select AC Start command in the Main Menu An AC response will be calculated and displayed I I I I I I I I I r I I I I I 4 A EH SS ee are an he A A AA AA eh ces ea este Se aN Gad Geta oO ae el 1 Shift Ctrl Click Eo move cursor mi I 21 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual NLS License Without a license NL3 operates as a Demo version Demo version has all full function features available however the total number of components in the schematic is limited to 20 Although Demo version does not allow entering components above the limit 1t still can read and simulate demo schematics with an unlimited number of components Several full function license types with different protection methods can be ordered at nl5 sidelinesoft com All licenses except Portable are using license file ni5 n11 This file should be located in the same directory as application file n15 exe or NL5L
245. llator Output current is a signal with frequency equal to f Hz dFdV Vin For Sine signal 10 is baseline and 11 is amplitude For Square Triangle and Sawtooth signals l0 is Off level 11 is On level Phase is additional phase of the signal in degrees Voltage controlled current source I I_ VCCS Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Width S Pulse width Threshold V Voltage threshold 11 A Pulse On current lO A Pulse Off current One shot pulse generator When increasing input voltage Vin crosses Threshold value current pulse of Width duration is generated 10 is pulse Off level I1 is pulse On level If increasing Vin crosses Threshold value while pulse is generated the pulse is restarted 329 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Voltage controlled current source L VCCS_PWM nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWM 11 A Pulse On current 10 A Pulse Off current F Hz Frequency Phase deg Phase Vmax V Input voltage corresponding to 100 duty Voltage controlled Pulse Width Modulator Output current is a pulse signal of frequency F shifted by Phase Input voltage Vin is sampled at the beginning of each cycle of the signal and width of the output pulse during this cycle is calculated according to the equation width 1 F Vin Vmax or duty 100 Vin Vmax If the width is equal or less than zero a short On pulse with
246. llows lt if first line does not start with a number it is ignored gt t0 VO ti Vi where all t and V can be numerical values or expressions If t lt t0 signal is VO If t0 lt t lt t1 signal value is linearly interpolated between VO and V1 etc If t gt tn then signal value is Vn if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise signal defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example oOo G b FO OOWN O 7 7 7 7 7 If Cycle Yes Delay 0 the following voltage will be generated Label Label_Trace nl5 Parameter Units Description Trace Trace name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Voltage source defined by a trace Trace parameter is a name of the trace in the Trace list Transient Data Only traces loaded from data file imported from text or binary file duplicated or pasted from clipboard can be used for he voltage source If Cycle parameter is set to Yes the signal is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time 288 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Label Model Parameter SubCir Ele Pint Cmd IC Units User s Manual Label Label_ SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with S
247. lly o If mouse pointer is moving only left or right two vertical lines will be Shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in horizontally o If mouse pointer is moving diagonally rectangle will be shown When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen e Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in Transient Window 190 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual XY diagram XY diagram shows all traces as a function of selected trace Selected trace name X axis is shown in the header line The diagram shows traces between cursors only or on the screen if cursors are disabled lcr X V L1 T e Settings Opens Settings dialog box nli XY diagram ES Scale e Use transient scale fo multiplier AS 2 offset Poo t multiplier Booo Y offset By default diagram X and Y axes scales are the same as transient screen vertical scale Uncheck Use transient scale checkbox and enter individual X and Y axes multipliers and offsets e Use transient scale e Horizontal Zoom in e Horizontal Zoom out 191 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual ler e Fit the screen horizontal t e Vertical Zoom in e Vertical Zoom out F e Fit the screen vertical kE e Fit the screen e Right click on the window to access relevant commands e Double click on the window to
248. lowing format TLV ly P25 VZ py IN y VN where Ti Vi pair defines value of the signal voltage or current at specified time Signal value between specified points is linearly interpolated Signal value before T1 is v1 signal value after TN is vN Values T1 TN should be given in ascending order Although the signal is defined on the interval T1 TN it can be repeated continuously or delayed by setting component parameters Delay and Cycle pwl parameter can be easily edited in the PWL dialog box Click E button right to the pwl parameter to open dialog box pul 112 J gt Typical view of PWL dialog box for sources and its main components are shown below CEO x Toolbar ee xX Y PWL graph gt A I I I I T 1 I I I I I I PWL data Tab selection Upper pane of the window contains graph of the signal Lower pane contains 2 tabs for entering data and configuration e Move cursor over splitter area Se then press left mouse button and drag to resize panes e Right click on the graphs area to see context menu with relevant commands e Click OK to accept changes and close dialog box or Cancel to cancel changes 111 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Te Click Toolbar buttons to perform the following operations ta o Open data from the file in csv format Fl o Save data into the file in csv format 2 O Clear all data wo Refr
249. mands e Insert text on the graph e Edit text x e Delete text Data table commands e Hide trace name do not show trace in the Data table e Separate window Show Data table in the Transient Window or as a separate window Legend commands e Hide trace name do not show trace on the graph e Remove selected trace e Rename selected trace e Duplicate selected trace Copy selected trace to clipboard e Paste traces from clipboard 2 Ge a oP ll e Find component V I and P traces only Click to show the component on the schematic Keyboard keys and shortcuts The following keyboard keys and shortcuts can also be used e Space Pause or Continue transient e Tab Separate traces e Left Right Scroll graph e Up Down Select trace e End Center beginning of the traces set to the middle of the screen e Ctrl End Center end of the traces 185 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Shift End Center middle of the traces e Shift PgUp Zoom in e Shift PgDn Zoom out Mouse operation The following mouse operation can be used e Right click Open context menu e Mouse wheel Horizontal zoom in zoom out e Ctrl mouse wheel Scroll horizontally e Shift mouse wheel Scroll vertically e Ctrl Shift mouse wheel Vertical zoom in zoom out Cursors mode liz e Click left button If cursors visible move nearest cursor e Click and drag o On annotation move annotation text or pointer
250. maximum Move selected cursor to the nearest right maximum of selected trace A e Left maximum Move selected cursor to the nearest left maximum of selected trace e Right minimum Move selected cursor to the nearest right minimum of selected trace e Left minimum Move selected cursor to the nearest left minimum of selected trace ft e Maximums Move one cursor to the nearest right maximum and another cursor to the nearest left maximum of selected trace e Minimums Move one cursor to the nearest right minimum and another cursor to the nearest left minimum of selected trace 173 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Text To add text on the graph right click on the graph and select Insert Text command from the context menu Text dialog box will show up e Outline e Arrow 4 Pointer Lock pointer hs Line width i Text _ Background a Enter text in the text box The text will be simultaneously shown on the graph Enter text pS The text can be formatted using toolbar buttons and controls Alignment Set alignment of multi line text e Align left e Center e Align right Orientation Change orientation of the text i e Rotate left e Rotate right Font Change size of the font or select specific font type and options A e Larger font 174 E NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual a e Smaller font 4 e Select font Outline and pointer opt
251. mensional arrays are supported Index is zero based An array can be initialized in the declaration double x 100 ine carrey hl ea hy By By La Dd Statements and operators if else Conditional statement if 1 lt 0 R1 1 0k else if 1 1 R1 2 0k else R1 3 0k Cl l1n for Loop operator Fort 2HOe ADS ILJ x i 1 lt lt i yt x 1 Foreach loop operator The code is executed for all values from the comma separated list tot T 175 OOOO A y 1 while Loop operator 1 0 while 1 lt 10 x 1 1 lt lt i PEL 65 BJ NL5 circuit simulator do while Loop operator 1 0 do x 1 1 lt lt i PELS while i lt 10 switch Selective structure switch 1 Case 1 x 1 break case 2 x 2 break default x 3 break continue Skip the rest of the code in the current loop fOr 2 03 TELOS bu i x 1 1 lt lt i 1f i 5 continue ye break Leave current loop or switch statement Lor m 0s 1x107 FEL J 4 lava lesa if 1 5 break y x 1 return Stop execution of the code immediately and exit Lor ai 0 DEL E A x 1 1 lt lt i 1f x i 0 return YSL User s Manual Please refer to publicly available resources for general C language syntax description and reference 66 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Script Script is a program which allows automating simulation process Using script you can open close schematic files
252. mn rr 241 Nata tea De sei ae ea E laica 243 Srono and LOMAS ii oi 245 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual ACCON ANN ONS gc espa tects ars cent ates asec cee ete cari at aa E gorau eae eames 247 Keyboard KEYS and hOla 249 MOUSE Operacion tan ai aaa 249 AC TOONS O 251 PUISIO CTA O 251 SLC AU Po o E E 256 NyquistPlOltessapnild a id ee ageless 259 Nicho Pla rias ott exes A teeteoaMaeahelt 261 Markt ra E 264 EA 267 IMA Cr ass 268 O A UL 269 Command MS irer aio 270 SC ed ada aa 271 ODUMIZA ON A A a 274 HATTE D0 AAA In E E A S 276 Started A AA 276 senda URC TE questa di 271 A A O E E O 278 NE SMATLAB mie x AM OC ni o o e edad o 279 VUE ATACAMA ca ando DN 1 Component Types Models and Parameter ccccccccccsssssssssscccccssssssssssssccccscccssssscsscccsssssesees 282 A A In Oy OR ROOT RPT Tee a E 283 ASS ANIA A E N wax tahotea ees ssnenahen ted spe 290 A AMO esi OA PM PE A d asopaaueheciecdn dasa E A asopaaunkacieda asd esata atectaley 291 C Voltage Controlled Capacitor ica ie hee eta ieee a eee ee ee 293 C C rrent controlled Capacitor sai ais 294 D Dio desta tide senrucacichenyseie A caan deme eeeta iam sansteeesed 295 PETC IN vir peta see Reet said sa a adrenals 299 Dp Bi Gare CHO Mal ZCI Ie scat sea 300 B ea IS e We Ramee ene mene er Saree es er eter en ene rene 301 Di Lo sre controlled tyr Stora Sence ete E Shee E 302 Y Olfase controlled Oasis 303 DC Urrent controlled SO nice dante cio bbs 3
253. mula will be evaluated and its current numerical value will be displayed along with button Click on the button to view edit formula click If formula expression has an error and can t be evaluated VAL text will be displayed instead of a number 97 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual To clear formula enter new expression or number without equal sign instead of numerical value or click button to switch to edit mode erase formula and press Enter If formula contains name of a component and the component has been renamed the formula will be updated automatically Formula cannot contain time and values that are changing during calculation such as voltage current and power Circular references when some of the parameters in the formula finally point to this formula are not allowed and error message will be displayed Please note that an expression entered equal sign is not a formula it will be immediately evaluated and replaced by its numerical value Functions Some component parameters can be defined as a function Function is an expression which is recalculated at every transient or AC calculation step In addition to numbers and names some functions can also use the following variables t current transient time s f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2rrf s or p Laplace parameter s p j 2nf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in
254. mulator User s Manual different step and compare simulation results As a rule reducing calculation step below some level does not have any visible effect on results Selecting calculation step close to this level would give the best simulation performance The following example shows how calculation step affects simulation of a simple schematic The time constant of the RC chain is Is so that calculation step is supposed to be lt ls When 1s 2s and 3s step is selected the transient waveform is wrong The overshoot and further oscillations exist at 3s step However if exact waveform is not of interest and if it does not affect functionality of the rest of the circuit these steps could be used The numerical oscillation warning can be turned off by Do not detect oscillations checkbox Calculation steps below Is produce very accurate waveforms For instance difference between traces with 0 5s and 0 1s steps can be noticed only at the very beginning of the transient and it 1s extremely small Simulation with small steps Automatic step reduction Although calculation step is specified by user NL3 still can automatically reduce the step to satisfy the following conditions Period of sine source contains at least 16 steps Pulse or switch On Off state contains at least 4 steps Non zero rising or falling edge contains at least 4 steps Interval between two points in models which perform interpo
255. n selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button Trigger outputs are delayed by Delay time Output pulses with duration shorter than Delay will not show up When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC 452 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Views Y gt gt schmitt trigger Logic Delay J Vin V v Views are used to specify inverted or non inverted output Models Traces Schmitt trigger Y Y _SchmittTrigger_Logic nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Log ic Hysteresis V Hysteresis IC Initial condition Low High Schmitt trigger Output type inverted or non inverted depends on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button Output is set to Low or High level following rules inverted output Vin gt Threshold Hysteresis 2 V Low Vin lt Threshold Hysteresis 2 V High OtherwiSe o o o oooooo o V previous state When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC When calculating transient output voltage is always
256. n some range component parameters modified transient analysis performed results placed into storage double freq for fregq 1 freq lt 10 freq 1 1 V2 period 1 reg R2 S 1 treg C tran store freq 68 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Wait for condition Transient is running until peak to peak value of the trace 1s less than specified threshold When done Initial Conditions are saved double threshold le 6 tran wiide v cl ppe gt threshold T cont savelc Perform analysis for specified file save data exit application Schematic file is loaded into NLS component parameters changed transient analysis performed traces exported into csv file NL5 closed This script can be executed from command line open ler nl5 R1 100 Cil in tran export data csv exit Perform analysis for specified file log data exit application Schematic file is loaded into NLS component parameter swept transient analysis performed traces data logged into text file NL5 closed This script can be executed from command line open lcr nl5 LOGdate wordetesCsv ys Ely wer mean Wr Ens fort Rij lOO RI lt 10007 Rie t O tran logdata exit 69 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual HI Schematic 70 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual The following simplified diagram shows schematic structure and operations Schematic Window Schematic Components
257. nce for future FFT analysis Please note that FFT of storage is not shown in AC window FFT window AC window t ix i CS 3 l i l E FFT Li g E O Oe FFT or vici ff e de t HH B E 1 66254 45 636953 573 61609e 3 45 959174 20023394 58 424569 15 013265 AE 20 255257 43 9039003 7 2670262 4 124939 19953065 7 4 Y JJ Shift Cel Click and drag te 203 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Right click on the window to access relevant commands e Double click on the window to center screen e Left click on the window and drag to select zoom in area o If mouse pointer is moving only up or down two horizontal lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in vertically o If mouse pointer is moving only left or right two vertical lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in horizontally o If mouse pointer is moving diagonally rectangle will be shown When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen e Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in Transient Window 204 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Eye diagram Eye diagram is used to analyze periodical signals jitter and distortion Although it is mostly applicable to telecommunication and digital processing it might be useful for analog electr
258. nce when opened a simple algorithm may have some trouble resolving switching process Possible solution would be adding non zero resistors in series and or large resistors in parallel to the diodes However this may produce very small time constants which results in very small calculation step so that all the benefits of using ideal components vanish Since traditional iterative methods do not work reliable for such systems NL5 uses robust proprietary algorithm So far the algorithm works perfect for all circuits tested however nobody could prevent users from designing something special which may have convergence difficulties Another problem common for any software that uses floating point arithmetic is loss of accuracy due to rounding errors Those errors may also affect convergence at switching points as well as linear range simulation 151 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual If simulation slows down at switching points stops with No solution error message or if simulation produces obviously wrong results the following options and parameters may help e Change states one at a time Selecting this checkbox may improve convergence at switching points e Machine precision AKA machine epsilon This parameter specifies the minimum relative difference between two floating point numbers which can be reliably recognized This value affects not only convergence at switching points but overall simulation results
259. nction f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example Z s 3n s 0 5 3 nH inductor in series with 0 5 Ohm resistor Z s 1u s 1 0 10p s 1 mkH inductor in parallel with 10 pF capacitor L L_Inductor_SubCir nl5 Parameter Units Description File File name of subcircuit schematic Pint Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 336 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Views Voltage controlled PWL L inductor a Dn Vin _ V p LAN E O 9 2 e ee P Vel SO UY IL l _ L Voltage controlled inductor L L_VCL_PWL nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string L Vin IC A Initial condition current Leave blank if IC not defined Piece wise linear voltage controlled inductor At any moment inductor is a linear inductor Its inductance L is a function of control voltage V L Vin dl dt pwl string defines inductance as a function of control voltage Vin See Working with PWL model chapter for details When calculating DC operating point if IC is defined inductor is replaced with current source equal to IC If IC
260. nd dimmed All y Store last Run 232 Data Hide W C1 Separate window A Preferences User s Manual e Graph area contains traces with annotations cursors and text e Legend window contains list of traces shown on the graph Click on the gray header bar of the legend window and drag to move legend window e Data table contains cursors screen information and calculated traces data e Data selection area contains last simulation and storage data tabs Click on a tab to select Run or storage data e Simulation progress shows current simulation status as a progress bar e Shift Ctrl indicators are highlighted when Shift and or Ctrl key are depressed e Status bar shows hint related to current position of mouse pointer and Shift Ctrl state e Move mouse pointer over splitter area lb then press left mouse button and drag to resize Storage selection area e Move mouse pointer over splitter area then press left mouse button and drag to resize data table and magnitude phase separator e Right click on the graph legend Data table or Data selection area to see context menu with relevant commands e Common properties of AC Window such as colors fonts and some options can be customized on Graphs Table Annotation and Text pages of Preferences dialog box Properties specific to the document schematic can also be set up in AC Data window Gra
261. nd of the period will be generated Due to that the frequency of the output signal is always F V Current controlled voltage source V V_CCVS_SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Pin4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 421 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Voltmeter Voltmeter Models Traces V Voltmeter V V_Voltmeter_Voltmeter nl5 Model No parameters Voltmeter Voltmeter 0 open circuit 422 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual W Winding Winding 2 V H I SYY L P Vel A W W Winding Winding nl5 Model Parameter Units Description indi n rn l Winding turns Number of turns Winding The Winding is actually an ideal transformer with 1 turn second winding one end of each is grounded and another end is shown as a core pin of the winding Equivalent schematic To make an ideal transformer connect cores of two or more windings by wire Core magnetizing can be modeled by setting linear or non linear inductor from core to ground T Tr me WE ow Ideal transformers Transformer with magnetizing inductor 423 BJ NL5 circuit sim
262. nder Assignment bitwise left shift Assignment bitwise right shift Assignment bitwise AND Assignment bitwise XOR Assignment bitwise OR 459 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual 3 Functions abs mag Prototype double abs complex double abs complex double abs double double abs double int64 abs int64 int abs int Description Absolute value magnitude For complex argument abs Vre im For multiple arguments x y abs Ab y Number of arguments is not limited mag can be used instead of abs Examples abs 3 0 4 0373 5 0 abs toT Coane abs 1 0 1 0 abs 10 10 abe lyyti lk E 20 460 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual sign Prototype int sign double Description Indicates whether a numeric value is positive negative or zero sign x returns e 0 if x 0 e 1 if x gt 0 e if x lt 0 Examples signi sign 0 signi ASA 0 aJ wL 461 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual re Prototype double re complex Description Real part of complex number Examples rella RS ayy Le Im Prototype double im complex Description Imaginary part of complex number Examples re 1 2 3 43 3 4 phase Prototype double phase complex Description Phase of complex number Returns phase in degrees in the range 180 180 Examples phase 1 13 45 462 BJ NL5 circuit simul
263. nductance IC A Initial condition current Leave blank if IC not defined Linear inductor V L dl dt When calculating DC operating point if IC is defined inductor is replaced with current source equal to IC If IC is not defined blank inductor is temporarily replaced by short circuit DC operating point calculated and then the current through short circuit is assigned to the inductor as its initial current Inductor L L_ Inductor _ PWL nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string L I IC A Initial condition current Leave blank if IC not defined Piece wise linear capacitor pwl string defines inductance as a function of current See Working with PWL model chapter for details When calculating DC operating point if IC is defined inductor is replaced with current source equal to IC If IC is not defined blank inductor is temporarily replaced by short circuit DC operating point calculated and then the current through short circuit is assigned to the inductor as its initial current 335 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual L Inductor Model Function E Inductor Model SubCir L L_Inductor_Function nl5 Parameter Units Description Z S Ohm Impedance as a function of s parameter Impedance function in s domain For transient constant impedance Z 0 is used For linearized AC analysis complex impedance Z s is used The following variables can be used in the fu
264. nitial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 440 User s Manual X X_Block 8 SubCir nl5 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X Custom block SubCir L L LI L This is a customized component A component can be edited in the Edit Component dialog box See Editing customized component chapter for instructions on editing a component This component may have arbitrary size up to 32 width X 32 height up to 32 pins on each side Examples of Custom block component D Spf X Custom block X X_CustomBlock_SubCir nl5 SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 PinN Name of subcircuit label connected to pin N Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 441 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X Code c DLL Out OLE Ind Ine This is a customized component A component can be edited in the Edit Component dialog box See Editing customized component chapter for instructions on editing a component This component may have arbitrary size up to 32 width X 256 height up to 256 inputs on the left side up to 256 outputs on the right side one or no clock pins on the bottom side custom or default input and output names Examples of Code component xi yl we YE wo Y3 442 BJ
265. nnai alin fas E E EEA 465 LE ass sa rie eg ach cid 466 MSI A O O O A 466 A OO 467 aE o OCRE q AS 468 DS A A A AA teadedeaaeno eieieeduadaaneamedaawce 468 DO Wa daa cid a ted 469 OWE asen E eben 469 OO O V A o pr o o In 470 TG HAN Ko eae errs prin sure ene A en Se ee eS ae a ER ere ERT 470 NCD NO sists Oo ple sean see taeiads oe cnaamies tld E toreaacetane etait aupaaeedectarte 47 A A E E E babar ae eee 471 A te I A AA A E anneal eet dante ees A cloacae E A TTT 472 Fo I P SAET T T ES E IIE ON 472 7 gee ac cat see TO PE OO 473 CO ari ia esti 473 A EEE E ER OO 473 A A E E 474 ACOSO oe 474 MAMAS ease tote niet ere oued aad 474 A A A 475 andom A E A A AT 476 o 0 debe aaenate dee E E E E iss 476 2 01 OT 477 HOO r n E tat seacoast E E ten a a snion A E TO 478 E CE O E E E ene a eee Semen 478 DOO e E E AE E A EEA EEE AO 479 A E EEE S E N A A E E E A N N O T 479 A cians E ENE tated inv adele aint duautateelis 480 0 0 0 A o o tr nee cer E A ne ee eee ee ee ce er 481 COMPITE AAA 481 A SCEIDU COMMMNANGS 235 4535 datvaiacanaateteiencesneaesuaieicadestacawautenedusduavedesuaseiecsessacowmuecsedes SA EE 482 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual E 482 CIC AI CPP O 482 COS ata 483 0 5 q COPE A rere nay te ee PR en 483 CUE Sao aos 484 A e e e Ea ee ee ae eee 484 e O o einai saiod awe dctuniaelal ale tenenaielas 484 EPOa NSIC A ene Eo cee ee ee 485 EXO AG ns 486 O A 487 A A non go IE oe gest E ee eee cree 488 ce O e uo Pr A
266. not exist the 6 code is executed on every calculation step If clock pin exists the code is executed only on rising edge of logical clock signal The name of the EE main function should be main clock Variables declared in the main code are local and exist only during execution of the main code at each time step Use global variables for storing values that are calculated on one simulation step and then are used on the next simulation step Along with global and local variables the following read only variables can be used in the main code Component parameters such as R1 C2 V period etc t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic Main code can be modified during transient simulation just pause the transient Transient Pause make changes and continue transient Transient Continue The changes will take effect immediately Initial conditions IC Initial conditions IC parameter is a text string that may contain the code assigning initial values to output variables and global variables of the code For example yl 1 2 y2 0 y3 2 345 integral 4 19 counter 100 where y1 y2 and y3 are output variables integral and counter are global variables IC string will be automatically modified by the following commands e Transient Save IC fills
267. nter parameter name manually or select from drop down list The list shows all numerical parameters of the component which is currently selected in the schematic or in the Components Window From Start parameter s value To End parameter s value Points Number of points o Scale Left Parameter s value on the left edge of the screen Right Parameter s value on the right edge of the screen By default the vertical scale is the same as transient screen vertical scale Uncheck Use transient scale checkbox and enter Y axes multiplier and offset Start DC sweep Stop DC sweep Use transient scale for Y axes Horizontal Zoom in Horizontal Zoom out Fit the screen horizontal Vertical Zoom in Vertical Zoom out Fit the screen vertical Fit the screen View Export View DC sweep data in the text table export to text or csv file View Export dialog box will show up 189 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Significant digits ls Time Number of significant digits for the data can be specified Click Export to save the table into the text file as comma separated values e Right click on the window to access relevant commands e Double click on the window to center screen e Left click on the window and drag to select zoom in area o If mouse pointer is moving only up or down two horizontal lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in vertica
268. nterpretation is relatively slow using C model allows very fast iterations of the code When the code is finalized it can be compiled and placed in the DLL for faster simulation see Working with DLL model chapter Execution A principle of C code execution is shown on the following diagram double in double out s e gt Ps if fins 0 out 0 Out else out sqrtfini Meee SS Each input output pin with a name has a variable of the same name associated with the pin A voltage on the input pin of the component for example in is measured by a voltmeter and is assigned to the variable of the same name double in While C code is executed a new value of output variable double out 1s evaluated A voltage equal to out value is set to a grounded voltage source connected to the output pin of the same name out Inputs and outputs Input pins are considered as voltmeters with infinite input impedance Output pins are grounded voltage sources with zero output impedance Input values voltage measured by the voltmeter and output values voltage of the voltage source are accessed through variables of double type with the same names as xi yl pin names for example x1 x2 x3 yl y2 y3 Inputs and x2 ye outputs can also be assigned to array elements for example x 0 13 y3 LMT xiI Input output variables arrays are global variables and should be declared as variables arrays of double type in the
269. o To Ha hd v Fonts Lin Scale OK Cancel 40 0 OOO Es Gd pu al The dialog box allows entering frequencies in the list manually as well as performing the following operations gt o Open frequency list from the text file Eo Save frequency list to the text file wo Sort and refresh frequency list de o Add interval Add frequencies specified in the Interval box From To Points and Scale parameters to the frequency list Frequencies currently existing in the list will not be removed Remove interval Remove frequencies specified in the Interval box From To from the frequency list All frequencies in the From To interval will be removed o Delete all Clear frequency list Gamma and VSWR parameters e Z0 Ohm Characteristic impedance for Gamma and VSWR traces Advanced Click to open Advanced Settings dialog box 224 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Method Select AC simulation method See Simulation Algorithm chapter for details on simulation methods o Linearize schematic Method Linearize schematic Calculate DC operating point If selected DC operating point will be calculated prior to AC analysis This option is not required for linear circuits or 1f Initial Conditions for all components are manually defined o Sweep AC source Method Sweep AC source le 3 Transient calc step 0 1 AC a ude f fio Emor lt W Sweep frequenc
270. odel of FET transistor does not have a body diode If you need a body diode you should add it as an external component 401 BJ NL5 circuit simulator T N FET Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pin Pin2 Pin3 Cmd IC User s Manual T T_NFET_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 402 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T P FET Linear I Switch 3 FET f 1b l SubCir ae v l 2 Vgs P Vel T P FET T T_PFET_Linear nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Linear S A V Slope Hz Unit gain frequency IC A Initial condition drain current Linear FET transistor Voltage controlled current source with specified bandwidth S is open loop slope Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency S and f1 can be set to infinity inf When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined drain current is set to specified output current IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used cj gt i 5 Ygs 7 f1 Equivalent schematic Static characteristic AC response Please note this model of FET transi
271. of Tools window f SE gt Xx xv ae Script e Console y Sweep a Optimization double tau clear for tau 1m tau lt 1 9m tau 1m Ri tau Cl tran Store tau Toolbar buttons perform the following operations e Open script from the text file e Save script to the text file e Run script Stop script execution e Clear text xx HU e Check script code Font Select font of the text ita cor m i 267 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual y e Help Fl Click to open Help To see Help topic on specific operator function or command place cursor on the word in the script text and click the button or press F1 eh eM xv ae Script Consale a Sweep 2 clear fol i tau lm tauc 19m tau for Loop operator Example fori i O iif i f oe De a Place cursor on for operator Click Help button Help on for operator is displayed or press F1 Running script To run the script use any of the following methods e Running script from Tools window o Select Script page o Enter script code or click Open button l select and open script file o Click Run script button gt to run script e Running from Windows environment o Drag and drop script file icon onto NLS icon e Running from command line or another application o Start NL5 with the name of script file as a parameter For example nl5 exe myscript txt Please note that an extension of script f
272. omnected components All pins of the component are not connected to another component wire or ground o Overlapping components and wires An image of schematic element component wire ground is overlapping with another schematic element This may result in non expected connection or lack of connection o Possibly floating schematic Schematic does not have any ground or defined potential voltage source or label in it This may cause convergence problems Go to Warnings page of Preferences to disable all warnings or selected warning types from being displayed Disabled warnings will still be reported in the Transient AC log and can be seen by selecting Transient Log or AC Log command 139 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Messages with error icon notify about errors in component parameters such as value out of valid range or error in formula If errors exist Transient and AC analysis will not be performed Click on the message line to select component or variable with the error Errors are also reported in the Transient AC log and can be seen by selecting Transient Log or AC Log command Right click on the window to see context menu with relevant commands Move mouse pointer over splitter area lb then press left mouse button and drag to resize columns 140 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Schematic Tools To open Schematic Tools dialog box select menu command Schematic Tools or click
273. on PWL pwl Comma separated string K lin Piece wise linear current controlled current source Source gain K is defined by pwl string as a function of input current lin See Working with PWLmodel chapter for details Current controlled current source I I CCCS CCO nI5 Model Parameter Units Description CCO 11 A Current amplitude Sin or Pulse On current Pulse lO A Current baseline Sin or Pulse Off current Pulse dFdl HzZ A Gain Phase deg Phase Type Signal type Sin Square T riangle Sawtooth Current controlled oscillator Output current is a signal with frequency equal to f Hz dFdl lin For Sine signal 10 is baseline and 11 is amplitude For Square Triangle and Sawtooth signals l0 is Off level 11 is On level Phase is additional phase of the signal in degrees Current controlled current source I 1_ CCCS Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Width S Pulse width Threshold A Current threshold 11 A Pulse Off current lO A Phase One shot pulse generator When increasing input current lin crosses Threshold value current pulse of Width duration is generated 10 is pulse Off level 11 is pulse On level If increasing lin crosses Threshold value while pulse is generated the pulse is restarted 333 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Current controlled current source Il CCCS _PWM nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWM 11 A Pulse On c
274. onics as well The eye diagram window is similar to oscilloscope continuously running with specified trigger interval The diagram shows traces between cursors only or on the screen if cursors are disabled E lcr Eye diagram lo 8l 100e 3 E al La T e Settings Opens Settings dialog box nli Eye diagram settings Interval A Y scale e Use transient scale i Multiplier o Offset o Interval s Eye diagram width sampling period FP o Get cursors interval Click to copy interval between cursors to the Interval window o By default diagram Y scale is the same as transient screen vertical scale Uncheck Use transient scale checkbox to enter Y scale Multiplier and Offset 205 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Use transient scale e Vertical Zoom in e Vertical Zoom out e E e Fit the screen vertical e Use horizontal scroll bar to change sampling phase e Right click on the window to access relevant commands e Double click on the window to open Settings dialog box e Mouse wheel with Ctrl and Shift modifiers can be used for scrolling and zooming exactly as in Transient Window 206 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Markers Markers tool provides a convenient way to monitor traces amplitudes at specified points Unlike cursors markers always stay at specified position Number of markers 1s not limited Below y
275. ons Several types of Full Function Software Licenses can be obtained at Software Product website nl5 sidelinesoft com Terms and conditions of each type of Full Function Software License are available at the website and are subject to change without notice Restrictions on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not decompile reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise attempt to derive the source code for the Software Product Restrictions on Alteration You may not modify the Software Product or create any derivative work of the Software Product or its accompanying documentation without obtaining permission of Sidelinesoft Derivative works include but are not limited to translations You may not alter any files or libraries in any portion of the Software Product Consent to Use of Data Sidelinesoft may ask for your permission to collect and use technical information gathered as part of the product support services provided to you 1f any related to the Software Sidelinesoft may use this information solely to improve the Software or to provide customized services to you and will not disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Liability UNLESS OTHERWISE EXPLICITLY AGREED TO IN WRITING BY SIDELINESOFT SIDELINESOFT MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED IN FACT OR IN 497 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual LAW INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITE
276. ontains graph of the function Lower pane contains 2 tabs for entering data and configuration e Move cursor over splitter area 2 then press left mouse button and drag to resize panes e Right click on the graphs area to see context menu with relevant commands e Click OK to accept changes and close dialog box or Cancel to cancel changes e Click Toolbar buttons to perform the following operations o Open data from the file in csv format o Save data into the file in csv format Clear all data o Refresh graphs at xX O kb O o Show z x traces each trace represents one line of the table Total number of traces is m highlighted trace corresponds to the selected cell of the table EH o Show z Y traces each trace represents one column of the table Total number of traces is N highlighted trace corresponds to the selected cell of the table EH e Table tab Provides Table parameter data in the table form for editing Rows consist of data with constant Y value columns with constant x value Click Refresh button to update the graph T e Settings tab Use this tab to configure the graph e Show data points e Show gridlines e Show numbers 118 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Working with C model In C model of the Code component the component function code can be written in C language The code will be interpreted by NL3 during transient simulation Although C code i
277. oolbar button Fl or select Transient Data command in the Main Menu Make sure Traces tab is selected e Inthe Add new trace box select V voltage trace e Double click on V1 and C1 in the components list Voltage traces will be added to the traces list e Click Close button Here is window view before closing ES nli Transient Data car Ge ed GS xX A eS Traces Screen T able Storage F Check to display on the graph Add new trac Trace V C1 fio Scale o Mid 0 Shift h gt width Check all Uncheck all Apply Close 17 uy NLS circuit simulator User s Manual Run transient Click Start transient Toolbar button m or select Transient Start command in the Main Menu A transient will be calculated and displayed nli Transient E 0 3 ME Shift Ctrl click to move cursor 18 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual AC settings Click AC settings Toolbar button T or select AC Settings command in the Main Menu e Click on the Name drop down list in the AC source box and select V1 e Click OK button AC Settings my xj Linearize schematic y 19 BJ NL5 circuit simulator AC data User s Manual Click AC data Toolbar button 3 or select AC Data command in the Main Menu Make sure Traces tab is selected e Inthe Add new trace box select V voltage trace e Double c
278. oom out PgDn Fit the screen vertical Home Fit the screen Shift Home Undo scale Backspace Undo scale Redo scale Show hide Cursors Show hide Data Table Show hide Legend Right maximum Move selected cursor to the nearest right maximum of selected trace Left maximum Move selected cursor to the nearest left maximum of selected trace Right minimum Move selected cursor to the nearest right minimum of selected trace Left minimum Move selected cursor to the nearest left minimum of selected trace 247 At NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Right unity gain Move selected cursor to the nearest right frequency with unity gain magnitude 1 of selected trace gt e Left unity gain Move selected cursor to the nearest left frequency with unity gain magnitude 1 of selected trace Graph commands context menu F e Open Cursors dialog box e Phase Tab gt o Off Do not show phase o On Show magnitude and phase in the same area of the graph o Separate Show magnitude and phase in separate areas of the graph e Traces gt Commands apply to all traces displayed on the graph Open Load traces from nlf data file Import traces from text or csv file Of O O O Save traces into nlf data file y o View Export View traces as a text and save into text or csv file o Copy traces to clipboard g o Paste traces from clipboard ll e Image gt o Copy to clipboard
279. op transient now button Almost all operations in NLS can be performed only when transient is paused or not running However you can change component s parameters component s model and schematic variable at any time even while the transient is running The change will be accepted immediately and the transient will continue with a new component parameter All those values can be changed from the Components window or Variables window Console page of the Script window command line and through HTTP link 167 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Transient window Typical view of transient window and its main components are shown below Data Data 9P CUFSOFS El Legend Right click Right click Remove Zoom ab Rename a ane Graph area Legend Duplicate a Move Run to storage Es Cony 7 Clear storag rc Transient l ioj xj S Insert text i 0 g T Annotate 0 l Ejen Se Mi vc Traces i a bel Image A Preferences 10 10 10 520157 2113 4 7ige8 3 1 49093 ro Je s Fo1 888e 3 11 49093 G9 O41e 3 1 11293 1 1346 1 Jt 200001 1 0 ME vit Cll Click to move cursor NOVATA Data selection Simulation Memory Shift Ctrl Status bar progress used indicators Right click Right click Data Hide Wid Data ab Rename Separate window
280. or A Document A E Font size aa Font Schematic i ld h xl ME Background e Arrow e Draw line with trace color Draw text with trace color a Significant digits 5 E Y Time Frequency 12 Data Cancel Apply A e Font size Set font size of annotation text 4 e Font Select font of annotation text Line width Set width of a line for an arrow pointer and a rectangle e Arrow If selected draw arrow pointer e Draw line with trace color If selected use trace color for an arrow pointer and rectangle e Draw text with trace color If selected use trace color for annotation text Significant digits Set number of significant digits for time frequency and data display e Time Frequency e Data e Colors Double click on the item in the list to change the color Line Text Background 50 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Text Set properties of a text in Transient and AC windows Preferences Preferences Application Document Schematic Drawings __ Background Transient HTTP Link gt Font size Set font size of a text Font Select font of a text e Line width Set width of a line for an arrow pointer and a rectangle e Colors Double click on the item in the list to change the color All as cr mo 0 Line Text Background 51 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Mouse Graphs Set mouse wheel action an
281. or octal format start number with prefix 0 zero then use numbers 0 7 O37 Te OLZ3456 For hexadecimal format use 0x or 0x prefix Then use numbers 0 9 and capital or low case letters A l B 14 C y D y E T F OFE OX L0day 0x L0000 If a value of a number exceeds 32 bit range it will be automatically converted to int64 type Use i164 suffix to explicitly define 64 bit integer 0164 Oxffffffff104 57 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Floating point float double number can use exponential multipliers E or e and case sensitive letter multipliers Letter Multiplier 10 10 10 10 10 10 For example 1 3e 3 AESI LO Oil Oa 300 Me 2AM Letter multiplier can be followed by any text which is considered as units and will be ignored 1 3kOhm 4 inF 0 1mkH 333ps Any text that does not begin with letter multiplier 1s considered as units and will be ignored 1 30hm OOO PES 333apples Letter multiplier and units with or without letter multiplier can be used instead of a decimal point TRS 5n6 3nE3 47F0 252 Zero before decimal point or letter multiplier can be omitted For example 47 n47 LES A number can be entered in decibels using suffix db case insensitive It will be automatically converted to a standard number allowed for positive numbers only 20db 100 3 0TaB 1414164723907 6DBOZ 19998301800903 Infinite value is denoted by int Comple
282. or on the screen 1f cursors are disabled rc Smith chart x a R E HH ED Ay 4 R 54 it ad 107 Z 54 89 Phase 4 29 F T e Settings Opens Settings dialog box lcr Smith chart settings YSWA circles ep X Show Z and Gamma traces only Show frequency marker Status Grid e F f Impedance as C Admittance mal bass C Abs Phase e Gamma C Gamma Polar Iw VOW Click on chart to center SWA circles o VCWR circles Show circles with specified VSWR values around selected point Values are shown in the VSWR list a Add VSWR circle to the list Remove VSWR circle from the list Delete all 256 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Click on chart to center VSWR circles If checked VSWR circles will be shown around arbitrary selected point on the chart rc Smith chart 4 ij R 17 09 73 74 Z 75 7 Phase 103 i If unchecked VSWR circles will be shown around the center of the chart o Show Z and Gamma traces only Ignore all other trace types such as V I etc o Show frequency marker Show frequency marker for each trace frequency slider bar and current frequency at the status bar lcr Smith chart O e ma F 426 6e 3 R 170 4e 3 X 607 5e 3 Z 631e 3 E Move slider by mouse mouse wheel or use Arrow Right Arrow Left PgUp PgDn Home or End keys to move the marker 257 BJ N
283. ormat as a component except it does not have parameters For example Ereg max Limit Xl var Please note that this applies only to a schematic variable a variable defined in the Variables window Variables used in C code script Code component comply with C language standard Trace The basic name of transient or AC trace that holds current simulation data consists of the letter specifying type of the trace v I P followed by component s name in parentheses VR LiCl BES The trace with basic name can t be renamed When trace is duplicated loaded from file or pasted it can be renamed to an arbitrary text CODY OGE VEB old trace of R1 V pulse The name of the trace of Function type is the function itself Renaming the trace will change the function AR Ay re ye 60 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Trace and cursors data Trace and cursors data shown in the transient or AC table value at cursor min max mean etc and trace value at specified time can be used in the script expressions The trace should be added to the Transient or AC Data but does not need to be displayed on the graph or in the table To access trace data use the following notation Cursors screen left ELONE delta position of the cursor or left edge of the screen position of right cursor or right edge of the screen right left Transient amplitude VERT 1 2 value at t 1 2 V R1 l
284. ou can see 4 markers shown on the transient graph with traces amplitude displayed in the Markers table 210 xi x MA 10 10 10 Vict 1 90489 2 9834 361757 4 03599 e Markers table consists of the traces displayed on the graph e Add new marker Marker time is a time of selected cursor Remove marker from the table Select click any cell in the table which belongs to the marker s column then click the button On the example above the first marker t 2 20503 will be removed e Delete all markers e Export markers table in the text or csv file Annotate selected trace at markers positions on the transient graph ay o xX e Annotate all traces at markers positions on the transient graph e Show on the graph Select to show markers on the transient graph Markers width and color can be changed on Graphs page of Preferences dialog box 207 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Power Power tool calculates Power Factor and THD Total Harmonic Distortion Select Power Factor page to calculate voltage and current RMS power and Power Factor lol xi 7 1 3 power_factor Por NO Power Factor THO Y trace VIRT trace 41 I ae Poraz 03MB Shift Ctrl Click to move RMS 835 7515787 762 3 Power 500 767453763e 3 PF B47 1013490088 3 e V trace Select voltage trace from
285. output is Zero F s is ignored Example F x x x F x x sin t F x P r1 P r2 Please note that input voltage x and variables V I and P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that Support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter s p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output voltage IC 354 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Summing amplifier O O_SumAmp_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string K Vin1 Vin2 Piece wise linear amplifier Amplifier gain K is defined by pwl string as a function of sum of input voltages Vin1 Vin2 See Working with PWL model chapter for details O Summing amplifier O O_SumAmp_SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File nam
286. output is set to specified level IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step Y Y _Logic 2_Delay nl5 Parameter Units Description Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High Logical component with two inputs and delay Logic function AND OR XOR and output type inverted or non inverted depend on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button The output is delayed by Delay time Input pulses shorter than Delay will not pass through and will not affect output When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC 445 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Views Y Logic 3 Model Logic Logic 3 Logic Delay amp 2 g V 3 z gt 5 7 Views are used to specify logical function and inverted or non inverted output Y Y_Logic 3_Logic nl5 Parameter Units Description IC Initial condition Low High Logical component with three inputs Logic function AND OR XOR and output type inverted or non inverted depend on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is a
287. ove mouse pointer over crossing and click on Connection image in the Selection Bar h Automatic No connection Press Connection Diagonal wire connection not connected All the unnecessary connection points will be automatically deleted during schematic check Warning diagonal wire may be not connected to other wires even if connection point is placed at the crossing Try to avoid connection of two diagonal wires at one point Ground To place a ground press G key or click on Ground image in the Selection Bar The ground is common for entire document including all sheets and all subcircuits 76 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Component Each component type has a designated letter and symbol Letter identifies functional group of a component For instance all component types with letter S are switches Selection Bar has a tab designated for each letter When placing component by keyboard the letter key 1s used to select component type Default name of a component begins with this letter Symbol is an image of a component type how component is displayed on the schematic Selection Bar contains symbols of all available component types Some component types are customized symbol of those components as well as number of pins pins location and names can be edited in the Edit Component dialog box The dialog box shows up automatically at the moment when component is being placed and can be
288. pace to switch to Wire mode then move cursor using arrow keys A new wire appears in selected state To complete the wire press Space to switch back to Selection mode or change cursor direction and continue new wire in another direction Press Space Press Right Press Up Press Up Press Space Mouse Click Wire button Sto switch to Wire mode Click on the wire starting point hold mouse button and drag to the ending point of the wire then release mouse button You can do two orthogonal pieces of wire at once Click Selection button f to switch back to Selection mode Click Wire button Click and drag right then up Release left button Click Selection button 75 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual You can use both keyboard and mouse to draw wires For instance use Space key to switch between Selection and Wire modes and use mouse to draw wires To draw diagonal wire hold Ctrl key while dragging and releasing mouse button Another way to make diagonal wire is to select existing wire then click and drag the end of the wire Hold Ctrl key click and drag Click to select Click and drag the end Connection Three wires coming to one point are always connected Connection point will be automatically placed here during schematic check Two crossing wires are not connected by default To connect these wires place connection point move cursor to the crossing and press dot key or m
289. permanently and can t be restored Schematic should contain at least one sheet so the last sheet cannot be deleted Move and Copy e To move element click on the element and drag to a new location e To move schematic element with rubber bands hold Shift key click on the element and drag to a new location 87 Du y 5 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e To move block with rubber bands hold Shift key click on selection and drag to a new location e To copy schematic element with rubber bands hold Ctrl and Shift keys click on the element and drag to a new location 88 fsa NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e To copy block with rubber bands hold Ctrl and Shift keys click on the element and drag to a new location Move copy operations can also be done with standard commands and shortcuts Edit Copy Ctrl C Edit Cut Ctrl X and Edit Paste Ctrl V Use these commands to move copy elements to another sheet document or NL5 application as well When component is moved copied above existing wire a piece of the wire underneath the component will be automatically removed so that no editing of the wire 1s required Disable and Enable Schematic elements can be disabled Disabled elements are shown in disabled color and are not used for simulation Disabling elements allows temporary exclude elements from simulation without deleting To disable right cli
290. ph area and its components are shown below Cursors Text Gridlines Annotation Magnitude traces Phase traces 233 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Graph Graph navigation can be performed by commands available in the AC context menus AC toolbar buttons shortcuts keyboard keys and mouse Very often the same operation can be performed by different ways For instance zooming graph in out can be done using keyboard keys only mouse only or both It is user s choice to use the most effective and convenient one There are 3 graph operation modes Iz e Cursors Moving cursors lg e Zoom Zooming graph using mouse Moe Scrolling Scrolling the graph The mode can be selected by clicking the button on the AC toolbar Also there are quick ways to switch from Cursors mode to Zoom and Scrolling modes Ctrl down e Press and hold Ctrl click and drag mouse to zoom the graph bs AT A Release Ctrl to return to Cursors mode ee Ctrl up Shift down e Press and hold Shift click and drag mouse to scroll the graph x AAA Release Shift to return to Cursors mode gt el o Shift up Traces are shown on the graph with their individual width and colors defined on the Traces page of AC Data window All traces have the same horizontal and vertical scale Gridlines spacing is selected automatically so that last significant digit step is 1 2 or 5 and distance between gridlines is approximately equal to the value specifie
291. pi To assign one component to a new or existing group select component in the Components Window and click Group button W To manage all groups or assign a number of components to groups use Groups dialog box To open Groups dialog box select Schematic Groups command Typical view of the dialog box is shown below Groups x Toolbar gt de ab A Pon Mame Value Group a rt 1e 3 Res Hz le 3 Rez Groups list CI R3 le 3 Components list O a le 3 ORS le 3 LIRE le 3 LIAR le 3 R8 le 3 Rez R9 lets Hes Oj 10 le 3 137 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Existing groups are shown in the Groups list Click on the group name to display components e Components are shown in the Components list The components shown either belong to selected group have a check mark in the list and are selected on the schematic or are of the same type and can be assigned to the selected group e Move mouse pointer over splitter area lb then press left mouse button and drag to resize columns Click toolbar buttons to perform the following operations e Add new group Add group dialog will show up x Enter group name EE oo Cancel Enter group name and click OK A new group will be added to the Groups list and all the components will be displayed in the Components list Check a component to assign it to the group When at least one component is assigned to the group only components o
292. ple Function model of some components has output signal always delayed by one calculation step If step is constant this can be considered as a known constant delay which can be properly taken care of If calculation step is changing the resulting variable delay might be really hard to deal with especially in the systems with closed loop Select Do not reduce calculation step check box to disable automatic step reduction Data sampling step For accurate simulation the calculation step may be required to be very small However storing all the simulation data in the memory is not needed if the signal of interest is smooth and changing relatively slow Data sampling step options allow performing simulation with as small step as needed but storing only part of the data thus saving significant amount of memory The following options are available e Same as calculation save all data All the SS calculated data are saved into memory This e ee option provides most accurate data display and MIMI hm h analysis with the highest memory consumption P hpo e ee ee e haa ha I i 0 rpi My mE iil stia e Less than or equal to If selected a maximum 7 E same as calculation sampling step should be entered as well The data are saved with specified sampling step In addition it saves all the critical data points such as extremes max and min sharp edges switching points etc This provides sufficient memory saving with
293. point calculation at t 0 followed by one or more linear range simulations The performance of the algorithm can be optimized by a number of parameters located in the Transient Settings and Advanced Settings dialog boxes DC operating point Simulation always starts at t 0 First Direct Current DC operating point is calculated The calculation is performed considering Initial Condition IC of the components For instance capacitor is replaced by voltage source if IC voltage is specified or ignored open circuit if IC is not specified blank Inductor is replaced by current source if IC current is specified or by a short circuit if IC is not specified Diode is considered an open circuit if IC state is Off and short circuit if IC state 1s On If circuit has more than one steady state it can be set to a specific state by defining proper ICs Another way to do that is using label model Label and specifying VIC parameter of the label If VIC is not blank the temporary voltage source VIC is connected to the label through resistor R only during DC operating point calculation When calculation is done voltage source is removed The result of DC operating point calculation is known voltages currents and states of all components When DC operating point is found a first linear range simulation starts Linear range simulation In the linear range the circuit is described by the system of linear differential equations which is
294. pointer line with arrow Lock pointer Lock the end of the pointer the end of the pointer Array _ will not move even when text is being moved E Pointer e Line width Specify line width of the outline and pointer e Color Double click on the item in the list to change the color Click Close button when done to close dialog box To edit the text double click on the text or right click on the text and select Edit text command from context menu The same Text dialog box will show up To move the text click on the text and drag If pointer is locked Move text only text will move To move the pointer only click on the text to select then click and drag square marker at the end of pointer Move pointer To place list of variables on the schematic click Insert variables button Variables and their values will be shown similar to a text The text can be formatted but cannot be manually edited 1t will be automatically updated as variables or their values change 84 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Scrolling and Zooming To scroll schematic use any of the following methods Move schematic cursor to the edge of schematic window the window will scroll automatically Move mouse pointer to the edge of schematic window Mouse pointer will take big arrow shape Click or hold left mouse button to scroll schematic nli Schematic atte shift Chl Click t In Se
295. put is delayed by Delay time Input pulses shorter than Delay will not pass through and will not affect output When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC 449 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y D Views Y Y flip flop Logic Delay Pe V L Models Traces l Views are used to specify clock polarity and location of D flip flop Model Logic D flip flop Model Delay Y Y_DFlipFlop_Logic nl5 Parameter Units Description IC Initial condition Low High D flip flop Clock polarity rising or falling edge depends on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step Y Y _DFlipFlop Delay nl5 Parameter Units Description Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High D flip flop with delay Clock polarity rising or falling edge depends on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and thre
296. rallel with 3 pF capacitor R R_Resistor_SubCir nl5 Parameter Units Description File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 359 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual R Potentiometer i Potentiometer R 1 Position 3 2 Y a 5 R Position gt E E 7 a R Potentiometer R R_Potentiometer_Potentiometer nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Position Position of the wiper 0 1 Potentiometer Position of the wiper is referenced to the terminal with dot 0 wiper is connected to the terminal with dot 1 wiper is connected to another terminal 360 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual R Views Voltage controlled resistor PWL yl Models Traces AZ AY Z A _ R Voltage controlled resistor R R_VCR_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string R Vin Piece wise linear voltage controlled resistor At any moment resistor is a linear resistor lts resistance R is a function of control voltage V R Vin 1 owl string defines resistance as a function of control voltage Vin See Working with PWL model chapter for details 361 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual R Views Current controlled resistor PWL
297. ration click Ctrl Y or click Redo button ru An unlimited number of undo operations may be reversed with the redo command Size of the Undo buffer is unlimited and by default the buffer keeps all changes since the document is created or loaded from the file and buffer is cleared when schematic is saved into the file However for optimal performance the size number of undo steps may be specified on the Document page of Preferences dialog box Also unselecting option Clear Undo buffer on schematic change allows keeping all changed done since the file was created or loaded from the file and never clear the buffer Undo operation does not apply to component parameters changed during Sweep Optimization Script execution or done from Console tool 92 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Schematic editing commands The following schematic editing commands buttons and shortcuts are available in the Main Menu Main Toolbar Schematic Toolbar and schematic context menu e Show schematic window F2 3 e Schematic Tools woe Check schematic e Sheets Open Sheets dialog box Th e Groups Open Groups dialog box e Parts list Show parts list in the Properties dialog box e Attributes gt o Name Toggle attribute name display o Value Toggle attribute value display HE e Image gt o Copy to clipboard Copy image of schematic window to the clipboard emp O Save as BMP Save image of schematic window to a file in bmp
298. rcuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 427 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual W Wattmeter yy Wattmeter 2 3 S y P Vel W Wattmeter W W_Wattmeter_Wattmeter nl5 Model No parameters Wattmeter Wattmeter Short circuit between current ports open circuit between voltage ports Can be used to measure power in grounded or non grounded load 428 BJ NL5 circuit simulator X X Delay Model Delay X Delay Model SubCir Delay Parameter tO IC Units S V Models User s Manual Delay oa SubCir E Vin y 7 Traces P Vel X X_Delay_Delay nl5 Description Delay Initial condition output voltage Delay Output voltage is equal to input voltage delayed by delay time tO V t Vin t t0 where tis current time When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC or if IC is blank to input voltage Then output voltage is not changing until delay time tO The model allocates memory for storing delayed data only when needed and frees it immediately when possible At transient start an approximate amount of needed memory is estimated based on calculation step and if it exceeds a limit specified in preferences Transient page the warning message Is displayed Parameter File Pin Pin2 Cmd IC Units Description File name of subcircuit schematic
299. rcuit simulator F Function 2 Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pin Pin2 Pin3 Cmd IC User s Manual F F _Function 2 SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 317 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Custom function Function 1 x1 He F x Vy P Vel vy This is a customized component A component can be edited in the Edit Component dialog box See Editing customized component chapter for instructions on editing a component This component may have arbitrary size up to 32 width X 8 height up to 8 inputs on the left side one output on the right side one or no clock pins on the bottom side Custom input and output names Examples of Custom function component ic 318 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F F_Custom_ Function _Ex1 nl5 F Custom function F F_Custom_Function_Ex2 nl5 F F_Custom_ Function _Ex3 nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Function F x V Output as function of the inputs F s AC transfer function in s domain IC V Initial condition output voltage Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines output voltage as a function of the following variables
300. reement is the correction or replacement of the Software Product Selection of whether to correct or replace shall be solely at the discretion of Sidelinesoft Any claim must be made within the applicable warranty period All warranties cover only defects arising under normal use and do not include malfunctions or failure resulting from misuse abuse neglect alteration improper installation or a virus All limited warranties on the Software Product are granted only to you and are non transferable You agree to indemnify and hold Sidelinesoft harmless from all claims judgments liabilities expenses or costs arising from your breach of this Agreement and or acts or omissions Severability If any provision of this Agreement shall be held to be invalid or unenforceable the remainder of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect To the extent any express or implied restrictions are not permitted by applicable laws these express or implied restrictions shall remain in force and effect to the maximum extent permitted by such applicable laws Termination This Agreement is effective until terminated Without prejudice to any other rights Sidelinesoft may terminate this Agreement if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this Agreement In such event you must destroy all copies of the Software License Governing Law Dispute Resolution This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Colorado U S A without regard to
301. reen T able Storage F Check to display on the graph x fo Shift amp Check all Uncheck all fi Width Apply Close Add new trace Select trace type in the left list V voltage I current P power Variable schematic variable defined in the Variables window Function arbitrary function If V I or P trace is selected the right list will show components available for this trace type the model of the component should support selected type Select component and click Add button Y or double click on the component name to add new trace to the trace list The name of the trace consists of the letter followed by the name of component in parentheses VRT I CA E If Variable trace is selected the right list will show all variables available in the schematic Select variable and click Add button 4 or double click on the variable name to add new trace to the trace list The name of the trace is the same as variable name 163 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual To add several V I P or Variable traces at a time select several components using mouse Ctrl and Shift keys then click Add button E ES nli Transient Data ais MEA S x e Traces Screen Tonle Storage p Check to display on the graph Add new trac vici J WIRT iT a Add C FOO AAN Ho traces selected i Scale 7 fi Shift s width heck all Uncheck
302. rences Open preferences from a file e Reset preferences to default Color scheme Color scheme is applied to all Document windows Schematic Transient Transient Tools AC AC Tools Changing color scheme also changes colors of transient and AC traces MM Color with black background m e Color with white background m e Black and white This scheme can be temporary used to save black and white schematic or graph image in the file or copy to clipboard 36 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Application Set application options x g Application Automatically check for updates a schematic o Drawings Every 30 days K Moyse a r NL5 can automatically check for updates on the NLS website 2 Components HLS does not download and install updates it only notifies i Symbols If new update is available IF your PC has antivirus ortand firewall service active you may be asked for granting permission to access NLS website S Annotation 10 Y Most Recently Used files Mouse Subcircuit Library path a Transient HTTP Link Beep on errors and messages Cancel Apply e Automatically check for updates Can be set in the range Never Every 90 days NL5 can automatically check for updates on the NL5 website NLS does not download and install updates it only notifies if a new update is available If your PC has anti virus or and firewall service active you m
303. rent time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F t is blank voltage is zero Example F t sin t 1 cos t 01 F t V R1 I R1 Please note that V I and P variables are taken at previous calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop 411 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Voltage source V V_VS File nl5 Model Parameter Units Description File File File name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay Voltage source defined in the text file File parameter is a file name with full path to the file If the file is located in the same directory as schematic file the path can be omitted Signal is defined in following format lt if first line does not start with a number it is ignored gt tO VO tl V1 tn Vn where all t and V can be numerical values or expressions If t lt t0 signal is VO If t0 lt t lt t1 signal value is linearly interpolated between VO and V1 etc If t gt tn then signal value is Vn if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise signal defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example 0 0 1 2 4 3 570 8 0 If Cycle Yes Delay 0 the following voltage will be generated V Voltage source V V_VS_Trace
304. resistance as a function of control voltage The following table shows step like parameter for voltage or current controlled components available in NLS Current controlled amplifier C lin Current controlled capacitor 105 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual PWL model for non linear resistor R is described below as an example PWL models for other components are similar with just slight appropriate modifications A step like parameter pwl is a string with comma separated values defined in the following format RO V1 R1 V2 R2 VN RN where RO 1s resistance while voltage across the resistor is less than v1 R1 is resistance while voltage across the resistor is between v1 and v2 RN is resistance while voltage across the resistor is greater than vn Values v1 vw should be given in ascending order Resulting PWL characteristic is calculated automatically and always passes through the origin 0 0 point For voltage or current controlled components PWL characteristic is not applicable Step like function defined by parameter pwl can be symmetrical or non symmetrical Symmetrical function is defined in the interval from zero to plus infinity the negative part is symmetrical to positive one Only positive part of the symmetrical function is defined all voltages V1 VN 1n the pwl string are positive The following R V and I V graphs represent parameter and PWL characteristic de
305. ring Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 303 BJ NL5 circuit simulator D Current controlled thyristor DH pt Views pt A D Current controlled thyristor Model Thyristor Parameter Units Vd V lhold A Threshold A IC Models User s Manual Thyristor SubCir o Iin y I P Vel D D_CCT_Thyristor nl5 Description Forward voltage drop Holding current Current threshold Initial condition Off On Ideal thyristor Thyristor has two states Off state non conducting open circuit On state conducting ideal diode with Vd forward voltage drop If control current lin is greater than Threshold thyristor is in On state ideal diode When control current drops below Threshold thyristor stays in On state as long as current exceeds holding current Ihold and voltage V is not negative When calculating DC operating point thyristor is set to the state specified in IC D Current controlled thyristor Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC D D_CCT_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions strin
306. rmat command in the context menu then select Attributes page For the component highlighted in the list select format and values to display i Selected components Select values to display model Pulse YW T 10 e YO 0 Default Y Period 1 n Aral kal width 500e 3 l Slope Linear i ll Alsze 0 1 23 Ohm ml 7 R 1 23 ut A 1 23 Ohm 81 AE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Drawings line rectangle oval Drawings line rectangle oval do not affect functionality of the schematic and are used solely as a decoration Drawings can be placed with resolution higher than schematic grid The drawings grid can be set up in the range 1 1 down to 1 32 of schematic grid Drawings grid can be changed on Drawings page of Preferences dialog box e To place line click Line button to switch to Line mode e To place rectangle click Rectangle button _ to switch to Rectangle mode e To place oval click Oval button 2 to switch to Oval mode Click on the starting point hold mouse button and drag to ending point of the drawing then release mouse button Bai gt ul Line Rectangle square Oval circle To draw square or circle hold Ctrl key while dragging and releasing mouse button Click Selection button 1 to switch back to Selection mode To change si
307. roach is implemented in NLS The current or voltage delta function is ii shown as a triangle pulse with the duration of each slope equal to minimal calculation step used at that moment and the area satisfies charge or magnetic flux conservation law If calculation step is reasonably small the displayed pulse will be short and will have high enough amplitude to be visually considered as a delta function At the same time the integral of the pulse will give true value of the charge for current pulse or magnetic flux voltage pulse Changing calculation step will change duration and amplitude of the displayed pulse however the integral of the pulse will stay the same Convergence In Spice based simulators convergence problem may occur any time during DC analysis and transient analysis Since NLS is piece wise linear simulator most of the time it is dealing with linear systems which do never experience convergence problem The only time NL5 simulation may have some difficulties is the moment when one or more components change their state or linear segment For systems with ideal piece wise linear components a typical situation 1s when several components have to change states exactly at the same moment otherwise the system won t converge For example in a standard four diodes bridge rectifier diodes are always switching by pairs or even all diodes at a time With ideal diodes having zero resistance when closed and infinite resista
308. rrent lin See Working with PWL model chapter for details When calculating DC operating point if IC is defined capacitor is replaced with voltage source equal to IC If IC is not defined blank capacitor is temporarily removed open circuit DC operating point calculated and then the voltage found across the capacitor is assigned to the capacitor as its initial voltage 294 BJ NL5 circuit simulator D Diode DH D Diode Model Parameter Diode V9 IC Units V Models User s Manual Diode Storage Soft PWL SubCir P Vel Traces D D_Diode_Diode nl5 Description Forward voltage drop Initial condition On Off Ideal diode If V gt Va diode is On short circuit Otherwise diode is Off open circuit 1 0 Vd y When calculating DC operating point diode is set to the state specified in IC 295 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual D Diode D D_Diode_Storage nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Storag e Vd V Forward voltage drop t S Recombination time constant IC Initial condition Off On ICQ C A s Initial condition charge Charge storage diode Simplified equivalent schematic of the model is the following r V Wr Ti Q 1 Forward current 2 Reverse current 3 No current V Vd 1 gt 0 Q gt 0 V 0 1 lt 0 Q gt 0 V lt 0 1 0 Q 0 The diode has internal capacitor C and resistor R with the time constant RC t Q is the charge on the capacitor
309. rs RMS calculated on the trace with subtracted mean value o freq calculated frequency of the signal between cursors Frequency is calculated based on number and intervals between points where the trace is crossing its mean level o period 1 freq O O O 0 O When Table page is selected checkboxes in the trace list specify traces shown in the table Scrolling and Zooming To scroll graph use any of the following methods Move mouse pointer to the left or right edge of the graph Mouse pointer will take big arrow shape Click or hold left mouse button to scroll graph Cursors mode lx hold Shift key then click and drag graph Scrolling mode M click and drag graph Hold Ctrl key and rotate mouse wheel to scroll horizontally Hold Shift key and rotate mouse wheel to scroll vertically Press Right and Left keys Press End to center beginning of the traces set to the middle of the screen Press Ctrl End to center end of the traces Press Shift End to center middle of the traces Zoom mode te double click on the graph to center this point To zoom graph use any of the following methods Rotate mouse wheel to zoom horizontally Hold Ctrl and Shift key and rotate mouse wheel to zoom vertically Click toolbar buttons or use keyboard shortcuts or right click on the graph select Zoom then select command Horizontal Zoom in Ctrl PgUp Horizontal Zoom out Ctrl PgDn Fit the screen horizon
310. rties of schematic New properties will be applied to all new and existing schematic elements except elements with customized formatted properties Preferences Schematic von Preferences Application Double click to ch the col dd Document A ho y A Te Ean OUDE CICE to Change he color fi Line width gt Components gt 2 Cursor width E Component Text Symbols haz z C Cursor Me arnings 1432 Y Attributes grid C Pan Graphs Selected gt Table ae a teaced If Show grid points lay Disabled 5 Annotation 123 Show node numbers M Show hints Cancel Apply 39 bL NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual A e Font size Set font size of component name and value e Font Select font of component name and value e Line width Set width of a line wires and components e Cursor width Set width of a line of cursor image e Attributes grid Select grid size for component attributes location relative to schematic grid size e Show grid points If selected show schematic grid points i23 e Show node numbers If selected show schematic node numbers Ej e Show hints If selected show component name model and parameters in the hint box when mouse pointer is moved over component e Colors Double click on the item in the list to change the color Background Wire Ground Component Text Cursor Grid Selected Disabled 4
311. s functions commands components and models For detailed information refer to this Manual To open Help select Help Help Main menu command For context Help click F1 hot key anywhere in the program or Help button which is available in some windows and dialog boxes If you cannot see content of Help file most likely the file is blocked To unblock e Locate n15 chm file in the NLS directory e Right click the file and then click Properties e Click Unblock 33 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Hot keys F1 Help F2 Show schematic window F3 Show hide components window F4 Show hide variables window FS Show transient window F6 Start transient F7 Continue transient F8 Show AC window F9 Start AC 34 User s Manual BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Preferences NES preferences are used to customize different features of the application such as look and feel fonts colors formats default parameters memory management etc Preferences apply to the whole application not to the particular document schematic Changing preferences does not affect simulation results Preferences are stored in the same directory as n15 exe 1n the file called n15 n1p Preferences are saved into the file every time Apply or OK button in the Preferences dialog box is clicked and on exiting NLS At start up NL5 loads last saved preferences from the file Preferences can also be saved in the custom preferences f
312. s or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state defined in IC 379 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT logic controlled switch S S SPDT_LCS Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Width S Pulse width Active Active state Off On One shot pulse generator Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance When increasing input voltage Vin crosses logical threshold switch is set to active state for Width time interval If increasing Vin crosses logical threshold value while switch is in active state the pulse is restarted To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button 380 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT logic controlled switch S S_SPDT_LCS_Steps nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Steps Roff Ohm Off state resistance Ron Ohm On state resistance Slope Type of resistance change Linear Cos Log Ramp S Resistance ramp time Steps Number of resistance steps in the ramp IC Initial condition Off On Switch with resistance ramping When increasing input voltage Vin crosses logical threshold resistance of common to pin with dot path starts ramping
313. s always displayed in the AC Window regardless what data tab is selected It is not cleared when new run starts and can be used as a reference trace for simulation It also can be renamed to arbitrary text Simulation data is stored in the operating memory 219 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual AC Settings Click AC settings toolbar button T or select AC Settings command AC Settings dialog box will show up AC Settings AL source Method Linearize schematic G Hame M Calculate DC operating point Frequency Interval fi eR From Hz fi e 3 To Hz FOO Points Log Scale Use current screen Gamma and WS WA 50 f0 0 Ohm Advanced Lancel AC Source Enter the name of AC source component or select the name from drop down list Any voltage source current source or label can be used as AC source The AC source component may have any model except File and SubCir so that there is no need to set the model of the component to Sin the model will be set to Sin automatically and restored back what AC analysis complete When AC analysis is being performed the DC voltage current of the component will be set to its DC value at t 0 and AC voltage current required for AC analysis will be added to that DC level AC source component name will be marked with AC text on the schematic and in the Components wndow AC source component can also be selected from Schem
314. s button b pwl parameter is calculated so that PWL characteristic fits the function Results are displayed on the graph Adjust points To values in the data table or add new points rows to obtain required accuracy of the approximation Select Automatic update check box to perform approximation automatically on any changes in the data table adding removing rows or modifying function when Enter button clicked To approximate function with automatic points selection specify the range of the function From To and select number of intervals in the range Intervals 109 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Click Approximate in the range button 5d pwl parameter is calculated so that PWL characteristic fits the function Intervals between points are automatically selected to minimize approximation error across the range Results are displayed on the graph T e Settings tab Use this tab to configure the graph e Show PML graphs e Show qridlines e Show data paints e Show numbers e Show function Show approximation errar multiplied by fi D Since approximation error is typically very small use multiplier to scale error on the graph as needed 110 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Working with PWL source PWL Piece Wise Linear model is also used to describe piece wise linear voltage or current source pwl parameter of the model defines time value pairs in the fol
315. s can be selected in the list using mouse Ctrl and Shift keys Click Check all to check all al traces Uncheck all to uncheck all traces Most of toolbar commands apply to selected traces only Please note selected trace is highlighted in the list and trace selection state 1s not related to trace checkbox state On the screenshot above both traces are checked and only V R1 is selected Double click on the trace to change the color of the trace This chapter describes toolbar commands and Traces page only Other pages are described in the AC Window chapter Graph Data table and Storage Toolbar Toolbar button commands apply to all or selected traces Some of those commands are also accessible through context menus in the AC Window la e Open file Load traces from nlf data file e Import traces from a text file created by other tools Format of the file is similar to the export format The first line is a header line 1t may have any text in the first column and trace names in other columns The first column consists of frequency in Hz other columns consist trace data Trace data may have one column per trace or two columns per trace The first trace column is magnitude absolute value or dB and it has trace name in the header line The second trace column if exists is phase in degrees and it has phase text in the header line If second trace column does not exist trace phase is set to zero If trace nam
316. s completed If called from console or HTTP link returns immediately Use ready command to check for analysis completion Examples acC acC acC acC acC clear 1M 1M LM IM Usage clear 100M 100M 100M Description Clear storage 5004 5003 Erps 482 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual close Usage close Description Close active document cont Usage Conty cont screen Cont Screen Step Description Continue transient screen screen size step calculation step If called from the script command will not return until transient is completed If called from console or HTTP link returns immediately Use ready command to check for transient completion Examples cont cont Lm cont im LON 483 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Cursors Usage Cursors cere CLIO Cursors On CULESOLrs OL gt Description cursors left right set cursors transient or AC to specified positions and show cursors left position of the left cursor step position of the right cursor cursors on showcursors cursors off hide cursors Examples Cursors Lady 25 Cursors OL display Usage display on display off Description display on show transient and AC windows display off hide transient and AC windows exit Usage exit Description Close all documents and exit NL5 Cannot be called from console command line 484
317. s license information from the server The number of simultaneously running NLS5 applications number of seats is unlimited Personal License Personal License allows unlimited non expirable use of NL5 on any PC The license is issued to a person and can be installed only on computers where the license owner is using NL3 on regular basis 22 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual II User Interface 23 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual NLS Graphical User Interface GUI is based on a standard Microsoft Windows Multi Document Interface MDI architecture It consists of different interface components such as windows dialogs menus toolbars etc NL3 supports many commands and shortcuts that are commonly used in Windows applications for instance Edit Copy Ctrl C Edit Paste Ctrl V Window Tile using of Ctrl key along with mouse for select copy operation using window scrollbars etc Other commands are very intuitive so that it would not take long to start working with schematic Preferences are used to customize application look and feel and default parameters Printing allows convenient layout and formatting of windows to be printed Data format used in NL5 mostly complies with common engineering and scientific practice It makes it easy to learn and use by any person familiar with other popular tools 24 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Graphical User Interface Main Window NLS Main
318. selected element block or new component right clockwise Rotate left Ctrl L Rotate selected element block or new component left counterclockwise Mirror Ctrl M Mirror selected component block or new component flip around vertical axis Flip Ctrl F Flip selected component block or new component flip around horizontal axis Next view Select next view of selected or new component with multiple views Rotate attributes Ctrl T Rotate attributes of selected component Edit text Edit selected text Run script Run script from selected text Edit component Open Edit component dialog box Available for customized components Open subcircuit Open subcircuit schematic file Available for components with SubCir model only if subcircuit file name is defined Enable Enable selected elements Disable Disable selected elements Add trace gt Yo Voltage Add transient voltage trace for selected component If wire is selected adds label first and then adds voltage trace for label Current Add transient current trace for selected component Power Add transient power trace for selected component q Em Em AC Voltage Add AC voltage trace for selected component If wire is selected adds label first and then adds voltage trace for label I o AC Current Add AC current trace for selected component di o Set AC Source Set selected component as an AC source for AC analysis Zoom gt o 25 2
319. set active cursor to the time point where annotation is needed right click on the graph select Annotate then select Selected trace or All traces command The same buttons are available in the Transient toolbar Annotation s will be added only if trace data exists at cursor s time If cursors are disabled annotation will be added approximately at 1 3 of a screen Annotation font colors number of significant digits and some other properties can be specified on Annotation page of Properties To change annotation text and annotation specific properties double click on the annotation or right click on the annotation and select Edit annotation command from context menu Annotate dialog box will show up 175 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual ES jw Name fn ey Time Value Apply to all annotations Enter text here Enter text in the text box The text will be simultaneously shown on the annotation The following options and formatting are available e Name Display trace name in the text e Time Display time of the annotation in the text e Value Display trace value amplitude in the text Alignment Set alignment of multi line text Align left Center Align right Orientation Change orientation of the text i e Rotate left 4 Rotate right e Apply to all annotations Select to apply current settings to all annotations on the graph To move annotation text keeping pointer at th
320. several times Press C key and then press Enter to place a capacitor Press G key to place a ground Schematic is ready Here is what you are expected to see nli Schematic 14 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Edit component parameters Now you will use mouse to select a component and keyboard to enter parameters Double click on the voltage source V1 The Components window will show up On the left pane V1 should be selected Right pane shows component name V1 model V and parameters Just one parameter V Click L button right to the model name A drop down window will show available models for the voltage source Select Pulse Double click on the resistor R1 on the left pane A resistance value let 3 will be selected on the right pane Press 1 one key resistance will change to 1 Ohm Double click on the capacitor C1 on the left pane then change capacitance le 9 to 1 Components are ready Here is a result nli Components OS abl ELISAN EE 1 C 15 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Transient settings Click Transient settings Toolbar button E or select Transient Settings command in the Main Menu You don t need to change anything here but you can if you wish Click OK button Transient Settings le 3 16 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Transient data Click Transient data T
321. shold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button Flip flop outputs are delayed by Delay time Output pulses with duration shorter than Delay will not show up When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC 450 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y SR trigger Logic Delay Models Traces Views are used to specify clock and S R inputs polarity and location of output pins Y SR trigger Y Y_SRTrigger_Logic nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Logic IC Initial condition Low High SR trigger Clock polarity rising or falling edge and S R polarity inverted or non inverted depend on selected view Output voltage may have only logical levels Low High Input voltage is considered Low if it is below logical threshold or High if it is above logical threshold To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified level IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step 451 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y SR trigger Model Delay Y Y_SRTrigger_Delay nl5 Parameter Units Description Delay S Output delay IC Initial condition Low High SR trigger with delay Clock polarity rising or falling edge and S R polarity inverted or non inverted depend o
322. sient Data Show Transient Data window e Start F6 Start transient e Pause Space Pause transient Continue F7 Space Continue transient e Stop Stop transient e Single transient mode e Scope transient mode e Continuous transient mode e Log Show transient log SBWYR ORF L HW HE e Sweep Run series of transients transient while changing component parameter or variable o al e Save IC Save current states of all components into their initial conditions IC gt t Preferences Open Preferences dialog box Toolbar and some context menus It e Cursors mode le Zoom mode De Scrolling mode e Horizontal Zoom in Ctrl PgUp e Horizontal Zoom out Ctrl PgDn I e Fit the screen horizontal Ctrl Home Lj e Fit cursors to screen f e Vertical Zoom in PgUp x e Vertical Zoom out PgDn f e Fit the screen vertical Home kE e Fit the screen Shift Home t e Reset vertical scale set Multiplier 1 Offset 0 gt e Undo scale Backspace Undo scale ra e Redo scale JP e Show hide Cursors EH e Show hide Data Table 183 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Fle A o Lo T Eo ho Al e Show hide Legend Separate traces Right maximum Move selected cursor to the nearest right maximum of selected trace Left maximum Move selected cursor to the nearest left maximum of selected trace Right minimum Move selected cursor to the nearest right minimum
323. signals VO is Off level V1 is On level Phase is additional phase of the signal in degrees Current controlled voltage source V V_CCVS_Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Width S Pulse width Threshold A Current threshold V1 V Pulse On voltage VO V Pulse Off voltage One shot pulse generator When increasing input current lin crosses Threshold value voltage pulse of Width duration is generated VO is pulse Off level V1 is pulse On level If increasing lin crosses Threshold value while pulse is generated the pulse is restarted 420 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Current controlled voltage source I I _CCVS_PWM nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWM V1 V Pulse On voltage VO V Pulse Off voltage F Hz Frequency Phase deg Phase Imax A Input current corresponding to 100 duty Current controlled Pulse Width Modulator Output voltage is a pulse signal of frequency F shifted by Phase Input current lin is sampled at the beginning of each cycle of the signal and width of the output pulse during this cycle is calculated according to the equation width 1 F lin Imax or duty 100 lin Imax If the width is equal or less than zero a short On pulse with the width equal to the minimum calculation step at that moment will be generated If the width is equal or greater than period of frequency F a short Off pulse at the e
324. sis Y Show legan Show data p Hor Y cab al scale v d F 213 User s Manual Phase 103 BJ NL5 circuit simulator The following simplified diagram explains AC simulation process AC Control AC settings y S primera Transient algorithm AC tools AC data T Simulation o data Histogram smith chart Myguist plot Nichols plot Markers AC window User s Manual Simulation algorithm is configured by AC Settings dialog box and controlled by AC Control commands Main Menu and Toolbar The results of Schematic simulation are stored into Simulation data and simultaneously displayed as a graph in the AC Window AC Data window is used to configure what simulation data are to be stored and how the data are displayed In addition the data can be used by AC Tools which offer a variety of AC data analysis and data presentation Transient is used for Sweep AC source simulation method 214 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Simulation There are three methods of AC analysis in NL5 Linearize schematic Sweep AC source and Z transform Linearized schematic method Linearize schematic is a standard low signal AC analysis First all non linear components are replaced with linear equivalents at their operating point Second a signal of specified frequency with unit amplitude and zero phase is applied to the input node and signals at other nodes are found by solving a
325. solved by Trapezoidal integration method The method provides sufficient accuracy with reasonable robustness and calculation speed During linear range simulation the algorithm is performing switching point detection checking conditions on all components that may change their state diodes switches logical components linear segment PWL models or change the amplitude or slope Pulse and Step models If any change occurred the current linear range ends and another one Starts Calculation step Unlike many analog simulators NL5 does not perform automatic step control Selecting calculation step is user s responsibility This gives user full control on simulation although requires certain experience and understanding of the process The rule of thumb is keeping calculation step below smallest time constant in the circuit otherwise the integration method may get unstable and produce numerical oscillations NLS detects such oscillations and displays warning message in this case it would be useful to investigate the problem and either reduce calculation step or ignore oscillations as non significant However having calculation step to satisfy smallest time constant condition is not necessarily required Sometimes even high enough calculation step provides good stability while simulation speed can be significantly increased To find out an optimal calculation step run simulation several times with 148 J NL5 circuit si
326. sses Threshold value switch is set to active state for Width time interval If increasing lin crosses Threshold value while switch is in active state the pulse is restarted 388 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT current controlled switch S S_SPDT_CCS_Steps nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Steps Threshold A Current threshold Hysteresis A Hysteresis Roff Ohm Off state resistance Ron Ohm On state resistance Slope Type of resistance change Linear Cos Log Ramp S Resistance ramp time Steps Number of resistance steps in the ramp IC Initial condition Off On Switch with resistance ramping When increasing input current lin crosses Threshold plus Hysteresis 2 value resistance of common to pin with dot path starts ramping from Roff to Ron resistance of common to another pin path starts ramping from Ron to Roff When decreasing input current lin crosses Threshold minus Hysteresis 2 value resistance of common to pin with dot path starts ramping from Ron to Roff resistance of common to another pin path starts ramping from Roff to Ron Resistance is changing during Ramp time interval with number of steps specified by Steps parameter If Steps 0 resistance is changed instantly Slope parameter specifies how resistance is changing during he ramp The following slope types are
327. st AC trace data as a comma separated string from start frequency to end frequency points number of points scale log or lin logarithmic or linear frequency scale tracename returns all calculated data points of tracename trace tracename from returns only one trace value at f from tracename from to returns all calculated data points in the specified interval tracename from to points returns specified number of points in the specified interval tracename from to points scale returns data with specified scale type Trace tracename should be specified in the AC Data however it does not need to be displayed on the graph or in the table This command can be called from HTTP link only Examples V R1 Viki 12 347 VRI 1 100 VARII 1 DO 1007 VARLI la 107 100 ae 495 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual tran Usage trant tran start tran start screen gran Starts SCreen cep Description Set transient parameters and start transient start start of transient display screen screen size step calculation step If called from the script command will not return until transient is completed If called from console or HTTP link returns immediately Use ready command to check for transient completion Examples tran tran 0 tran Oy 0m tran Op TUm 105 496 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual 5 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT This End User License
328. state after Delay time The following switching diagram is shown for Active On n Ott Delay t V S _Switch_List nl5 Parameter Units Description List Comma separated string Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay List switch Switching sequence is defined in the List parameter in the csv comma separated values format as follows t0 s0 t1 s1 tn sn s0 sn defines switch state positive number corresponds to On state zero or negative number Off state If t lt t0 switch is in sO state At tO switch is set to sO state At t1 switch is set to s1 state and so on At t gt tn switch remains in sn state if Cycle parameter is set to No otherwise states sequence defined in t0 tn interval is repeated continuously In addition the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example biot DO rlr O The following switching diagram is shown for Cycle Yes Delay 0 J a 4 See Working with List model chapter for more details 364 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S Switch Model File S Switch Model SubCir V S_Switch_File nl5 Parameter Units Description File File name Cycle Cycling repeat No Yes Delay S Delay File switch Switching sequence is defined in the text file File parameter is a file name with full path to the file If the file is located in the same directory as schematic file the path can be omitted
329. stor does not have a body diode If you need a body diode you should add it as an external component 403 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T P FET T T_PFET_Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Vth V Threshold IC Initial condition of the switch Off On FET switch Voltage controlled switch Switch is closed if gate source voltage is less than threshold Vth When calculating DC operating point switch is set to the state specified in IC Equivalent schematic Please note this model of FET transistor does not have a body diode If you need a body diode you should add it as an external component 404 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual T P FET Model FET T T PFET FET nI5 Parameter Units Description S AN Slope Vth V Threshold Rdson Ohm Rdson resistance IC Initial condition Off R Plus Minus FET transistor The model has 3 modes of operation 1 VOS gt VUE vagar o e po aa 1 0 open 2 Vgs lt Vth Vds gt Vgs Vth S Rdson V 1 Rdson resistor 3 Vgs lt Vth Vds lt Vgs Vth S Rdson I Vgs Vth S current source FET works similar for positive and negative drain source voltage current direction changes accordingly Equivalent schematics Vgs lt Vth d d g g S S A Rdson r 5 5 Vds gt Vgs Vth S Rdson Vds lt Vgs Vth S Rdson Vds lt Vgs Vth S Rdson Vds lt 0 Vds gt 0 When calculating DC operating po
330. string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 302 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Voltage controlled D g Views thyristor D Voltage controlled thyristor Model Thyristor Parameter Units Vd V lhold A Threshold V IC Models User s Manual Thyristor SubCir el vin y I Ud P Vel D D_VCT_Thyristor nl5 Description Forward voltage drop Holding current Voltage threshold Initial condition Off On Ideal thyristor Thyristor has two states Off state non conducting open circuit On state conducting ideal diode with Vd forward voltage drop If control voltage Vin is greater than Threshold thyristor is in On state ideal diode When control voltage drops below Threshold thyristor stays in On state as long as current exceeds holding current Ihold and voltage V is not negative When calculating DC operating point thyristor is set to the state specified in IC D _ Voltage controlled thyristor Model SubCir Parameter Units File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC D D_VCT_SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions st
331. system of linear equations The process is repeated for specified number of frequencies In order to linearize schematic state of all components should be known It can be done manually by setting Initial Conditions IC for all non linear components diodes and controlled switches or by automatic calculation of DC operating point Calculate DC operating point check box in the AC Settings dialog box DC operating point is calculated exactly as in transient analysis The method always works for linear circuits The method can be also used for circuits with non linear components only if those components can be properly linearized at operating point infinitely small amplitude of input AC signal should not change state of the components For instance the following circuit can t be correctly analyzed by this method as the diode will change its state every time input AC signal changes polarity The method can t be used for switching type circuits since all the switches will be set to either open or closed state and will not be switching as required Sweep AC source method Sweep AC source method allows calculating AC response for any type of circuit A real sine wave signal of specified amplitude and frequency is applied to the input node the transient analysis 1s automatically performed finally the harmonic of specified frequency is extracted form signals of interest by Discrete Fourier Transform DFT AC response 1s calculated by compar
332. t if VIC is specified and IIC is blank Vin Vout VIC if VIC is blank and IIC is specified lin IHC lout I1C if VIC and IIC are specified Vin Vout VIC lin IC lout IIC The model allocates memory for storing forward and reflected wave data only when needed and frees it immediately when possible At transient start an approximate amount of needed memory is estimated based on calculation step and if it exceeds a limit specified in preferences Transient page the warning message is displayed If real line characteristics are given in line capacitance and inductance per length the following equations can be used to derive tO and z0 parameters tO sqrt L C D ZO sart L C where C line capacitance per length F m L line inductance per length H m D line length m 431 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual X Transmission line X X_Line_Lossy nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Lossy tO S Delay ZO Ohm Characteristic impedance R Ohm ns Series resistance per ns fr MHz Skin losses cutoff 3 dB frequency G 1 Ohm ns Shunt conductance per ns fG MHz Dielectric losses cutoff 3 dB frequency VIC V Initial condition voltage IIC A Initial condition current Lossy transmission line Lossy line modeling is similar to lossless transmission line with addition of losses due to series resistan
333. t Start Examples of Run until expressions iG C I R2 gt 1m amp amp t gt 10 p V P RLOad gt 33 ELOU e Save data before Start If selected all the simulation data prior to Start are stored into memory and available for display Otherwise the data prior to Start are lost providing some memory saving Advanced Click to open Advanced Settings dialog box 155 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Advanced Settings Advanced settings apply both to transient and AC analysis Advanced Settings x Transient calculation step Logical levels Do not detect oscillations fo Loy Y Do not reduce calculation step High Y igh fi De 3 step reduction fas 5 Threshold Y Convergence Z parameter Change states one at a time aS fi Ue 1 2 Machine precision Cancel Transient calculation step Some options related to calculation step e Do not detect oscillations Do not display warning messages if numerical oscillations detected e Do not reduce calculation step Always use specified calculation step only e Step reduction Specifies how much step resolution during switching point detection is better than calculation step Convergence Parameters that may affect convergence of DC operating point calculation and switching points calculation e Change states one at a time Specifies switching iteration mode e Machine precision machine epsilon The minimum rela
334. t any existing firewalls and routers are properly configured to allow TCP communication through specified port To start HTTP server click Start button While server is running the window will display IP address of the client command received and result sent to the client xl Jt ODer TE r 7 5 iran To disable the HTTP log uncheck Show log option on HTTP server page of Preferences dialog box To clear the HTTP log right click on the text area and select Clear log 276 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual The window can be closed at any time without affecting server operation To stop HTTP server click Stop button HTTP server can also be started automatically at NLS startup using http switch in command line gt nl5 exe http Sending URL request Client applications can issue commands and obtain data from NL5 by sending URL request with parameters and receiving back response in the text format The URL read function name syntax and parameters may vary for different applications For example in the MATLAB urlread function can be used s urlread url For other applications refer to Manual or Function Reference for HTTP or URL read functions with parameters URL string has the following general format http host_name port cmd command where e host_name is the name or IP address of the computer where NLS is running If client application is running on the same computer
335. tab the tab is visible only when DLL model is selected ln Out Var Component variables can be displayed on the graph as a trace of Function type using the following notation component Name variable name For example X1 my var 1 101 a NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Y Custom logic Maximum width 32 Maximum height 32 Number of inputs 1 32 Number of outputs 1 E Height a El Cancel e Logical function of the component and inverted non inverted output option is selected by changing view of the component use Next view command or f button 102 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Working with Subcircuits Subcircuit model SubCir allows creating simple and readable schematic by substituting some part of the schematic with one component symbol When simulation starts the component with SubCir model is replaced by actual schematic loaded from subcircuit file SubCir model is available for almost all components Some X components are dedicated for SubCir model only Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 6 Block 8 and Custom block SubCir model has the same parameters for all component types SubGir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pint Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 PinN Name of subcircuit label connected to pin N Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string File is a file name of subcircuit schematic file Enter
336. tal Ctrl Home Lj Fit cursors to screen t Vertical Zoom in PgUp 1 Vertical Zoom out PgDn f Fit the screen vertical Home 181 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual E Fit the screen Shift Home ta Reset vertical scale set Multiplier 1 Offset 0 o Zoom in Shift PgUp o Zoom out Shift PgDn To zoom selected area e Zoom mode click and drag to select area e Cursors mode hold Ctrl key then click and drag to select area Selection area depends on how mouse pointer is moving relative to starting point e If mouse pointer is moving only up or down two horizontal lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in vertically e If mouse pointer is moving only left or right two vertical lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in horizontally e If mouse pointer is moving diagonally rectangle will be shown When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen To Undo and Redo scrolling and zooming click toolbar buttons w e Undo scrolling or zooming ca e Redo scrolling or zooming 182 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Transient commands The following commands buttons and shortcuts are available in the Main menu Main Toolbar transient toolbar and transient context menus Open Show transient window F5 e Transient Settings Open Transient Settings dialog box e Tran
337. ted area Selection is bounded by a rectangle o Ctrl key is depressed All components and wires with any part in the selected area Selection is not bounded by a rectangle o Shift key is depressed Only components and wires completely located in the selected area Selection is bounded by a rectangle No keys depressed Ctrl key depressed Shift key depressed e To add new selection to existing one press and hold Ctrl key then select a new element or a new block e To select all elements press Ctrl A e Right click to select element and open context menu e Select Net command in the context menu selects schematic element with all wires connected to the element either directly or through labels including other sheets e Moving schematic cursor automatically selects element under the cursor e To unselect point and click on empty space or press Esc e To unselect a block point and click on empty space outside the block or press Esc twice Pressing Esc first time removes block rectangle pressing second time unselects all elements Schematic with selection bounded by a rectangle is sometimes called to be in Block selected mode 86 1 wig NLS circuit simulator User s Manual Delete To delete elements select elements or block then press Del or click Delete button A To delete entire sheet right click on Sheets selection tab then select Remove sheet command in the context menu The sheet will be deleted
338. ted traces This operation is equivalent to Copy Paste operations Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be duplicated Remove selected traces Only traces selected highlighted in the Trace list will be removed Delete all traces 161 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual abi Select color of selected trace Only one trace should be selected Double click on the trace in the Trace list performs the same operation Rename trace Only one trace should be selected Only traces loaded from data file imported from text or binary file duplicated or pasted from clipboard can be renamed Renaming the trace of Function type changes the function Rename dialog box will show up Renametracez Ed Enter new name trace lt Enter new trace name and click OK Move selected traces up This operation changes the order of traces in the list on the graph and in the data table Move selected traces down This operation changes the order of traces in the list on the graph and in the data table Find component If selected trace is V I or P of the component click to show the component on the schematic The component will be selected highlighted and centered on the screen 162 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Traces Traces page of Transient Data window is used to add and remove traces and set up individual trace scales and width ES nli Transient Data ca ze X Mty Traces Sc
339. the drop down list e I trace Select current trace from the drop down list Power Power factor PF is calculated as PF _ VRMS x IRMS All parameters are calculated between cursors only or on the screen if cursors are disabled so make sure selected interval consists of integer number of signal cycles 208 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Select THD page to calculate Total Harmonic Distortion thd Transient l l eee ee ee ee ee ed ee ee eB eB eB eB ee Mj F E a l 400e 3 xl Power Factor THO Trace IFA Harmonics fi F Cath 36 0420 5be 3 13 60440e 5 5 635965 6 3 11 420564e 5 2D le b 144 5335e 6 S50 2 3S m e Trace Select trace from the drop down list e Harmonics Enter or select from drop down list number of harmonics to calculate max 40 VV V V V THD is calculated as THD where V is amplitude of n harmonic THD is calculated between cursors only or on the screen if cursors are disabled so make sure selected interval consists of exactly 1 period of the signal fundamental 1 harmonic There are several convenient ways to make such a selection easy For example e Double click on the transient graph to set both cursors at one point between signal maximums Click Maximums button one cursor will be moved to the nearest right maximum and another cursor to the nearest left maximum
340. the whole signal is delayed by Delay time Example 00 O1 A GQ O Or OF O 7 7 7 7 7 The following switching diagram shows state of common to dotted pin path for Cycle Yes Delay 0 Common to another pin always has an opposite state 377 BJ NL5 circuit simulator S SPDT switch Model SubCir Parameter File Pin Pin2 Cmd IC Units User s Manual Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 378 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT logic controlled Switch switch Pulse d 3 Steps LA SubCir E no S SPDT logic controlled switch S S _ SPDT_LCS Switch nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Switch Active Active state Off On IC Initial condition Off On Logic controlled switch Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance Switch is set to active or non active state using following rules Vin gt logical threshold active Vin lt logical threshold non active To see and set logical levels and threshold go to Transient Setting
341. the width equal to the minimum calculation step at that moment will be generated If the width is equal or greater than period of frequency F a short Off pulse at the end of the period will be generated Due to that the frequency of the output signal is always F I Voltage controlled current source VI VCCS_SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Pin4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 330 M4 NL5 circuit simulator I Current controlled Current source Current controlled current source Parameter Units K A A A 1 A A N ne 1Y O C AU Linear Linear Function PWL CCO Pulse Models PWM SubCir Description Gain User s Manual P Vel I I CCCS_Linear nl5 Linear current controlled current source K lin 331 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I Current controlled current source I I CCCS Function ni5 Model Parameter Units Description Function F x A Output as function of the input F s AC transfer function in s domain IC A Initial condition output current Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines outp
342. therwise click gt button to run analysis e Transient Select to run transient e AC Select to run AC analysis In the second mode you will see Transient is running notification and all options will be disabled Transient i running i Run on click Change Value and press Enter or click f Transient button I AC Change Value of the parameters manually and press Enter or click Plus or Minus button you will see the effect of the change on transient immediately 275 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual HTTP link HTTP link provides NLS link with external application NL5 serves as a server running built in HTTP server External application is a client NES and a client application may run on the same computer or on different computers communicating through local network or Internet Starting HTTP server Select Tools HTTP Link command in the Main Menu to open HTTP Link window xl Default Port number is 80 which is standard port for HTTP protocol If this port is already used by another application most likely HTTP server select any other available port number Make sure the client application uses the same port number as NL3 in URL request Please note that port number can be changed only before HTTP link is started the first time To change the port number after that close NLS application and start it again If NES and client application are running on different computers make sure tha
343. tings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain at each frequency When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output voltage IC 306 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function Model Pwr F Function Model Abs F F_Function_Pwr nl5 Parameter Units Description power Power K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage Signed power function V K pwr Vin power The function is calculated as follows if power 0 if Vin lt 0 ENVIOS Os if Vin gt 0 WA lo ol oll K 0 K if power O if Vin lt 0 V if Vin 0 V if Vin gt 0 V SKEEM 0 Kevin When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect Stability of the schematic with closed loop F F Function Abs nl5 Parameter Units Description K V V Gain IC V Initial condition output voltage Absolute value V K abs Vin When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may
344. tinue simulation and save simulation data in different formats The following script commands are available ac exit return stop clear export rununtil store close logdata save storetext Cont open savedata graces GULESOLS pause saveic tracename display ready sleep tran See full script commands list description and examples in the Attachment 4 67 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Please note that unlike standard C function calls script commands parameters do not need to be enclosed into parentheses However for consistency of the code parentheses can be used as well For example Opent PO ML 7 open Tento tram Os Ar LA close clear Script examples Set component parameters Component parameters have been calculated in external application for instance Excel or entered manually and saved into the text file in the name value format R1 5 1 CL L26679 V3 period 0 01 Run the script to apply new parameters to components Sweep parameter Component parameter is changing in specified range transient analysis performed for each parameter results placed into storage for Rl 1 R1 lt 10 R1 1 tran store R1 Sweep parameter from the list Component parameter is assigned value from the list AC analysis performed for each parameter results placed into storage fort Vil period S Lim 2m dUme 50 00m acs store Vl period j Sweep variable Local variable is changing i
345. tion SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 436 BJ NL5 circuit simulator X Views 1 2 3 X Block 3 Model SubCir Block 3 1 3 Parameter Units File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Cmd IC User s Manual SubCir a f 3 z gt E 2 3 1 X X_Block 3_ SubCir nl5 Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 437 BJ NL5 circuit simulator X Views 1 2 X Block 4 Model SubCir Block 4 13 1 4 4 12 13 Parameter Units File Pint Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Cmd IC Models SubCir Traces Description File name of subcircuit schematic Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 438 User s
346. tive difference between two floating point numbers which can be reliably recognized Logical levels These settings apply to logical components and some models with logical type of input e Low V Low logical level Must be lt High e High V High logical level Must be gt Low e Threshold V Logical threshold the voltage below threshold is considered Low above threshold is considered High Threshold must be between Low and High Z parameter Define custom formula for Laplace space approximation of z transform parameter Z or select formula from drop down list For example exp s le 6 exp s T 2 s T 2 s T If a parameter is used in the formula T it should be defined as a schematic variable in the Variables Window 156 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Transient Data Click Transient data toolbar button El or select Transient Data command Transient Data window will show up The window always shows data of active document schematic Switching to another document automatically updates the data in the window The window consists of Toolbar Trace list and 4 pages used for the following operations Traces add traces set up individual trace scales and width Screen set up graph scales gridlines and other screen options Table configure data table Storage manage storage data x co ct Med ey Sen AS AA Traces Screen Table Storage F Check to display on the graph LF wT E
347. to pin 1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Subcircuit start up command string Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 346 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual O Differential amplifier Linear 1 2 Comparator 5 a Function PWL z SubCir P Vel O Differential amplifier O O_DiffAmp_Linear nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Linear K V V Gain Hz Unit gain frequency IC V Initial condition output voltage Linear differential amplifier K is open loop gain Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency K and f1 can be set to infinity inf When calculating DC operating point if f1 is not infinity and IC is defined amplifier output is set to specified output voltage IC If IC is blank static characteristic is used Y v K Yok vin Vin f1 Static characteristic AC response 347 BJ NL5 circuit simulator O Differential amplifier Model OpAmp Parameter K Vhi Vlo IC Units VN Hz V V V User s Manual O O_DiffAmp_OpAmp nl5 Description Gain Unit gain frequency Max output voltage Min output voltage Initial condition output voltage Linear amplifier with output limiter K is open loop gain Frequency response consists of one pole f1 is unit gain frequency K and f1 can be set to infinity inf Output volta
348. to sort it out and display on the graph T e Settings tab Use this tab to configure the graph e Show gridlinez e Show numbers 116 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Working with 2D Table model Table model also describes 2D two dimensional look up table of the Function 2 component Table parameter of the model defines output value z as a function of x and Y inputs of the component in the following format DITA per INA Ly TD DIN pi ML IMD cy ZN where e Zij defines output of the function for input values xi and yj e wis total number of x points defined by X parameter of the component e mis total number of y points defined by Y parameter of the component Output value between specified x and y points is linearly interpolated on both coordinates Output value below x1 is linearly extrapolated using x1 x2 interval data output value above xn is linearly extrapolated using x N 1 xN interval data The same rule is applied to Y coordinate Table parameter can be easily edited in the Table dialog box Click button right to the Table parameter to open dialog box 2 1 1 1 1 57 0 0 J gt Typical view of the Table dialog box and its main components are shown below CE x Toolbar gt al xX v E E PWL graph gt PWL data gt Tab selection gt EH OK Cancel 117 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Upper pane of the window c
349. traces e Approximate number of points When opening Transient Export View dialog box time step value is automatically selected so that number of points in the table is close to specified number e Max number of points Export View time step cannot be too small so that number of points in the table to exceed specified number Time step be automatically adjusted This number also applies to the script command tracename HTTP Link Set HTTP Link options Preferences von Preferences gt Application Document HTTP Link e Show log fi 0 Max number of log lines Cancel Apply e Show log If checked show HTTP log e Max number of log lines Enter maximum number of log lines or select from drop down list When number of lines exceeds specified maximum the very first lines will be removed 54 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Printing User s Manual Click Preview and print Toolbar button amp or select File Preview and print command to open Print dialog box Typical view of the dialog box and its main components are shown below Print Pinte Printer selection gt and setup Dal Fhoto AND Printer 922 Schematic Press lelt mouse buton on the Prerisw bo select amd mowe thie ndo Aes HE Window fe Black and while Header Ode Window selection list gt Formatting area 10 xj Piensa No title Preview area e Select print
350. ts Description Function F x V Output as function of the input F s AC transfer function in s domain IC V Initial condition output voltage Arbitrary function Transient analysis F x defines output voltage as a function of the following variables X input voltage Vin t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x x x F x x sin t F x P r1 P r2 Please note that input voltage x and variables V I and P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that Support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter s p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advenced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC anal
351. tted name of the file to export is the same as script file name with csv extension If file path is not specified export in the script file directory Extension csv can be omitted Only traces currently shown on the graph will be exported Examples export export EXPO E export export ag traces ac traces ac traces ac TLaces Ls Im Im LK Ike OOF Tka LUO LEAS 486 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual logdata Usage logdata filename exprl logdata filename exprl togdata Description logdata with parameters is the first data logging command filename name of the file to export traces flag to append the data into existing file exprN expression to be logged If a file filename does not exist creates a new log file and writes a header If a file filename already exists and a first parameter is a new data will be appended to existing data otherwise old data will be overwritten Extension csv in the file name can be omitted If file path is not specified creates log file in the script file directory logdata without parameters evaluates expressions exprN specified in the first 1ogdata command and writes results into the log file as comma separated string Examples LOguUata reloge Ely VEL weed ENS Log data Te AECA Mily MEE ACA ES logdata 487 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual open Usage open filename Description Open schem
352. u 240 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Storage The results of the last simulation run are always shown in the Run tab of the AC Window Last run data can be moved into storage under the name Last so that 1t can be compared with other simulation runs Each storage data has a tab on the Data selection area assigned to it Storage data can be selected by clicking on the tab Storage data belongs to the trace so that if trace is deleted storage data for this trace will be deleted as well List of available storage data commands and storage display selection can be found on Storage page of AC Data window x Z BHR BET x Hames Traces Screen Table Storage F Check to allow storage Jw Store last Run Display storage C Selected only f Selected and dimmed X abl Y Check all Uncheck all Apply Close To access some commands right click on the graph or storage tab then select command from context menu e Move Run to storage Move current simulation data into storage Add Storage dialog box will show up x Mame Aun 1 Lancel 241 KE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Enter new storage name or leave suggested default name and click OK A new tab with storage name will be created in the Data selection area e Remove selected storage Last Run data can be removed as well Clear storage Delete all storage data e Rename selected run Rename di
353. ubcircuit schematic file Click to open subcircuit schematic file This button is enabled only for components with SubCir model and if subcircuit file name is specified e Edit component Click to edit symbol and pins The button is enabled only for components of customized types E Help F1 Select component and click to open Help topic on component model Components list Components list shows all components and allows selecting component for editing e Column Name shows name of the component e Column Value shows either first parameter of the component or model name e Column Group is automatically displayed if at least one component is assigned to a group Hame Value Group Group A Group A e Click on the list to select a component The component selected in the list will also be selected highlighted on the schematic e Press Enter or double click on the component to edit component parameters In this case if you finish editing parameters by pressing Enter or Esc you will switch back to components list e Press Tab to switch between components list and component parameters Selecting Model Select model of a component from a drop down list by clicking button Ivi y O click y 129 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Editing Parameters Edit component parameters in the parameters list Click on the line to select the parameter and then use one of the following methods for different parameter t
354. ubcircuits chapter for details 289 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual A dll ahah Amperemeter AY P Vel 7 je Models Traces A Amperemeter A A_Amperemeter_Amperemeter nl5 Model No parameters Amperemeter Amperemeter Short circuit In addition to current amperemeter can measure voltage relative to ground and power to grounded load 290 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual C Capacitor c PWL 6 V a E F tl 9 Function E subCir P Vel C Capacitor C C_Capacitor_C nl5 Model Parameter Units Description C C F Capacitance IC V Initial condition voltage Leave blank if IC not defined Linear capacitor C dV dt When calculating DC operating point if IC is defined capacitor is replaced with voltage source equal to IC If IC is not defined blank capacitor is temporarily removed open circuit DC operating point calculated and then the voltage found across the capacitor is assigned to the capacitor as its initial voltage C Capacitor C C_Capacitor_ PWL nl5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string C V IC V Initial condition voltage Leave blank if no IC defined Piece wise linear capacitor pwl string defines capacitance as a function of voltage See Working with PWL model chapter for details When calculating DC operating point if IC is defined capacitor is replaced with voltage source equal to IC If IC is not defined
355. ue of output variable out 1s evaluated and assigned to the corresponding element of the array data A voltage equal to that value is set to a grounded voltage source connected to the output pin out Inputs and outputs Input pins are considered as voltmeters with infinite input impedance Output pins are grounded voltage sources with zero output impedance Array double data 1s used to pass input output values to from DLL function Array size is lt number of inputs gt lt number of outputs gt When calling DLL function first lt number of inputs gt elements of the array are filled by input values in the same order how pins are shown on the component symbol left side top to bottom Output values calculated in the DLL are placed in the next lt number of outputs gt elements of the array in the same order how pins are shown on the component symbol right side top to bottom For example 1f the component has three inputs and two outputs the following code will assign minimum input value to the first output and maximum input value to the second output xI min data 3 min data 0 min data 1 data 2 Wo max data 4 max datal0 max datal1 data 2 x Component variables Unlike in C model of the Code component variables declared outside of DLL functions are static and not accessible by NL5 Component variables are used for storing values that are accessible both from DLL and NL5 Component variables can b
356. uit simulator User s Manual D Bidirectional zener Zener 2 PWL o y 1 X E SubCir P Vel D Bidirectional zener D D BZener Zener nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Zener V V Breakdown voltage drop IC Initial condition Minus Off Plus Ideal bidirectional zener If V lt V or V gt V zener is On short circuit Otherwise zener is Off open circuit 0 y TAS When calculating DC operating point zener is set to the state specified in IC D Bidirectional zener D D_BZener_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string R V Piece wise linear zener pwl string defines resistance as a function of voltage See Working with PWL model chapter for details D Bidirectional zener D D BZener SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 300 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual D _ Bridge rectifier Diode P Vel Vol V3elL Vel Models Traces D Bridge rectifier D D_Bridge_Diode nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Diode Vd V Forward voltage drop Bridge rectifier with ideal diodes For each diode if V gt Vd diode is On short circuit Otherwise diode is Off open
357. ulation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop 313 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function 2 F F_Function 2_GT nl5 Model Parameter Units Description GT IC V Initial condition output voltage Fan E F Greater than V Vx gt Vy High Low if Vx lt Vy V Low if Vx gt Vy V High High and Low are logical levels To see and set logical levels go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop F Function 2 F F_Function 2_LT nl5 Model Parameter Units Description LT IC V Initial condition output voltage La Va Less than V Vx lt Vy High Low if Vx lt Vy V High if Vx gt Vy V LOW High and Low are logical levels To see and set logical levels go to Transient Settings or AC Settings then click Advanced button When calculating DC operating point output is set to specified output voltage IC When calculating transient output voltage is always delayed by one calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop 314 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual F Function 2 F F_Function 2_Pwr nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pwr K V V Gain IC V Initi
358. ulator User s Manual W Transformer Transformer SubCir O z 1 2 gt y 2 4 2 J 2 W Transformer W W_Transformer_Transformer nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Transformer n1 turns Number of turns in the first winding n2 turns Number of turns in the second winding Ideal transformer with 2 windings Coupling coefficient 1 W Transformer Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Pin4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 424 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual W Differential a transformer subCir 2 E a i 2 ze 2 2 2 1 1 gt 2 2 W Differential transformer WAW_DifTransformer Transformer nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Transformer n1 turns Number of turns in the first winding n2 turns Number of turns in the second and the third winding Ideal differential transformer with 3 windings Coupling coefficient 1 Second and third windings have the same number of turns n2 and connected to form a differential transformer W Differential transformer Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pint Name of subcircuit label
359. ulse Width S Pulse width Threshold V Voltage threshold Active Active state Off On One shot pulse generator Off state common to pin with dot open common to another pin closed On state common to pin with dot closed common to another pin open Open state has infinite resistance closed state has zero resistance When increasing input voltage Vin crosses Threshold value switch is set to active state for Width time interval If increasing Vin crosses Threshold value while switch is in active state the pulse is restarted 384 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual S SPDT voltage controlled switch S S_SPDT _VCS_Steps nI5 Model Parameter Units Description Steps Threshold V Voltage threshold Hysteresis V Hysteresis Roff Ohm Off state resistance Ron Ohm On state resistance Slope Type of resistance change Linear Cos Log Ramp S Resistance ramp time Steps Number of resistance steps in the ramp IC Initial condition Off On Switch with resistance ramping When increasing input voltage Vin crosses Threshold plus Hysteresis 2 value resistance of common to pin with dot path starts ramping from Roff to Ron resistance of common to another pin path starts ramping from Ron to Roff When decreasing input voltage Vin crosses Threshold minus Hysteresis 2 value resistance of common to pin with dot path starts rampin
360. updates in less than 300 me 500 Status update interval me Show notification if cannot pause in fio seconds 4 Max memory per trace MB 32 Mas memory per delay and transmission line components MB warming Esport trace 500 Approsximate number of ports 10000 Max number of points Cancel Apply As a result there is no flickering of the graph and simulation is performed faster Status update interval ms Update transient status with specified interval Show notification if cannot pause in seconds If transient pause is requested and transient cannot be paused at that moment a notification window will be displayed The window can be closed manually by stopping the transient or waiting for pause or it will be closed automatically when transient is finally paused Memory Max memory per trace MB Set maximum amount of memory allowed per one trace If trace memory exceeds this limit the beginning portion of the trace will be deleted and warning message One or more traces have been truncated will show up in the transient status bar Max memory per delay and transmission line components MB warning Set maximum amount of memory allowed for delay and transmission line components If estimated required memory exceeds specified limit a warning message will show up with the option to continue or stop simulation 53 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Export
361. urces e Current source Symbol of current source voltage controlled and current controlled current sources e Controlled source Symbol of controlled voltage and current source e Resistor Symbol of resistor potentiometer voltage and current controlled resistors 44 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Warnings Select warnings to be detected and shown during schematic check Preferences Preferences Application Document a Schematic ete Drawings e Floating pins h HNonconnected components M Overlapping components and wires m ails 3 Er abara oe Possibly floating schematic Warnings Unselect to disable all warnings Floating pins Check for any floating pin of a component Non connected components Check for components with all pins disconnected Overlapping components and wires Check for overlapping component with another component and component with wire e Possibly floating schematic Check if schematic has at least one ground or label with voltage source model 45 BJ NL5 circuit simulator Graphs Set properties of Transient Transient Tools AC and AC Tools windows gt i or m Hl Wl T Preferences von Preferences fi Default phase width 2 Markers width i Legend Gridlines interval peels E Annotation 75 bal Vertical gridlines i Wouze 50 Horizontal gridlines HTTP Link Let Numbers alignment MJ Selection E
362. urrent 10 A Pulse Off current F Hz Frequency Phase deg Phase Imax A Input current corresponding to 100 duty Current controlled Pulse Width Modulator Output current is a pulse signal of frequency F shifted by Phase Input current lin is sampled at the beginning of each cycle of the signal and width of the output pulse during this cycle is calculated according to the equation width 1 F lin Imax or duty 100 lin Imax If the width is equal or less than zero a short On pulse with the width equal to the minimum calculation step at that moment will be generated If the width is equal or greater than period of frequency F a short Off pulse at the end of the period will be generated Due to that the frequency of the output signal is always F I Current controlled current source I I CCCS_ SubCir nl5 Model Parameter Units Description SubCir File File name of subcircuit schematic Pin1 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 1 Pin2 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 2 Pin3 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 3 Pin4 Name of subcircuit label connected to pin 4 Cmd Subcircuit start up command string IC Subcircuit Initial conditions string Subcircuit See Working with Subcircuits chapter for details 334 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual L L L Inductor i 2 PWL SY I 3 F 3 SubCir P Vel Inductor L L_Inductor_L nl5 Model Parameter Units Description L L H I
363. ut current as a function of the following variables X input current lin t current time V name voltage on the component name I name current through the component name P name power on the component name where name is the name of any component in the schematic If F x is blank output is zero F s is ignored Example F x x x F x x sin t F x P r1 P r2 Please note that input current x and variables V I and P are taken at previous calculation step This may affect stability of the schematic with closed loop AC analysis F s defines transfer function in s domain Only operators and functions that support complex numbers can be used in this function The following variables can be used in the function f current AC frequency Hz w angular AC frequency w 2zf sor p Laplace parameter s p f 2zf z Z transform parameter is defined by custom formula in the Advanced Settings dialog box Example F s 1 1 s F s exp 1mk s F s is calculated at each frequency If F s is blank it is assumed to be 1 Also if F x is not blank it is linearized at DC operating point and F s is multiplied by linearized gain When calculating DC operating point for transient or AC analysis output is set to specified output current IC 332 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual I I I Current controlled current source I I CCCS PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Descripti
364. value below x1 is linearly extrapolated using x1 x2 interval data output value above xn is linearly extrapolated using X N 1 xN interval data Values x1 xN should be given in ascending order Table parameter can be easily edited in the Table dialog box Click button right to the Table parameter to open dialog box 2 11 1 1 5 7 0 0 6 J gt Typical view of the Table dialog box and its main components are shown below P Fatai x Toolbar gt SAX PWL graph gt PWL data gt Tab selection Upper pane of the window contains graph of the function Lower pane contains 2 tabs for entering data and configuration e Move cursor over splitter area Ss then press left mouse button and drag to resize panes e Right click on the graphs area to see context menu with relevant commands e Click OK to accept changes and close dialog box or Cancel to cancel changes 115 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Click Toolbar buttons to perform the following operations ta o Open data from the file in csv format Fl o Save data into the file in csv format 2 O Clear all data o Refresh graphs This operation also sorts out data points to be in ascending order and place each X Y pair on separate line e List tab Provides Table parameter data in the text form for editing Simply enter X Y pairs in arbitrary format Click Refresh button
365. ving relative to starting point e If mouse pointer is moving only up or down two horizontal lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in vertically e If mouse pointer is moving only left or right two vertical lines will be shown When left button released selected area will be zoomed in horizontally e If mouse pointer is moving diagonally rectangle will be shown When left button released selected rectangle area will be zoomed in to fit the screen In the phase graph area only horizontal scroll and zoom can be performed To Undo and Redo scrolling and zooming click toolbar buttons w e Undo scrolling or zooming ca e Redo scrolling or zooming 246 User s Manual BJ NL5 circuit simulator AC commands The following commands buttons and shortcuts are available in the Main menu Main Toolbar AC toolbar and AC context menus gt YX male Open Show AC window F8 AC Settings Show AC Settings dialog box AC Data Open AC Data window Start AC F9 Start AC analysis Stop Stop AC analysis Log Show AC log Sweep Preferences Open Preferences dialog box Toolbar and some context menus a E e to te F EH e Po ER o E e He Aes Ta Ee Cursors mode Zoom mode Scrolling mode Horizontal Zoom in Ctrl PgUp Horizontal Zoom out Ctrl PgDn Fit the screen horizontal Ctrl Home Fit cursors to screen Vertical Zoom in PgUp Vertical Z
366. voltage Pulse Off voltage Period Pulse width Slope type Linear Cos Exp Pulse rise length Pulse fall length Delay before first pulse starts Pulse voltage source Pulses start after Delay time Rise time is included into Width Fall time is not included into Width Almost every parameter can be set to zero and infinity inf otherwise the error message will be displayed WA VO Delay Rise Mich maa La m Fall t Slope type applies both to pulse rise and fall The following slope types are available a gt r Rize t Rize t Rise t Linear Cos cosine Exp exponential 408 BJ NL5 circuit simulator V Voltage source Model Step Parameter Units V1 V VO V Slope S Rise S Delay S User s Manual V V_VS_Step nl5 Description Step On voltage Step Off voltage Slope type Linear Cos Exp Step rise length Delay before step starts Step voltage source Step starts after Delay time WA WO Delay Rise gt t The following slope types are available Linear a Rise t Rise t Rise t Cos cosine Exp exponential 409 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V Voltage source V V_VS_Sin nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Sin V1 V Voltage amplitude VO V Voltage baseline Period S Period Phase deg Phase Delay S Delay before sine signal starts Sine voltage source Sine signal
367. which may happen for some specific circuit types use value 1 Find periodic operating point To perform AC analysis of switching circuit a periodic steady state periodic operating point should be found first If Find periodic operating point option is selected NLS will automatically run transient with zero amplitude of AC source until periodic steady state condition is satisfied and only after that AC analysis will start If Find periodic operating point option is unselected it is highly recommended to find periodic steady state condition manually by running transient with zero amplitude of AC source When periodic steady state is reached save current state of the circuit into Initial Conditions select Transient Save IC in the Main menu If circuit is not in its periodic steady state the correct results of AC analysis are not guarantied Sweep frequency from high to low When this option 1s selected simulation will start from higher frequencies where it usually takes much less simulation time per one frequency Thus simulation results will appear on the graph faster and user can make a decision to stop simulation without waiting for lower frequencies results if needed Show transient data option makes transient simulation data visible during AC simulation and keeps the data available when AC simulation is complete Transient data might be useful for finding optimal AC analysis settings and for troubleshooting 216
368. window see Show in AC window The following example shows Zero padding and Window effect on FFT result if vo E v2 amp i a i m m m La 100 le dlje I Transient No zero padding X16 zero padding No zero padding X16 zero padding No window No window Hamming window Hamming window o Graph Log scale If selected amplitude is shown in dB Linear scale Log scale 201 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual DEA o East Don t show F 0 If selected zero frequency point is not shown on the graph Select this option if DC component of the signal is not of interest o Trace Several trace options can be selected at a time Line Show straight lines between points Histogram Show histogram like traces Bars Show vertical lines from zero to the trace point Not available for Log scale Points Show data points as squares Line Histogram Bars Points Horizontal Zoom in Horizontal Zoom out Fit the screen horizontal Vertical Zoom in Vertical Zoom out Fit the screen vertical Fit the screen View Export View FFT data in the text table export to text or csv file View Export dialog box will show up B Yiew ale FFT ana 13 5808 a 6934 th 587 7556 3 24 1509 43 6077 43 7514 600e 3 26 6066 14 214 14 4073 C Allpoints 612 2458 3 31 7926 15 479 15 7359 C Stepha o 524 4963 31 8918 17 3291 17 5804 636 7356 3 23 6255 18 3634 18 137 Signific
369. with NLS host_name can be 127 0 0 1 or localhost e port is the port number It should be the same as port number specified in NLS If default HTTP port number 80 is used it can be omitted so that URL string will look as follows http host_namet cmd command e command is a script command or an expression NLS executes command or evaluates expression and responds with a text which can be e OR e result of the expression in text format e comma separated string for trace data request e error message text For example Request Response http localhost cmd open rc nl5 OK At 7127 00 17 FCn RI LOO http 277192 1 68 20417 vemd Cl 2n2 Paley http public025 2119 cemd V C1 200 1 2 0 9 99999424754 9 9999944731 http localhost cmd open test nl5 Error opening fille test nls 271 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual If client application allows the following modifications can be applied to URL string making it more simple and readable e Text http can be omitted e Text cmd can be omitted For example Request Response PZ Ow Ll OOS eC YOR 192 168 05 LOLS FRI 100e 3 NEEDS puUbTICOZ 5S 227 2store R1 OK Localhosty V Ci mean loz 1978002002 Please be aware that not all characters can be transmitted over Internet in the URL request Some characters are reserved and have a special meaning Being used in the N
370. wn list For example exp s le 6 exp s T 2 s T 2 s T If a parameter is used in the formula T it should be defined as a schematic variable in the Variables Window 224 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual AC Data Click AC data toolbar button E or select AC Data command AC Data window will show up The window always shows data of active document schematic Switching to another document automatically updates the data in the window The window consists of Toolbar Trace list and 4 pages used for the following operations Traces add traces set up individual trace scales and width Screen set up graph scales gridlines and other screen options Table configure data table Storage manage storage data ES nli AC Data eich SAS xX Reese Traces Screen Table Storage F Check to display on the graph RI vc Trace WA Mag Phase Display fi Phage width fi width Check all Uncheck all Apply Close le Move cursor over splitter area lb then press left mouse button and drag to resize panes Trace list shows all currently available traces Checkbox indicates the following trace property depending on selected page e Trace and Screen page trace is shown on the graph e Table page trace is shown in the table e Storage page storage is allowed for trace 225 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual One or more trace
371. x complex number consists of real and imaginary parts of floating point type Imaginary part of a complex number has lower case letter j at the end of a number Letter j cannot be used alone only as a suffix 50 45 3 kless T 0014 303 ey 2 wrong Correct format LEL 58 J NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual The following predefined constants case insensitive can be used PI Pi pi 3 14159265359 RAD Rad rad 1307 pi S7 42957795131 LOW Low low low logical level V HIGH High high high logical level V Constant RAD can be used to convert degrees to radians and radians to degrees degrees radians RAD radians degrees RAD where degrees 1S value in degrees and radians 1s value in radians All numerical component parameters and most of other parameters in NLS are floating point double Those parameters can be entered in any format however after that they are automatically converted and stored in the floating point format When floating point number is displayed an engineering notation with exponential multiplier and power of ten to be multiple of three is used Displayed 4 7e 8 470e 9 Names Component When a new component is created it is assigned a default name letter plus number Rip Way BAS Then the component can be renamed The name is case insensitive and may contain any almost characters and symbols When used in formula or function the
372. y from high to low Show transient e Transient calc step s Transient calculation step e AC amplitude f Amplitude of AC source V for voltage source and label A for current source Amplitude can be a constant or a function of frequency f For example Chel im i 1000 f e Error Expected error of AC analysis See Sweep AC source method chapter for details e Find periodic operating point Run transient prior to AC analysis until periodic steady state is reached e Sweep frequency from high to low Perform AC simulation starting from higher frequencies e Show transient Show transient data during AC simulation and keep transient data after AC simulation is complete 222 A NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual o Z transform Method Z transtorm fi Sampling period Sampling Data collection Exponential Z tos conversion e Sampling period s Data collection interval For switching circuits should be the same as switching period of the circuit e Data collection Method of data collection o Sampling o Integration o Delayed integration e Z tos conversion Method of conversion of z domain parameter z to Laplace parameter s o Exponential z e o Bilinear z 2 sT 2 sT where T is sampling period 223 M NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Advanced Settings Advanced settings apply both to transient and AC analysis Advanced Settings x Transient calculation step Logica
373. yet reliable displayed data e Equal to If selected a sampling step should be entered as well Data will be saved with the constant sampling step only which may give significant memory saving However some important details of the transient may be lost as well as risk of aliasing exists for fast changing signals 150 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Handling infinite voltage and current pulses Unlike many Spice based tools NL3 is capable to simulate circuits with true ideal components An example of such a component is an ideal switch which has zero impedance when closed infinite impedance when open and instantaneous switching from one state to another When an ideal switch is used for charging or discharging capacitors an infinitely short current pulse with infinite amplitude may occur Although amplitude of the pulse is infinite the area integral over time is limited and is equal to the total charge coming to or out of the capacitor at the moment of switching Similar situation may occur when current through the inductor is discontinued which results in an infinite voltage pulse across the inductor Integral of the voltage over time corresponds to a magnetic flux in the inductor Such an infinitely short pulse with infinite amplitude and limited area is 7 usually referred to as a Dirac pulse or delta function Since showing true SIP delta function on the transient graph would be problematic the following ay ae app
374. ypes e Number o Enter numerical value ik o Enter expression and press Enter The expression will be evaluated and replaced with numerical value A Ohm Ar2 e o Enter formula and press Enter The formula will be evaluated and its current numerical value will be displayed Click button to view edit formula CE e Initial Condition IC voltage current charge o Enter numerical value IC Y 25 o Enter expression and press Enter The expression will be evaluated and replaced with numerical value ic vivieq Enter fic me o Leave parameter blank no IC ic 130 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Function o Enter function as an expression Fea Y sate with proper variables ti List o Click y button and select value from drop down list click File name o Enter file name Filter nS o Click amp button to select file in the dialog box click e Text o Enter text Cmd RI 8K C2 1nd_ e PWL piece wise linear o Enter pwl parameter manually pul 11 2 o Click button to edit PWL in the dialog box see Working with PWL chapter for details pul 131 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e C code o Click button to edit code in the dialog box see Editing C code chapter for details click forfi size 1 oO 132 M4 NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Variables Window To open hide Variables window e
375. ysis output is set to specified output voltage IC 415 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual V V Vv Voltage controlled voltage source V V_VCVS_PWL nI5 Model Parameter Units Description PWL pwl Comma separated string K Vin Piece wise linear voltage controlled voltage source Source gain K is defined by pwl string as a function of input voltage Vin See Working with PWL model chapter for details Voltage controlled voltage source V V_VCVS_VCO nI5 Model Parameter Units Description VCO V1 V Voltage amplitude Sin or Pulse On voltage Pulse VO V Voltage baseline Sin or Pulse Off voltage Pulse dFdV Hz V Gain Phase deg Phase Type Signal type Sin Square T riangle Sawtooth Voltage controlled oscillator Output voltage is a signal with frequency equal to f Hz dFdV Vin For Sine signal VO is baseline and V1 is amplitude For Square Triangle and Sawtooth signals VO is Off level V1 is On level Phase is additional phase of the signal in degrees Voltage controlled voltage source V V_VCVS_Pulse nl5 Model Parameter Units Description Pulse Width S Pulse width Threshold V Voltage threshold V1 V Pulse On voltage VO V Pulse Off voltage One shot pulse generator When increasing input voltage Vin crosses Threshold value voltage pulse of Width duration is generated VO is pulse Off level V1 is pulse On level If increasing Vin crosses Threshold v
376. ze and or shape of the drawing select drawing then click square marker and drag Click to select Click and drag When placed drawings show up in a default format To change color line width and type of drawings select drawings then select Edit Format command from Main menu or right click on the drawings and select Format command from context menu To format just one drawings element simply double click on the element 82 BJ NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual Text and Variables To enter text click Insert text button Text dialog box will show up xl This 1z text M Outline Arc E Tex Pointer Lock pomter MN Line fi Line width Enter text in the text box The text will be simultaneously shown on the schematic The text can be formatted using toolbar buttons and controls Alignment Set alignment of multi line text e Align left e Center e Align right Orientation Change orientation of the text i e Rotate left Rotate right Font Change size of the font or select specific font type and options A e Larger font a e Smaller font Al e Select font 83 KE NL5 circuit simulator User s Manual e Run script Run script from the text the text is considered to be a script and will be executed Outline and pointer options Outline _ Outline Draw outline rectangle Pointer Draw pointer line from the text to specified point Arrow Draw

English version - NL5 Circuit Simulator

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents